ForewordI have great pleasure in presenting the recommendations of the Sub Committeeon Projects Specifications, set up under the APDRP Task Force constituted bythe Ministry of Power comprising of representatives from consultants like NTPC,PGCIL, CEA, PFC, product divisions of IEEMA and utilities like VVNL,CPDCL, NDPL etc. The Sub Committee on Projects was given the task to discussand submit recommendations on speedy implementation of projects under APDRP.

The Sub Committee held number of meetings and finalized the recommendations,which are detailed in the enclosed chapters. The report contains details on thefollowing issues in its recommendations:

• Standard layouts for 33/11 KV Station including Bill of quantities

• Standard construction practices for installation of Pole mounted transformers etc including Bill ofquantities

• Standard Specification of Major equipment

• Standard Contractual terms and condition

The Sub Committee proceeded to recommend based on the premise that the entire work pertaining toimprovement in sub-transmission and distribution network, including construction of High VoltageDistribution System to replace LT lines, construction of 33/11 KV substations and lines, reconductoringof 33/11 KV lines and capacity augmentation of 33/11 KV Sub Station will be awarded based on turnkey concept.

While utmost stress has been given on HVDS, it is desired that SEBs will notify prequalification ofcontractors for executing APDRP projects on turnkey basis. It has also been desired, that SEBs shouldfollow the procedures/guidelines laid down in these recommendations to facilitate Power Ministrysanction scheme reports under APDRP.

I am thankful to the members of the Sub Committee for having spared their valuable time to provideuseful inputs to make such recommendation. The Sub Committee has been immensely benefited by theinputs received from the members, particularly from JVVNL, CPDCL, NDPL, NTPC, CEA, PFC,NDPL and IEEMA.

I also thank, IEEMA for acting as a facilitator for coordinating and organizing the meetings of theSub Committee.

I am sure the recommendations will serve as useful inputs to the Ministry of Power in its effortstowards improving the Sub Transmission and Distribution network in the country through the APDRPscheme.

S. MajumdarConvenor

Sub Committee - ProjectsAPDRP Task Force

1

BACKGROUND & TERMS OF REFERENCE

Under the Accelerated Power Development &Reform Programme for improvement in Sub-Transmission and Distribution works an amountof Rs.40,000 crores is to be invested during the10th Plan. Out of this Rs.40,000 crores Rs.20,000crores will be grant/loan by the Government of Indiaand Rs.20,000 crores will be incentive componentdepending on the cash loss reduction. Under theAPDRP Government is financing 100% of theproject cost in special category States (all North-Eastern States, Sikkim, Uttranchal, HimachalPradesh and J&K) and 50% of the project cost innon-special category States.During the implementation of the APDRP Scheme,it was felt by MOP that a uniform approach may beadopted by all the States and it is for this reason aTask Force set up by the Government of India toreview the APDRP project for timely implementationof the various schemes.

ORGANISED BY IEEMA ON 31ST JAN. 2003

1. APDRP TASK FORCE–FIRST MEETINGIn the first meeting held on 31.01.2003, the TaskForce has decided following actions on theconcerned issues:

i) Workshop Proceedings: Proceedings ofWorkshop covering presentations anddeliberations will be circulated by IEEMA to TaskForce Members.

ii) Product specification: IEEMA product groupswill recommend on specification for the threeproducts, namely Distribution Transformers,Energy Meters and Capacitors. IEEMA will takeinto account specifications of NTPC, PGCIL,PFC & REC while preparing therecommendations. Draft specifications will becirculated to Task Force members forcomments.

iii) Standard Terms & conditions for Projects:IEEMA Project Division has prepared andcirculated standard terms & conditions forexecuting projects. Copies of these documentsare to be circulated to members of the TaskForce, SEBs/Utilities for comments.

iv) Quality Plan: During discussions, IEEMAmembers felt that Quality Plans of NTPC &PGCIL should be adopted for products to besupplied against APDRP. However, it wasrecommended that IEEMA can review theseQuality Plans and give their suggestions,alongwith qualifying requirements, vendorselection criteria, accrediting criteria etc. Itwas a lso suggested that appropr iateweightages for these criteria may also berecommended by IEEMA. Ministry of Powercan look at the recommendations and decideon adopting a vendor/product rating system

through third party.v) Field Quality Plan : Members deliberated on

advantages/benefits of product procurement vs.turnkey contract. General agreement was thatturnkey contract would help in effectiveimplementation of projects and achievingdesired results. Issues related to subsequentmaintenance of equipment were alsodiscussed and members felt the need toinculcate project management skills in theoperating staff of the utilities through propercommunication & training.

vi) Business Model for Turnkey Projects: Afterconsiderable deliberation, it was decided thatMr. S.L. Langer, Chairman, IEEMA ProjectsDivision and Mr. H.D. Charan, CMD, JodhpurVidyut Vitran Nigam Ltd. will discuss andsuggest a model to the task force for furtherdiscussion and action.

vii) Inspection requirement : Members discussedvarious methods being adopted for inspectionof material during supply, after supply and afterinstallation. It was felt that IEEMA memberscan deliberate on this and include this as apart of their recommendations for qualificationand vendor rating system.

viii)Third party inspection: A detailed discussionwas held on merits/demerits of third partyinspections. However, it was decided to finalisethe same in subsequent meeting.

ix) Product guarantee: After discussion, memberagreed that depending upon life expectancy ofthe product, IEEMA can propose in theirrecommendations the guarantee period whichcould be insisted upon for various product.

2. APDRP TASK FORCE–SECOND MEETINGIn another meeting of Task Force held on 5.03.2003at Delhi, members after deliberations decided onthe following action plan:i) The Projects Division of IEEMA will prepare

policy documents which will cover:a) Details of high voltage distribution system

alongwith its advantage and present globalscenario of this technology, etc.

b) Reasons for turnkey contracting.c) Recommended l ist of vendors and

suppliers for various equipment, etc.Policy documents will be sent to MOP by 31stMarch 2003. MOP will circulate this policydocument to organizations like PFC, REC,NTPC, CEA for their comments.

ii) IEEMA Projects Division will prepare a detaileddocument which will cover:

a) Project policy as mentioned above.b) Recommended list of vendors.c) Contractor qualification procedures and criteria.

2

d) Schedule for unit rates.e) Recommended Bill of material and model

drawings.f) Specifications for various equipment.g) Terms and conditions for contract.These detailed documents will also be circulatedby IEEMA to PFC, REC, NTPC, CEA, etc. to seektheir comments/suggestions.

3. APDRP TASK FORCE–THIRD MEETINGIn the third meeting of the Task Force held on12.5.2003 at Bangalore, it was decided to form Sub-Committees comprising of :a) Member from consultants likes CPRI, NTPC,

PGCIL and CEA.b) Representatives from IEEMA from different

product groups.c) Representative from utilities likes MSEB,

JVVNL, CPDCL, DISCOMS from Karnataka,WBSEB, TNEB, UPSEB officer etc.

A sub-Committee on Project will discuss andfinalise their recommendations on -a) Pre-qualification requirementsb) Unit rates for the various itemsc) Modalitities to pre-qualify vendorsA separate sub-committee for the products shouldmeet and freeze the specifications and suggestmodel QA plan for three products.It was suggested that manufacturers might explorethe possibility of taking up the Annual MaintenanceContract (AMC) in distribution sector.At the end of the discussions Mr. Arvind Jadhav,Joint Secretary, Ministry of Power suggested thatsubsequent to finalizing specifications and theproject execution modalities, groups should alsolook into preparing O&M Manuals,recommendations for training of personnel ofvarious utilities on maintenance of equipment.

4. TERMS OF REFERENCEDuring 3rd review meeting of the Task Force heldon 12.5.03 at Bangalore, it was decided that twosub-committees would be constituted for projectpre-qualif ication requirement and productspecification to formulate the guidelines forcirculation to respective SEBs/DISCOMs to facilitatethe implementation of the projects. Vide MOP letterD.O.No.2/5/2003-APDRP, dated 17.6.2003,fol lowing sub-committees on project pre-qualifications have been constituted :

Convenor : Mr. S. Majumdar, ExecutiveDirector, PGCIL

Members : Mr. G. Venkatraman, Sr. Manager(APDRP), NTPCMr. Alok Gupta, Director (CEA)Representative, PFCMr. Umesh Malaviya, DGM (PGCIL)Mr. TVSN Prasad, Managing

Director, CPDCL of AP Ltd.

Mr. S.L. Langer, Chairman ProjectsDivision, IEEMA.

IEEMA will act as facilitator for coordinating andorganising the meetings of sub-committee.

5. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SUB–COMMITTEEThough the MOP letter dated 17.6.03 vide whichthe sub-committee was formed mentioned onlyabout project pre-qualifications but the Committeemembers after detailed delegations concluded thatrecommendation by the Sub-committee should bemade on following issues :a) Project pre-qualification requirement and

request for pre-qualification.b) Standard terms & conditions of the contract.c) Unit rate for various items.Three meetings of sub-committee on project pre-qualification were held on 19.6.03, 3.7.03 and28.7.03. The following members of the sub-committee attended the Committee meetings :Mr. G. Venkatraman, Sr. Manager (APDRP), NTPCMr. Alok Gupta, Director (CEA)

Mr. Umesh Malaviya, DGM (PGCIL)Mr. V.K. Shah, DGM (PFC)Mr. S.L. Langer, Chairman Project Division, IEEMA.Shri V.D. Apte from NDPL who was specially inviteealso attended one of the above meetings. TheCommittee proceeded based on the premise thatentire works relating to improvement in Sub-transmission and distribution works wil l beawarded based on turn-key projects and thereforecovered the following activities:- Construction of High Voltage Distribution

System (including Distribution Transformers)to replace LT lines

- Construction of 33/11 kV Sub-stations

- Construction of 33, 11 kV lines- Reconductoring of 33, 11 kV lines- Capacity augmentation of 33/11 kV Sub-stationsRenovation and Modernization of 33/11 kV Sub-station was also discussed but it was felt that R&Mworks includes number of i tems for whichstandardization of technical specifications may bedifficult and this item was left to distributionlicensee to cover in their implementation of APDRPprojects based on their experience and status oftheir 33/11 kV Sub-stations.

A. PROJECT PRE-QUALIFICATION (PQ)REQUIREMENT AND REQUEST FOR PQ

The Committee also felt that the distributionlicensee would adopt two-stage execution policy.In the first stage pre-qualification bids will be invitedbased on the standard pre-qualif icationrequirement finalized by this committee, asenclosed in the second stage tendering processwill be initiated and only those bidders will be invited

3

v v v

which were short-listed based on PQ which meetspre-qualification requirement.Based on the various discussions by theCommittee Members the request for pre-qualification (procedure for inviting pre-qualificationbids) and qualifying requirements for bidding forturn-key packages under APDRP projects areenclosed in Annexure-1 and Annexure-2respectively.

B. STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THECONTRACTDraft Terms and Conditions of the contractprepared by IEEMA were circulated to all the utilitiesbut there was no response. During the meetingIEEMA once again circulated draft terms andconditions of the project and it was desired thatthese standard terms and conditions for the projectmay be recommended by the sub-committee. Thesub-committee members after going through thedocuments felt that such document prepared byIEEMA will not be generally acceptable to SEBs.They will have no hesitation in adopting terms &conditions followed by PSU like NTPC, PGCIL. Assuch document prepared by IEEMA was notapproved. It was decided that NTPC document willbe adopted incorporating some of suggestionsmade by IEEMA. These clauses were pertaining toterms of payment for supply and erection, bankguarantee, right of way, handing over and takingover of the projects etc. The finalized document isenclosed which can be circulated to the utilities.

C. UNIT RATE FOR VARIOUS ITEMSCommittee decided to prepare a bill of quantitiesfor the following:

• Construction of High Voltage DistributionSystem (including Distribution Transformers)to replace LT lines as enclosed (Page 1 to 8)

• Construction of 33/11 KV Sub-stations andassociated 33 kV feeders as enclosed (Page 9to 17)

• Capacity augmentation (depending upon theschemes selected by DISCOMS)

• Construction of 33, 11 kV lines• Reconductoring of 33, 11 kV linesThis will help SEBs to understand the scope ofwork involved in each and every activity they wouldlike to carry out. The unit rate for each and everyitem to be executed will help SEB to prepare theestimate for their projects. These unit rates arebased on the recent projects being executed bythe parties. However, these rates can be takenonly as suggestive and cannot be directly

implemented by the Distribution Companieswithout going through the tendering process. TheDistribution companies can ask the pre-qualifiedcontractors either to quote as ±% over thesuggested rates or if they so desire they can askthe parties to quote the rates against individualitems.The unit rates indicated for the various items arebased on the technical specifications as perAnnexure enclosed. If the technical specificationundergo change, the unit rate for that particular itemwill get changed accordingly.

6. RECOMMENDATIONSPriority will be given on High Voltage DistributionSystem wherever new system is being put up orR&M of existing system is undertaken.SEBs will issue notification for pre-qualifying thecontractors for executing APDRP Projects onturnkey basis. They will specify the PQ criteria asenclosed.• SEBs shall execute the approved schemes

under APDRP with an emphasis of HVDSSystem.

• All APDRP Projects will be executed on turnkeybasis.

• All SEBs will follow the standard drawings forHVDS enclosed with these recommendationsto the extent possible.

• Technical specifications as enclosed will befollowed in general.

• Standard terms & conditions as enclosed willbe followed by all SEBs.

• The Pre-qualification will remain valid for aperiod of one year.

Discoms will then specify the Circular / Divisionsin which the jobs are to be carried out and issuetenders to the pre-qualified contractors alongwithBOQ, Standard Drawings, Standard Terms &Conditions and the equipment specification. If theyso desire they will enclose the unit rates also.Qualified parties will quote the prices based onthe same. They will also give undertaking forcompleting certain volume / amount of job over aperiod of one year. They should also undertake togive 10% performance guarantee for the samebefore award of contract.Discoms on receipt of the offers will establish themost competitive workable rates and all the pre-qualified parties will be asked to match the prices.Parties will then be awarded the contract based onthe commitment made by them and on submissionof 10% performance guarantee. This waysimultaneously huge volume of job can be gotexecuted.

4

2.1. REQUEST FOR PRE-QUALIFICATIONDISCOM will issue the PQ notice for Pre-qualification of contractors from Central Office.After receipt of PQ documents from the Contractor,DISCOM will process the same and qualify thecontractorsSuch qualification will remain valid for one yearfrom the date of finalization of pre-qualificationQualif ied contractors wil l be intimated theprocedure for award of contract.

2.2. PROCEDURE FOR AWARD OF CONTRACT2.2.1. DISCOM will then ask the qualified contractors to

quote the job on turnkey basis. For this, scheduleof rates for various items shall be finalized.Qualified contractors will be asked to quote therates based on schedule of rates along withrequisite bid guarantees.

2.2.2 Qualified contractor will commit the value of jobsthey can do during one year. They will giveundertaking to give performance guarantee for avalue of 10% of the job committed before award ofcontract.

2.2.3 DISCOM will form a committee comprising of theirown members and consultant to assess thereasonability of the lowest offer obtained. Once itis established, they will get concurrence from thequalified contractor to carry out the job on thecommon established rates. The contractors whoagree to carry out the jobs on the established rateswill submit the performance guarantee. They willthen be awarded contract for the value contractorhas committed as per the discretion of DISCOM.Contract will be governed by the model biddocument enclosed.

2.3. QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDINGFOR TURNKEY PACKAGES UNDER APDRPPROJECTSTo be qualified for the bidding, the bidder mustmeet the following minimum criteria:

2.3.1 The bidder must have successfully executedcontracts for construction of at least:(A) 50 (fifty) kms. of 11 kV or above voltage class

lines

(B) 3 (Three) nos. 33 kV or above voltage classsubstations in the last five years which mustbe in satisfactory operation for at least two yearsas on the date of bid opening.

2.3.2 A firm which does not meet all the requirements of

para 1.0 A&B but have successfully executedcontracts as per 1.0 (A) in the last 5 years which isin satisfactory operation for at least two years ason the date of bid opening may form a consortium(as a lead partner) with another firm who havesuccessfully executed jobs as per Para 1 (B) above.Similarly a f irm which does not meet therequirement of Para 1 (A) & (B) but has successfullyexecuted contracts as per 1 (B) in the last 5 yearswhich must be in satisfactory operation for at least2 years as on the date of bid opening. Can form aconsortium with (as a lead partner) another firmwho has successfully executed contract as per 1(A)above.

2.3.3 The bidder or the partner(s) of the consortium musthave executed similar contracts on turnkey basisand should have adequate in house design &engineering infrastructure facil it ies, qualityassurance and safety set up to carry out similartype of work.

2.3.4 The bidder or the partner(s) of the consortium mustbe in possession of HT Electrical Contractor’License.

2.3.5 The bidder must have minimum average annualturnover for the best three years out of last fivefinancial years of Rs.30 Crore out of which at least20 Crore should be from supply and erection ofl ines /sub stat ions business. In case of aConsortium, the figures for each of the partnersshall be added together to determine the bidder’scompliance with the above minimum criteria.However, the lead partner must meet, not less than50% of the above minimum criteria and the otherpartner must meet, not less than 25% of the aboveminimum criteria.

2.3.6 The bidder shall furnish documentary evidence insupport of the qualifying requirements as stipulatedabove. The turnover from supply & erection can becertified by Chartered Accountant.This PQ will be valid for the particular Discom forall APDRP Projects for a period of one year fromthe date of finalisation of PQ.

2.3.7 Notwithstanding anything stated hereinabove, theOwner reserves the right to assess the capacityand capability of the bidder to execute the contract,should the circumstances warrant suchassessment in the overall interest of the owner.The owner also reserves the right to waive off minordeviations if, in the opinion of the owner, do notmaterially affect the capability of the bidder toperform the contract.

2. PROCEDURE TO AWARD CONTRACT & PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

v v v

5

3.01 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS3.01.1 The............................................................................

hereinafter called ‘..............’ / ‘OWNER’ will receivebids in respect of equipment to be furnished anderected as set-forth in the accompanyingspecifications. All bids shall be prepared andsubmitted in accordance with these instructions.

3.01.2 Bids submitted after the time and date fixed forreceipt of bids as set out in the Invitation to Bid areliable to be rejected and returned to the Bidders.

3.01.3 The ‘Works’ referred herein shall cover the entirescope of the proposal which includes furnishingand erection of equipment including the successfulcompletion of Commissioning / Performance andGuarantee Tests which the Owner desires to getexecuted.

3.01.4 Bidder may please note that no deviationswhatsoever to certain important conditions of theBidding Documents is permitted by the Owner and,therefore, the Bidders are advised that whiledeveloping Bid Proposals and prices, theseconditions may appropriately be taken intoconsideration especially with respect to their effect,wherever applicable, on the cash flow projectionsduring the execution of the Contract.

3.01.5 Bidders are required to furnish a certificate in thisregard as per the format enclosed at Annexure-D(INB) in a separate sealed envelope superscribed“Certificate Regarding Acceptance of ImportantConditions”. Any Bid not accompanied by suchCertificate shall be rejected by the Owner and shallnot be opened.

3.02 PROJECT INFORMATION

3.02.1 Information regarding the project size, plantcapacities, location, approach to Site andmeteorological condition as prevailing at the Siteare given in the ‘Project Synopsis’ [enclosed withvolume-II].This information will be given by theowner in special condition of contract.

3.03 QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS OF BIDDERS3.03.1 This bidding is open to any bidder who provides

satisfactory evidence that he:

(a) does not anticipate change in the ownershipduring the proposed period of work. (If such achange is anticipated, the scope and effectthereof shall be defined);

(b) has adequate financial stability and status tomeet the financial obligations pursuant to thescope of the Works (The Bidders should submitat least 5 copies of their profit and loss accountand balance sheet for the last five years);

(c) has adequate resources / capacity available toperform the works properly and expeditiouslywithin the time period specified. The evidenceshall consist of written details of their executingcapacit ies and present commitments

(excluding the work under this specification) ofthe Bidder or his principal. If the presentcommitments are such that the bidder’scapacity results in inadequacy of his capacitiesto meet the requirement of work correspondingto this bid, then the details of alternativearrangements to be organised by the Bidderfor this purpose and which shall meet theOwner’s approval, shall also be furnished;

(d) has adequate field service organisation toprovide the necessary field erection andmanagement services required to successfullyerect, test and commission the equipment asrequired by the specifications and documents;and

(e) has established quality assurance systemsand organization designed to achieve highlevels of engineering standards in the executionof works.

3.03.2 In addition, the bidder shall meet qualifyingrequ i rements as per C lause 3 .0 o f SCC(Volume – 1A).

3.03.3 The above stated requirements are a minimumand the Owner reserves the right to request for anyadditional information and also reserves the rightto reject the proposal of any Bidder, if in the opinionof the Owner, the qualification data is incompleteor the Bidder if found not qualified to satisfactorilyperform the Works.

3.04 SCOPE OF THE PROPOSAL3.04.1 The scope of the proposal shall be on the basis of

a single Bidder’s responsibility, completely coveringall the equipment specif ied under theaccompanying Technical Specifications. It willinclude the following:(a) detailed design of the equipment(b) complete manufacture including shop testing,(c) providing engineering drawings, data,

operation manual, etc. for the Owner’s approval.(d) packing and transportation from the

manufacturer’s works to the Site.(e) receipt, storage, preservation and conservation

of equipment at the Site.(f) pre-assembly, if any, erection, testing and

commissioning of all the equipment,(g) reliability tests and performance and guarantee

tests on completion of commissioning; and(h) furnishing of spares, as applicable.

3.04.2 Bids not covering the above entire scope of Worksmay be treated as incomplete and hence rejected.

3.05 TIME SCHEDULE3.05.1 The basic consideration and the essence of the

Contract shall be strict adherence to the timeschedule for performing the specified Works.

3.05.2 The Owner’s requirements of completion schedule

3. INSTRUCTION TO BIDDER

6

for the Works are mentioned in the accompanyingSpecial Condition of Contract, Volume 1A.

3.05.3 The completion schedule as stated in the SpecialCondition of Contract shall be one of the majorfactors in consideration of the bids. The Ownerreserves the right to request for a change in thework schedule during pre-award discussions withsuccessful Bidder.

3.06 BRAND NAMES3.06.1 The specific reference in these specifications and

documents to any material by trade name, makeor catalogue number shall be construed asestablishing standard of quality and performanceand not as limiting competition. However Biddersmay offer other similar equipment provided itmeets the specif ied standard, design andperformance requirements. The Bidder shallfurnish technical information about the alternativeequipment to enable the Owner to determine theacceptability of equipment. The Owner shall be thesole judge of the acceptability of the alternativeequipment.

3.07 BID GUARANTEE3.07.1 Bid Guarantee of Rs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Rupees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . only.

(in words)shall accompany each bid in original and five (5)copies of the original in separate sealed envelope,super scribed on the top as under:-

“Original Bid Guarantee for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Name of Package)

Specification No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . due on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Date of Bid Opening)from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Name of the Bidder)

The Bid Guarantee offered shall be in one of thefollowing alternative forms (all subject to approvalof the Owner):(a) A crossed bank draft in favour of . . . . . . . . . . . .

payable at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from any nationalisedor scheduled bank.

(b) A cheque certified by the Banker as “good forpayment” drawn in favour of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on any nationalisedor scheduled bank;

(c) In lieu of cash desposit to facilitate bidders, anirrevocable Bank Guarantee of anyNationalised or Scheduled Bank in favour of . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proformaof the Bank Guarantee is enclosed as Annexure-A (INB) to this Instructions to Bidders.

3.07.1.1 The Bid Guarantee shall be accompanied withLetter of undertaking on non-judicial paper of

appropriate value as per prescribed format.3.07.2 The Bid Guarantee shall be made payable without

any condition to the Owner ‘On demand’. The BidGuarantee shall be valid for a period of seven (7)calender months from the date set for opening ofthe bid i.e. if the bid is due for opening on 1stJanuary, the Bid Guarantee shall be valid upto andinclusive of the following 31st July.

3.07.3 In consideration of the Owner opening andconsidering the Bid for purposes of award, theBidder shall keep his Bid valid for a period of six (6)months from the date of opening of the Bid, duringwhich period the Bidder agrees not to vary, alter orrevoke his Bid as a whole or in part. If the Bidder,however, fails to keep his Bid valid for 6 (six) monthsor varies it during the period then the Owners shallbe entitled to forfeit the Bid Guarantee amountwithout any notice or proof of damages etc.The Bidder shall submit his Bid as required in theContract documents along with Letter ofUndertaking in the performa enclosed in the BidDocuments as Annexure-A1 (INB).

3.07.4 The Bid Guarantee of the successful Bidder towhom a contract is awarded will be returned afterthe said Bidder provides the Contract PerformanceGuarantee and signs the Contract Agreement asper stipulations elsewhere in the Bid Documents.

3.07.5 If the successful Bidder fails to submit a ContractPerformance Guarantee as specified in the ContractDocuments within 30 calendar days after the dateof Notice of Award of the Contract, or fails to signthe contract agreement in accordance with Clause5.0 Section-GCC Volume-I, then the Bid Guaranteeamount will be forfeited by the Owner, without anynotice of proof of damages etc.

3.07.6 The Bid Guarantee of all unsuccessful Biddersexcept that of the successful Bidder will be returnedwithin thirty (30) days after the Award of the Contract.

3.07.7 Bids not accompanied by the requisite BidGuarantee in accordance with Clause 7.1 aboveor if the “Bid Guarantee” is of inadequate valuewill not be entertained and shall be returnedunopened.

3.07.8 No interest will be payable by the Owner on theabove Bid Guarantee.

3.08 SUBMISSION OF BIDS3.08.1 All the bids shall be prepared by typing or printing

with indelible black ink in the proposal sheetsenclosed as Volume-IB “Bid Proposal Sheets” andVolume-II ‘A’ “Data Requirements”. Two copies ofsuch blank proposal sheets are enclosed herewithfor this purpose. Each bidder shall submit hisproposal one in original together with five copiesthere of, for this purpose, bidder shall use one ofthe two copies of proposal sheets as original andfive copies thereof shall be prepared at Biddersend. Second copy of the proposal sheets may beretained with bidder for their reference and record.The Bidder’s bid and the documents attached thereto shall be considered for forming part of thecontract documents.

7

3.08.2 The outside of the envelope should also indicateclearly the name of the Bidder and his address. Inaddition the left hand corner of the envelope orcontainer should indicate the SpecificationNumber and the bid opening date and time.

3.08.3 The bids will be opened at the time and date set foropening of bids, in the presence of those bidderspresent. Bidder’s authorised representatives (uptotwo persons) may attend the bid opening.

3.08.4 The Bidder has the option of sending the bid byregistered post or by submitting the bid in person,so as to reach by the date and time indicated in theInvitation to Bid. Bids submitted by telex/telegramwill not normally be accepted.

3.08.5 Bids submitted after the time and date fixed for thereceipt of bids as set out in the Invitation to Bid, areliable to be rejected and returned to the bidders.

3.08.6 The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid whichis not deposited according to the instructionsstipulated above.

3.08.7 The bid guarantee alongwith ‘Letter of Undertaking’and Certificate Regarding. Acceptance of ImportantConditions’ shall be furnished in separate seafedenvelope(s) in accordance with Clause 1.0 and7.0 of Section-INB.

3.09 LANGUAGE OF THE BID3.09.1 All information in the bid shall be in English.

Information in any other language shall beaccompanied by its translation in English. Failureto comply with this may disqualify a bid. In the eventof any discrepancy in meaning, the Englishlanguage copy of all documents shall govern.

3.10 SIGNATURE OF BIDS3.10.1 The bid must contain the name, residence and

place of business of the person or persons makingthe bid and must be signed and sealed by theBidder with his usual signature. The names of allpersons signing should also be typed or printedbelow the signature.

3.10.2 Bid by a partnership must be furnished with fullnames of all partners and be signed with thepartnership name, followed by the signature(s) anddesignation(s) of the authorised partner(s) or otherauthorised representative(s).

3.10.3 Bids by Corporation/Company must be signed withthe legal name of the Corporation/Company by thePresident, Managing Director or by the Secretaryor other person or persons authorised to bid onbehalf of such Corporation/Company in the matter.

3.10.4 A bid by a person who affixes to his signature theword ‘President’, ‘Managing Director’ ‘Secretary’,‘Agent’ or other designation without disclosing hisprincipal will be rejected.

3.10.5 Satisfactory evidence of authority of the personsigning on behalf of the Bidder shall be furnishedwith the bid.

3.10.6 The Bidder’s name stated on the proposal shallbe the exact legal name of the firm.

3.10.7 Erasures or other changes in the bid documentsshall be over the initials of the person signing thebid.

3.10.8 Bids not conforming to the above requirements ofsigning may be disqualified.

3.11 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE PROPOSAL3.11.1 The bids must clearly indicate the name of the

manufacturer, the type of model of each principalitem of equipment proposed to be furnished anderected. The bid should also contain drawings anddescriptive materials indicating generaldimensions, material from which the parts aremanufactured, principles of operation, the extentof pre-essembly involved, major constructionequipment proposed to be deployed, method oferection and the proposed erection organisationalstructure.

3.11.2 The above information shall be provided by theBidder in the form of separate sheets, drawings,catalogues, etc. in five copies.

3.11.3 Any bid not containing sufficient descriptive materialto describe accurately the equipment proposedmay be treated as incomplete and hence rejected.Such descriptive materials and drawings submittedby the Bidder will be retained by the Owner. Anymajor departure from these drawings anddescriptive material submitted will not be permittedduring the execution of the Contract without specificwritten permission of the Owner.

3.11.4 Oral statements made by the Bidder at any timeregarding quality, quantity or arrangement of theequipment or any other matter wil l not beconsidered.

3.11.5 Standard catalogue pages and other documentsof the Bidder may be used in the bid to provideadditional information and data as deemednecessary by the Bidder.

3.11.6 The Bidder, alongwith his proposal, shall submit alist of recommended erection equipment andmaterials which will be required for the purpose oferection of equipment and materials suppliedunder the contract.

3.11.7 In case the ‘Proposal’ information contradictsspecification requirements, the specificationrequirements will govern, unless otherwise broughtout clearly in the technical and commercialdeviation schedule.

3.11.8 The bid guarantee along with ‘Letter ofUndertaking’ and ‘Certif icate RegardingAcceptance of Important Conditions’ and shall befurnished in separate envelope in accordance withclause 1.0 and 7.0 of Section-INB.

3.12 UNDERSTANDING AND CLARIFICATIONS ONDOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

3.12.1 The Bidder is required to carefully examine thespecifications and documents and fully informhimself as to all the conditions and matters whichmay in any way affect the Works or the cost thereof.If any Bidder finds discrepancies or omissions in

8

the specifications and documents or is in doubt asto the true meaning of any part, he shall at oncerequest in writing for an interpretation/clarificationto the Owner in triplicate. The Owner, then, will issueinterpretation and clarifications as he may think fitin writing. After receipt of such interpretations andclarifications, the Bidder may submit his bid butwithin the time and date as specified in the Invitationto Bid. All such interpretations and clarificationsshall form a part of the specif ications anddocuments, and accompany the Bidder’s proposal.

3.12.2 Verbal clarifications and information given by theOwner or his employee(s) or his representative(s)shall not in any way be binding on the Owner.

3.13 LOCAL CONDITIONS3.13.1 It will be imperative on each Bidder to fully inform

himself of all local conditions and factors whichmay have any effect on the execution of the Workscovered under these documents andspecifications. The Owner shall not entertain anyrequest for clarifications from the bidders, regardingsuch local conditions.

3.13.2 It must be understood and agreed that such factorshave properly been investigated and consideredwhile submitting the proposals. No claim forfinancial adjustment to the Contract awarded underthese specifications and documents will beentertained by the Owner. Neither any change inthe time schedule of the Contract nor any financialadjustments arising thereof shall be permitted bythe Owner, which are based on the lack of suchclear information or its effect on the cost of the Worksto the Bidder.

3.14 PRICE BASIS AND PAYMENTS

3.14.1 The bidders shall quote the prices as per the priceschedule enclosed for supply as well as erection.The prices will remain valid till the entire period ofcontract unless otherwise specified in specialcondition of contract. The offer of the bidder quotingprices on the basis other than specified in specialconditions of contract is liable to be rejected.

3.14.2 Bidder shall indicate bid prices in Indian Rupees only.

3.15 CUSTOMS DUTIES AND TAXES

3.15.1 All custom duties, excise duties, sales taxes andother levies payable by the bidders or theirvendors/sub-suppliers while procuring anycomponents, sub assemblies and raw-materialsshall be included in the bid price and no claim onthis behalf will be entertained by the Owner.

3.15.2 Sales tax, excise duty, local taxes and other levies inrespect of all supplies to be made under the contract,irrespective of whether manufactured and suppliedby the bidder or supplied as bought out items fromtheir sub-vendors shall be included in the bid priceand no claim on this behalf will be entertained bythe Owner except in case of statutory variation.

3.15.3 As regards the Income Tax, surcharge on IncomeTax and other corporate taxes the Bidder shall be

responsible for such payment to the concernedauthorities.

3.15.4 The Owner shall issue Essentially Certificate, asper relevant policies of the Govt. of India to facilitatethe Bidders to avail concessional rate of CustomDuty (applicable for Sub-stations) under Govt. ofIndia APDRP, if any, on import of raw materials,components, sub-assemblies and equipment, ifany, required for manufacture of equipment/plantto be supplied by him under the Contract. However,the Bidders shall be solely responsible for availingthe benefit of concessional rate of custom duty fromthe Govt. of India and in case of failure of the bidderto receive such benefit, the Owner shall neither beresponsible nor liable in this regard in any mannerwhatsoever. In this regard, Bidder shall declare theimport content in the relevant Schedule of BPS.Essentiality Certificate, if required, will be issuedon this basis.

3.16 POLICY FOR BIDS UNDER CONSIDERATIONBids shall be deemed to be under considerationimmediately after they are opened and until suchtime official intimation of award/rejection is madeby the Owner to the bidders. While the bids areunder consideration, bidders and/or theirrepresentatives or other interested parties areadvised to refrain from contacting by any means,the Owner and/or his employees/representativeson matters related to the bids under consideration.The Owner, if necessary, willobtain clarifications on the bids by requesting forsuch information from any or all the bidders, eitherin writing or through personal contact as may benecessary. Bidder will not be permitted to changethe substance of the bid after the bid has beenopened.

3.17 EFFECT AND VALIDITY OF BID3.17.1 The submission of any bid connected with these

documents and specifications shall constitute anagreement that the Bidder shall have no cause ofaction or claim, against the Owner for rejection ofhis bid. The Owner shall always be at liberty toreject or accept any bid or bids at his sole discretionand any such action will not be called into questionand the Bidder shall have no claim in that regardagainst the Owner.

3.17.2 The bid should be kept valid for a period of six (6)calendar months from the date set for opening of bids.

3.18 AWARD OF CONTRACT3.18.1 Notification of Award of Contract will be made in

writing to the successful Bidder by the Owner.3.18.2 The Contract will be awarded to the best qualified

and responsive Bidder offering the lowestevaluated bid in conformity with the requirementsof these specifications and documents and theOwner shall be the sole judge in this regard andsubject to the provisions of this Instructions toBidders and other terms and conditions detailed

9

out in these documents and specifications. Aresponsive bid is one which accepts all terms andconditions of these specifications and documentswithout any major modifications. A majormodification is one which affects in any way theprices, quality, quantity or delivery period of theequipment or which l imits in any way theresponsibilities or liabilities of the Bidder or anyrights of the Owner as required in thesespecifications and documents. However, theOwner may waive any minor informalities orirregularities in the bid.

3.18.3 The Owner reserves the right to award separatecontracts in line with the terms and conditionsspecified in the accompanying TechnicalSpecifications.

3.19 RAILWAY SIDING[Not applicable]

3.20 SPARE PARTS3.20.1 In cases where it is mandatory for the bidders to

quote certain identified spare parts, the same areincluded in the accompanying TechnicalSpecifications. In such cases, the itemised pricebreak-up of such spares on F.O.R. Bidder’s worksbasis (for the purposes of payment only) shall beindicated in the bid. The Bidder shall furtherindicate itemwise price break-up on FOR Site basis.The prices shall be inclusive of all taxes and dutiessuch as sales tax, excise duty and other levies.The prices of such spares shallnot be subject to price adjustment on any accountwhatsoever, and the same shall be suitably takeninto considerat ion for the purposes of bidevaluation. The above prices shall not be includedin the lumpsum price but indicated separately inthe schedules.

3.20.2 In addition the Bidder shall provide in the form of aschedule given in Volume IB, a complete list ofrecommended spare parts for three yearsoperation of the equipment covered under hisproposal. Such list will also indicate the itemisedprices on F.O.R. Bidder’s works for each item. Noother basis of prices shall be quoted. The prices ofthese spare parts shall be on firm price basis andwill not be taken into consideration for the purposesof bid evaluation. Other relevant terms andconditions of these documents shall also beapplicable to such spares.

3.20.3 The Bidder shall also quote his delivery periodsfor the above spares.

3.20.4 Such spare parts list will be used by the Owner todecide about the additional spares to be procuredagainst his spares requirements for equipmentquoted. The quantities of the spares to be procuredshall be decided by the Owner and the Bidder shallfurnish all spares ordered.

3.20.5 All spares shall be warranted to be new and inaccordance with the Contract documents and befree from defects in design, materials andworkmanship for 6000 hours of operation, normalwear excepted, or for a period of 18 months from

the date of their receipt at Site, whichever is later. Incase of failure or non-conformance tospecifications, the Contractor shall replace themfree of cost to the Owner.

3.20.6 In cases where no mandatory spares are indicated,the Bidder shall comply with the requirementsindicated in clause 20.2 through 20.4 above.

3.20.7 All the spares (except commissioning spareswhich will be consigned by the contractor to hisown site representative) shall be consigned to theChief Materials Manager of the Project.

3.21 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS3.21.1 General

The bids received and accepted will be evaluatedby the Owner to ascertain the best and lowestevaluated bid in the interest of the Owner, for thecomplete works covered under thesespecifications and documents. In such evaluationprocess, the Owner reserves the right to allowPurchase Preference to eligible bids as applicableas per extant guidelines of Govt. of India in thisregard. The bidders may apprise themselves ofrelevant Notification of Govt. of India in this regardbefore submission of their bids.

3.21.2 Definitions and Meanings

For the purposes of the evaluation and comparisonof Bids, the following meanings and definitions willapply:

(a) ‘Bid Price’ shall mean the base price quoted byeach Bidder in his proposal for the completescope of Works.

(b) “Differential Price” shall mean the summationof the equalising elements of price whileevaluating the bids, for deviations anddeficiencies in the Bidder’s proposal inreference to the bid document as per theguidelines mentioned in bid document.

3.21.3.1 Calculation of Differential Price for BidsThe Differential Price to be added to the Bid Priceof each bid during evaluation and comparison shallbe derived as under:Differential Price (DP) = n1 F1 + n2 F2 ................. nn Fnwhere F1, F2 ............ Fn are the various factors inIndian Rupees per unit of parameter differential ordeficiency in the equipment and services offeredas stipulated in these specifications, n 1,n2 .............nn are the respective parameter differential ordeficiency in the corresponding units, to bedetermined from the bidder’s proposals. The abovefactors and corresponding unit of parameterdifferential are brought out in the TechnicalSpecifications.

3.21.3.2 Cost of Compensation for DeviationsDeviations specifically declared by the bidder inthe respective Deviation Schedules of Bid ProposalSheets only will be taken into account for thepurpose of evaluation. The bidders are required todeclare the prices for the withdrawal of thedeviations declared by them in the DeviationSchedules. Such prices declared by the bidders

10

for the withdrawal of the deviations in the DeviationSchedules shall be added to the bid price tocompensate for these deviations. In case pricesfor the withdrawal of deviations are not furnishedby the bidder, the Owner shall convert suchdeviations into a Rupee value and add to the bidprice to compensate for these deviations. Indetermining the Rupee value of the deviations, theOwner will use parameters consistent with thosespecified in the specifications and documents and/or other information as necessary and available tothe Owner. In case the bidder refuses to withdrawthe deviations at the cost of withdrawal indicatedby the bidder in the Deviation Schedules, the bidsecurity of the bidder may be forfeited.Bidder may note that deviations, variations andadditional conditions etc. found elsewhere in thebid other than those stated in the DeviationSchedules, save those pertaining to any rebates,shall not be given effect to in evaluation and it willbe assumed that the bidder complies to all theconditions of Bidding Documents. In case bidderrefuses to withdraw, without any cost to the Owner,those deviations which the bidder did not state inthe Deviations Schedules, the bid security of thebidder may be forfeited.

3.21.4 Arithmetical ErrorsArithmetical errors will be rectified on the followingbasis :If there is a discrepancy between words andfigures, the amount in words will prevail. It there isdiscrepancy between the unit price and the totalprice which is obtained by multiplying the unit priceand quantity, or between sub-totals and the totalprice, the unit or sub-total price shall prevail, andthe total price shall be corrected. In case ofdiscrepancy between sub-total price obtained byadding various prices in the schedule and the sub-total price indicated for that particular schedule,the sub-total obtained by addition of variousarithmetically corrected prices would be consideredfor evaluation.However, the Owner shall be entitled to award thecontract at the lowest of the prices arrived at fromvarious schedules, identified for that purposes, inthe Bid Proposal Sheets.If the bidder does not accept the correction of theerrors as above, his bid will be rejected and theamount of bid guarantee forfeited.

3.22 PRICE ADJUSTMENT (Only for the project workswith the Schedule beyond 24 to 36 months)

3.22.1 Only if specifically required in the SpecialConditions of Contract the Bidder shall in hisproposal quote a base price, which will be subjectto price adjustment. The price adjustmentprovisions herein detailed shall not be taken intoconsideration for the purposes of bid evaluation.

3.22.2 Only the following components of the bid price willbe subjected to price adjustment provisions:(a) The ex-factory price component of the

equipment (excluding equipment and

consumable materials required for erection)subject to a ceiling of twenty (20) percent of ex-works price of equipment and materials (sparesexcluded) unless otherwise specified in theaccompany Special Conditions of Contract.

(b) The erection component, subject to a ceiling oftwenty percent (20%) of the erection pricecomponent, unless otherwise specified in theSpecial Conditions of Contract.

3.22.3 The actual amount of price adjustment shall bedetermined satisfying the conditions specified inclause ‘Price Adjustment’ in General Terms andConditions of Contract of this Volume-1.

3.22.4 The price adjustment formulae for the variouscomponents of the bid price, as broken down inClause 22.2 above shall be construed as stipulatedhereinafter.

3.22.4.1 Ex-factory Price-component of the equipment

The formula designed for calculating the priceadjustment to be applied to the ex-factory price-component of the equipment shall be as follows :

a.A1 b.B1 c.C1 d.D1 e.E1 l.L1

EC1 = EC [F + —— + —— + —— + —— + —— + —— ]Ao Bo Co Do Eo Lo

Where

EC1

= Adjusted ex-factory price-component ofequipment, shipmentwise,

EC = Ex-factory price-component of the bid forequipment shipmentwise,

F = Fixed portion of the ex-factory price-component of equipment, which will not besubjected to any adjustments.

a,b, = Co-efficients for major materials involved inc,d, the ex-factory cost of equipment.and eA,B,C, = Corresponding published price indices ofD and E various materials.

l = Co-efficient of labour content in the ex-factory costof equipment.

L = Labour index.

Sub-script ‘o’ refers to indices as on 30 days priorto date set for opening of bids.

Sub-script ‘1’ refers to indices as of :

(i) one month prior to the date of shipment, forlabour; and

(ii) at the expiry of two-thirds (2/3) period from thedate of issuance of Letter of Award to the dateof shipment, for materials.

For the purposes of this clause the date ofshipment shall mean Contract date of shipment oractual date of shipment whichever is earlier.The stipulations regarding the various co-efficients,their values, the name of the materials etc. arebrought out in the Special Conditions of Contract.

3.22.4.2 Erection ComponentThe formula for calculation of the monthly pricevariation of the cost for erection portion of the Worksis indicated and explained below :

11

0.75 F1

E1 = E0 (0.25 + —————)

FoWhereE1 = Adjusted erection price of each erection

billing.Eo = Value of erection work done in the billing

period as established in the Contract.F = Indian Field Labour Index - namely All

India Consumer Price Index for IndustrialWorkers as Published by Labour BureauSimla, of the Government of India.

For the purposes of this clause the billing periodshall mean the billing period as per Contract timeschedule or actual period whichever is earlier.Note : Subscript ‘o’ will correspond to 30 days priorto date set for opening of bids andSubscript ‘1’ will correspond to the month of billing.

3.22.4.3 In case of shipments which are delayed beyondthe schedule date of shipment for reasonsattributable to the Contractor, the price adjustmentprovisions shall not be applicable for the period oftime between the schedule date of shipment andthe actual date of shipment. For this purpose, theschedule date of shipment shall be as identified inline with provisions of Clause entitled ‘Time-theEssence of Contract’ in Section GCC of Volume-1.

3.22.5 Adjusted Contract Price :

The adjusted Contract Price shall be∑ EC1 + ∑ E1 + other elements of Contract Price, ifany.

3.22.6 Indices of Price AdjustmentThe indices shall be clearly named in the Bidder’sproposal for each item of escalable material andlabour. The indices shall be well established andnationally recognised. If any other index is proposedfull justification for its use shall be provided.Preferably only Government indices shall be used.For field labour, the index applicable shall be theAll India Consumer Price Index for Industrial workersas published by the Labour Bureau of theGovernment of India. The Bidder shall enclose withhis proposal authenticated copies of the relevantpublished indices which reflect the prices as of thirty(30) days prior to the date set for opening of bids.

3.22.7 However, the successful Bidder may be permittedto suggest modifications in the values of co-efficients or group of co-efficients indicated in thebid in line with the requirements indicated in theabove formulae, provided such successful Bidderis able to satisfy the Owner with proper justificationfor such modifications.

3.22.8 Bids specifying price adjustment provisions otherthan those specified in these specifications anddocuments run the risk of rejection.

3.23 CONTRACT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE3.23.1 As a contract security, the successful Bidder, to

whom the work is awarded, shall be required to

furnish a Performance Guarantee from anationalised bank, in the form attached asAnnexure-B (INB) to the Instructions to Bidders, infavour of the Owner. The guarantee amount shallbe equal to ten per cent (10%) of the Contract priceand it shall guarantee the faithful performance ofthe Contract in accordance with the terms andconditions specified in these documents andspecifications.The guarantee shall be valid upto (90) days afterthe end of Guarantee Period. The guaranteeamount shall be payable to the Owner without anycondition whatsoever.

3.23.2 The Performance Guarantee shall coveradditionally the following guarantees to the Owner.

(a) the successful Bidder guarantees the successfuland satisfactory operation of the equipmentfurnished and erected under the Contract, as perthe specifications and documents;

(b) the successful Bidder further guarantees thatthe equipment provided and installed by himshall be free from all defects in design, materialand workmanship and shall upon written noticefrom the Owner fully remedy free of expensesto the Owner such defects as developed underthe normal use of the said equipment withinthe period of guarantee specified in the relevantclause of the General Terms and Conditions inthis Volume-I.

3.23.3 The Contract Performance Guarantee is intendedto secure the performance of the entire contract.However, it is not to be construed as limiting thedamages under the Contract.

3.23.4 The Performance Guarantee will be returned to theContractor without any interest at the end of theGuarantee period.

3.23.5 Above stipulations are non-negotiable. Bids notcomplying with the above will not be opened andshall be returned to the Bidders.

3.24 CONTRACT QUALITY ASSURANCE3.24.1 The Bidder shall include in his proposal the Quality

Assurance Programme containing the overallquality management and procedures which heproposes to follow in the performance of the Worksduring various phases.

3.24.2 At the time of Award of Contract, the detailed QualityAssurance Programme to be followed for theexection of the Contract will be mutually discussedand agreed to and such agreed Programme shallform a part of the Contract.

 3.25 INSURANCE

The Bidder’s insurance liabilities pertaining to thescope of Works are detailed out in Clauses titledInsurance in General Terms and Conditions ofContract. Bidder’s attention is specifically invitedto these clauses. Bid price shall include all thecost in pursuance of fulfilling all the insuranceliabilities under the Contract.

12

3.26 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND TACKLESThe proposal shall include all special tools andtackles required for the operation and maintenanceof the equipment in each equipment package. TheBidder shall indicate all the above items in theproposal sheets in the form of a schedule givingtherein the description and the quantity of eachitem. The lump sum price to be quoted by he Biddershall include prices of these tools and tackles.These tools and tackles shall be delivered at sitealongwith the last consignment of equipment andin no case earlier than this unless otherwise

specified in the Technical Specifications, Volume-II.

3.27 CHECK LISTThe bidders are requested to duly fill in the checklist enclosed as a Schedule in Volume-IB. Thischeck list gives only certain important items, tofacilitate the Bidder to make sure that the necessarydata/information is provided by him in his proposal.This however, does not relieve the Bidder of hisresponsibility to make sure that his proposal isotherwise complete in all respects.

ANNEXURE - A (INB)

PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEEIN LIEU OF CASH DEPOSIT

(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

[The non-judicial stamp paper should bein the name of issuing bank]

Ref............................... Bank Guarantee No. ........................

DateTo

————————————————————————————————————————————————

(Address of the Owner to be specified here)Dear Sirs,In accordance with your Invitation to Bid under yourSpecif ication No. _________________ M/s.___________________________ having its Registered/Head Office at ______________ ___________________(hereinafter called the “Bidder”) wish to participate in thesaid Bid for ___________________________________and you, as a special favour, have agreed to accept anirrevocable and unconditional Bank Bid Guarantee for anamount of ______________ valid upto _______________on behalf of the Bidder in lieu of Bid deposit required to bemade by the Bidder, as a condition precedent forparticipation in the said Bid.We, the ______________________ Bank at_______________________ having our Head Office at_________________________________________________

(Local Address)guarantee and undertake to pay immediately on demandby _________________ ___________ the amount of_________________________ without any reservation,

(in figures & words)protest, demur and recourse. Any such demand made bysaid ‘Owner’ shall be conclusive and binding on usirrespective of any dispute or difference raised by thebidder.This guarantee shall be irrevocable and shall remain valid

v v v

upto _______@____________. If any further extensionof this guarantee is required, the same shall be extendedto such required period (not exceeding one year) onreceiving instructions from M/s.____________________________ on whose behalf thisguarantee is issued.

@ This date should be 30 days after the date for which bidis valid.In witness whereof the Bank, through its authorised Officer,has set its hand and stamp on this__________ day of__________ 20 __________ at __________.WITNESS—————————— (Signature)———————      (Signature)—————————— (Name)—————————

      (Name)—————————— (Designation      (Official Address) With Bank Stamp)—————

Attorney as perPower of Attorney No. . . . . . . . . .Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note : While getting the Bank Guarantee issued, biddersare required to ensure compliance to the pointsmentioned at ‘Bank Guarantee Vertification Check List’enclosed at Annexure-E (INB) herewith to Conditions ofContract, Vol.I. Further, Bidder to fill-up the check list asper the aforesaid proforma enclosed at Annexure-E (INB)and ensure its submission alongwith the Bank Guarantee.

v v v

ANNEXURE - AI (INB)

PROFORMA OF LETTER OF UNDERTAKINGS(To be submitted by the Bidder alongwith his Bid)

(To be executed on non-judicial paper of requisite value)

Ref. : Dated :

13

To————————————————————————————————————————————————

(Address of the Owner to be specified here)

Dear Sirs,

1. I*/We* have read and examined the following biddocuments relating to the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (fullscope of work).(A) Notice Inviting Tender(B) Conditions of Contract, Supply-cum-Erection and

Turnkey Contracts containing sections “Invitationof Bid (INV)”, “Instructions to Bidders (INB)”,General Terms & Conditions of Contract (GCC)”,[Volume - I]

(C) Special Conditions of Contract: [Volume - IA](D) Bid Proposal Sheets: [Volume - IB](E) Technical Specifications & Drawings including

General Technical Conditions (GTC):[Volume - II]

(F) Erection Conditions of Contract (ECC):[Volume - IIA]

(G) Data Requirement Sheets: [Volume - IIB]2. I*/We* hereby submit our Bid and undertake to keep

our Bid valid for a period of six (6) months from thedate of opening of bid i.e. upto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I* / We* hereby further undertake that during the saidperiod, I*/We* shall not vary/alter or revoke my/our Bid.

This undertaking is in consideration of … … … … … …agreeing to open my*/our* Bid and consider and evaluatethe same for the purposes of award of Work in terms ofprovisions of clause entitled «Award of Contract» SectionINB, Conditions of Contract in the Bid Documents.Should this Bid be accepted, I*/We* also agree to abideby and fulfill all the terms, conditions and provisions of theabove mentioned bid documents.

Signature alongwith Seal of Co. ———————————————

(Duly authorised to sign the Tenderon behalf of the Bidder)

Name.....................................

Designation..........................

Witness Name of Co.............................(in block letters)

Signature...........................

Date.................................... Date & Postal Address

Name & Address.............. .................................................

............................................. Telegraphic Address :................................................

.................................................

Telephone No.........................

Fax No ....................................

* Strike out whichever is not applicable.

v v v

ANNEXURE - B (INB)

PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FORCONTRACT PERFORMANCE

(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

[The non-judicial stamp paper should be in thename of issuing bank]

Ref............................... Bank Guarantee No. ........................

DateTo

————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————

(Address of the Owner to be specified here)

Dear Sirs,

In consideration of the —————————————————-——— (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Owner’, whichexpression shall unless repugnant to the context ormeaning thereof include its successors, administratorsand assigns) having awarded to M/s. ——————————————with its Registered/Head Office at —————————————(hereinafter referred to as the‘Contractor’, which expression shall unless repugnant tothe context or meaning thereof, include its successors,administrators, executors and assigns), a Contract byissue of Owner’s Letter of Intent No. ————————————————— dated ————————— and thesame having been unequivocally accepted by theContractor resulting in a ‘Contract’ bearing No. ——————————————— dated ——————————valued at ——————— for ——————————————————————————————————— andthe Contractor having agreed to provide

(Scope of Contract)a Contract Performance Guarantee for the faithfulperformance of the entire Contract equivalent to * ———————————% ( per cent) of the said value of theContract to the Owner.

We ———————————————————————————————————————, having its Head Office

(Name & Address)at ————————————————————————————————————————(hereinafter referred to

14

as the ‘Bank’, which expression shall, unless repugnantto the context or meaning thereof, include its successors,administrators, executors and assigns) do herebyguarantee and undertake to pay the Owner, on demandany and all monies payable by the Contractor to the extentof ————————————— as aforesaid at any timeupto —————————— (days/month/year) without anydemur, reservation, contest, recourse or protest and/orwithout any reference to the Contractor. Any such demandmade by the Owner on the Bank shall be conclusive andbinding notwithstanding any difference between the Ownerand Contractor or any dispute pending before any court,tribunal or any other authority. The Bank undertakes not torevoke this guarantee during its currency without, previousconsent of the Owner and further agrees that the guaranteeherein contained shall continue to be enforceable till theOwner discharges this guarantee.The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting inany way the liability of the Bank under this guarantee fromtime to time to extend the time for performance of theContract by the Contractor. The Owner shall have the fullestliberty, without affecting this guarantee, to postpone fromtime to time the exercise of any powers vested in them orof any right which they might have against the Contractor,and to exercise the same at any time in any manner, andeither to enforce or to forbear to enforce any convents,contained or implied, in the Contract between the Ownerand the Contractor or any other course of or remedy orsecurity available to the Owner. The Bank shall not bereleased of its obligations under these presents by anyexercise by the Owner of its liberty with reference to thematters aforesaid or any of them or by reason of any otheracts of omission or commission on the part of the Owneror any other indulgence shown by the Owner or by anyother matters or thing whatsoever which under law, would,but for this provision, have the effect of relieving the Bank.The Bank also agrees that the Owner at its option shall beentitled to enforce this guarantee against the Bank as aprincipal debtor, in the first instance without proceedingagainst the Contractor and notwithstanding any securityor other guarantee that the Owner may have in relation tothe Contractor’s liabilities.Notwithstanding anything contained herein above ourliability under this guarantee is restricted to ————————————— and it shall remain in force upto andincluding —————————————————— andshall be extended from time to time for such period (notexceeding one year), as may be desired by M/s. ——————————————————— whose behalf thisguarantee has been given.

Dated this ——————— day of ——— 20 —— at ———

WITNESS—————————— (Signature)———————      (Signature)—————————— (Bank's Rubber Stamp)      (Name)—————————— (Name)—————————

(Official Address) (Designation

       With Bank Stamp) —————

Attorney as perPower of Attorney No. ..................Date..............................................

Note: 1.* This sum shall be ten percent (10%) of theContract Price.

     ** The date will be ninety (90) days after the endof the Warranty Period as specified in theContract.

2. While getting the Bank Guarantee issued,bidders are required to ensure compliance tothe points mentioned at ‘Bank GuaranteeVertification Check List’ enclosed at Annexure-E (INB) herewith to Conditions of Contract, Vol.I.Further, Bidder to fill-up the check list as per theaforesaid proforma enclosed at Annexure-E(INB) and ensure its submission alongwith theBank Guarantee.

v v v

ANNEXURE - C (INB)

FORM OF EXTENSION OF BANK GUARANTEE(on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value)

Ref. : Dated :

To————————————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————(Address of the Owner to be specified here)

Dear Sirs,

Sub : Extension of Bank Guarantee No. ................................Dated............... for Rs.................................favouringyourselves, expiring on ........................... on accountof M/s............................................in respect of ContractNo. ......................................................................... Dated....................................

(hereinafter called original Bank Guarantee)

At the request of M/s. ..........................................................., We............ ............................................................ Bank branch officeat ............................. and having its head office at.......................................................... do hereby extend ourliability under the above mentioned Guarantee No..................................... dated ............................... for a furtherperiod of ...................................................... Years / Months from...................... to expire on ....................

15

Except as provided above, all other terms and conditionsof the original Bank Guarantee No. ..........................................Dated .................................. shall remain unaltered andbinding.Please treat this as an integral part of the original guaranteeto which it would be attached.

Yours faithfully,For

..............................

Manager/Agent/AccountantPower of Attorney No. ....................................Dated ...................................................................

SEAL OF BANK

Note :1. The non-judicial stamp papers of appropriate

value be purchased in thename of the bank who has issued BankGuarantee.

2. While getting the Bank Guarantee issued,bidders are required to ensurecompliance to the points mentioned at ‘BankGuarantee Vertification CheckList’ enclosed at Annexure-E (INB) herewith toConditions of Contract, Vol.I.Further, Bidder to fill-up the check list as per theaforesaid proforma

enclosed at Annexure-E (INB) and ensure itssubmission alongwith the Bank Guarantee.

v v v

ANNEXURE - D (INB)

Page 1 of 2

PROFORMA FOR CERTIFICATEREGARDING ACCEPTANCE

OF IMPORTANT CONDITIONSBidder’s Name and Address To,

................................................. .........................................

................................................. .........................................

................................................. .........................................

................................................. .........................................(Address of Owner)

1.0 With reference to our Bid Proposal No...................................... dated ............... for

.......................................................................................................................Package against Specif ication No................................................................., we herebyconfirm that we have read the provisions of thefollowing clauses and further confirm thatnotwithstanding anything stated elsewhere to thecontrary, the stipulations of these clauses areacceptable to us, and we have not taken any deviationto these clauses.

(a) Bid Guarantee : Clause No. 7.0,Section INB, Vol.I.

(b) Contract Performance : Clause No. 23.0,Section INB, Vol.I.Guarantee

(c) Liquidated Damages for : Clause No.18.0,Section-GCC, Vol.I.delay in completionand Clause ........... ofSpecial Conditions ofContract, (SCC),Volume - IA

(d) Price Basis and Payments : Clause No. 14.0,Section INB, Vol.I. andClause No. ................ ofSpecial Conditions ofContract,(SCC), Vol.IA

(e) Guarantee : Clause No. 38.0,Section GCC, Vol.I

(f) Terms of Payment : Clause No. 46.7,Section GCC, Vol.I andClause No................. ofSpecial Conditions ofContract (SCC),Vol.IA.

ANNEXURE - D (INB)

Page 2 of 2

2.0 We further confirm that any deviation to the aboveclauses at Sl.No. (a) through (f) found anywhere inour bid proposal, implicit or explicit, shall standunconditionally withdrawn, without any costimplication whatsoever to NTPC.

Date : (Signature).......................................

Place : (Duly authorized to sign the Tender on behalfof the Bidder)(Printed Name)…..............................(Designation).…...............................(Name of Bidder)..............................(Common Seal)................................

v v v

16

ANNEXURE - E (INB)

APPLICABLE FOR ANNEUXRE-A (INB),B (INB), C (INB) AND ANNEXURE-B (GCC)

BANK GUARANTEE VERIFICATIONCHECKLIST

CHECKLIST YES NO.

I. Does the bank .................... ...................guaranteecompareverbatim withstandard Proformafor BG

II. (a) Has the executing ….............. ....................Officer of VGindicated hisname designation& Power of AttorneyNo./signing PowerNumber etc. on BG.

(b) Is each page of BG ................... .....................duly signed/initialedby the executant, andlast page is signedwith full particularsas required in thestandard proformaof BG and under theseal of the Bank.

(c) Does the last page …................ ….................of the BG carry thesignatures of twowitness alongsidethe signatures of theexecuting BankManager.

III. (a) Is the BG on non- ..........……… ..……………

judicial stamppaper ofappropriate value

(b) Is the date of sale …................ …...............of non-judicialstamp paper shownon the BG and thestamp paper isissued not more thansix months prior to thedate of execution of BG

IV. (a) Are the factual .................. ................details such asBid SpecificationNo.: LOA No.,contract price,etc. correct.

(b) Whether overwriting/ .................. ................cutting, if any on theBG, authenticatedunder signature &seal of executant

V. Is the amount and .................. ................validity of BG in linewith contractprovisions.

VI. Whether the BG .................. ................has been issued bya NationalisedBank/Non-NationalisedBank acceptable to Buyer/Scheduled Bank in India(the applicability of thebank should be in line withthe provisions of biddingdocuments).

Date : (Signature) ...................................Place : (Printed Name) ..............................

(Designation)..................................(Common Seal) ................................

v v v

17

4.1 GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

4.1.01 SCOPE OF CONTRACT(i) The scope of the Contract shall be the survey/

design, manufacture, furnishing and erectionincluding testing and commissioning of theequipment in accordance with the specificationsand documents, at the site of the proposed Sub-Station/Transmission line/Distribution system.

(ii) The General Terms and Conditions shall form apart of the specifications and documents.

4.1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS(i) The term Contract Documents shall mean and

include the following which shall be deemed toform an integral part of the Contract :(a) Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders,

Contract Agreement, General Terms andConditions of Contract and all otherdocuments included under Volume I;

(b) Special Condition of Contract, (SCC)Volume -IA

(c) Specifications of the equipment to be furnishedand erected under the Contract as broughtout in the accompanying TechnicalSpecifications; Volume - II;

(d) Contractor's bid proposal including the lettersof clarifications between the Contractor andthe Owner prior to the Award of Contract, tothe extent they have been accepted by theOwner.

(e) All the materials, l i terature, data andinformation of any sort given by the Contractoralong with his bid, subject to the approval ofthe Owner/Engineer:

(f) Any agreed variations to the conditions of thedocuments and specifications and specialterms and conditions of Contract, if any.

(ii) In the event of any conflict between the abovementioned documents, the matter shall be referredto the Engineer whose decision shall be final andbinding upon the parties, however, the generalorder of priority shall be as below: (1) ContractAgreement (3) INV (4) SCC (5) INB (6) GCC (7)Technical specifications & Drawings (Vol II).

4.1.03 DEFINITION OF TERMS

(i) 'Owner' shall mean the ..............................................,India and shall include their legal representatives,successors and permitted assigns.

(ii) Contractor' or "Manufacturer' shall mean the Bidderwhose bid will be accepted by the Owner for theaward of the Works and shall include suchsuccessful Bidder's legal representatives,successors and permitted assigns.

(iii) 'Sub-Contractor' shall mean the person named inthe Contract for any part of the Works or any personto whom any part of the Contract has been sub-letby the Contractor with the consent in writing of theEngineer and will include the legal representatives,

successors and permitted assigns of such person.(iv) 'Engineer' shall mean the officer appointed in

writing by the Owner to Act as Engineer from timeto time for the purposes of Contract.

(v) 'Consulting Engineer'/'Consultant' shall mean anyfirm or person duly appointed as such from time totime by the Owner.

(vi) The terms 'Equipment', 'Stores', shall mean andinclude plant, stores and materials to be providedby the Contractor under the Contract.

(vii) 'Works', shall mean and include the furnishing ofequipment, labour and services, as per the TechnicalSpecifications and complete erection, testing andcommissioning of the equipment including alltransportation, handling, unloading and storage atthe Site as defined in the Contract, intended to beexecuted on a supply and erection basis.

(viii) 'Specification' shall mean the TechnicalSpecifications forming a part of the Contract andsuch other schedules and drawings as may bemutually agreed upon.

(ix) 'Site' shall mean and include the land and otherplaces on, into or through which the 'Sub-Station,Transmission Lines, Distribution System and therelated facilities are to be constructed and anyadjacent land, path, street or reservoir which maybe allocated or used by the Owner or Contractor inthe performance of the Contract.

(x) The term 'Equipment Portion' of the Contract Priceshall mean the ex-works value of the equipment.

(xi) The term 'Erection Portion' of the Contract Priceshall mean the value of field activities of theContract including erection, testing andcommissioning to be performed at Site by theContractor.

(xii) 'Manufacturer's Works' or 'Contractor's Works' shallmean the place of work used by the Manufacturer,the Contractor, their Collaborators or Sub-contractors for the performance of the Works.

(xiii) 'Inspector' shall mean the Owner or any personnominated by the Owner from time to time, toinspect the equipment stores or Works under theContract and/or the duly authorized representativeof the Owner.

(xiv) 'Notice of Award of Contract'/'Letter of Award'/'Telexof Award' shall mean the official notice issued bythe Owner notifying the Contractor that his proposalhas been accepted.

(xv) 'Date of Contract' shall mean the date on whichboth the parties have signed the ContractAgreement.

(xvi) 'Month' shall mean the calendar month. 'Day' or'days' unless herein otherwise expressly definedshall mean calendar day or days of 24 hours each.

(xvii) 'Writing' shall include any manuscript, type-writtenor printed statement, under or over signature and/or seal as the case may be.

18

(xviii) When the words 'Approved', 'Subject to Approval','Satisfactory', 'Equal to', 'Proper' 'Requested', 'AsDirected', 'Where Directed', 'When Directed','Determined By', 'Accepted', 'Permitted' or wordsand phrases of like import are used, the approval,judgement, direction etc. is understood to be afunction of the Owner/Engineer.

(xix) 'Test of Completion', shall mean such tests asprescribed in the Contract to be performed by theContractor before the Works is taken over by theOwner.

(xx) 'Completion of Erection of Sub-Station' shall meanthe erection of all the equipment & accessorieswithin boundaries of sub-station as per the scopeof work & dry test run.

(xxi) 'Completion of Erection of HT Lines' shall meanthe Completion of erection of line from sub-stationor from tapping point to the distribution transformer& dry testing of the same.

(xxii) 'Completion of Erection of Distribution Lines' shallmean Completion of all lines from a distributiontransformer to consumer including erection ofservice lines, if in scope of contractor & dry testingof the same.

(xxii) 'Completion of commissioning' shall mean theCharging & continuous operation of the sub-station,transformers & lines for 48 hours without anyinterruption.

(xxiv) 'Taking over of sub-station & lines'Clause a) The owner will take over the sub-stationalong with connected lines (where-ever applicable)within 30 days after date of commissioning of sub-station & lines.Clause b) Similarly the owner will take overindependent feeders along with distributiontransformer within 30 days form date ofcommissioning.Clause c) After attending to checklist points andcommissioning of sub-station / feeder Contractorwill give 30 days notice to the Owner for taking overthe same. In case Owner finds any discrepancy inerection / equipment or workmanship, that will beintimated to Contractor in writing within 30days ofcommissioning. The Contractor will attend to thediscrepancy etc immediately thereafter & intimateto client after completing the same. Owner will takeover the system after getting intimation fromcontractor with in 30 days.

(xxv)In case Owner fails to inform Contractor discrepancieswith in 30 days from the date of Commissioning,installation will deemed to be taken over by owner.

(xxvi) 'Guarantee Period'/Maintenance Period' shall meanthe period during which the Contractor shall remainliable for repair or replacement of any defective partof the Works performed under the Contract.

(xxvii) 'Drawing', 'Plans' shall mean all:(a) Drawings furnished by the Owner/Consultant

as a basis for proposals ;(b) Supplementary drawings furnished by the

Owner/Consultant to clarify and to define ingreater detail the intent of the Contract ;

(c) Drawings submitted by the Contractor with hisproposal provided such drawings areacceptable to the Owner/Consultant ;

(d) Drawings furnished by the Owner/Consultantto the Contractor during the progress of thework; and

(e) Engineering data and drawings submitted bythe Contractor during the progress of the workprovided such drawings are acceptable to theEngineer.

(xxviii) 'Codes' shall mean the following, including thelatest amendments, and/or replacements, if any:(a) International Electro-technical Commission,

Geneva, Switzerland i.e. IEC.(b) Indian Electricity Act, 1905, and Rules and

Regulations made thereunder.(c) Indian Factory Act, 1948, and Rules and

Regulations made thereunder.(d) Indian Explosives Act, 1884, and Rules and

Regulations made thereunder.(e) Indian Petroleum Act, 1934, and Rules and

Regulations made thereunder.(f) A.S.M.E. Test Codes.(g) A.I.E.E. Test Codes.(h) American Society of Materials Testing Codes.(i) Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi.(j) Other Internationally approved standards and/

or Rules and Regulations touching the subject-matter of the Contract.

(xxix) Words importing the singular only shall also includethe plural and vice-versa where the context sorequires.

(xxx) Words importing 'Person' shall include firms,companies, corporations and associations orbodies of individuals, whether incorporated or not.

(xxxi) Terms and expressions not herein defined shallhave the same meaning as are assigned to themin the Indian Sale of goods Act (1930), failing that inthe Indian Contract Act (1872) and failing that in theGeneral Clauses Act (1897).

(xxxii) The various Acts and Regulations are normallyavailable for sale from the following address:

Deputy Controller,Publication Department,Government of India,Civil Lines,Delhi-110 054orwith leading authorized Govt. of India book-sellers

4.1.04 CONTRACTOR TO INFORM HIMSELF FULLYThe Contractor shall be deemed to have carefullyexamined all Contract Documents to his entiresatisfaction. If he shall have any doubt as to themeaning of any portion of the Contract Documents,he shall, before signing the Contract, set forth theparticulars thereof and submit them to the Ownerin writing, in triplicate, in order that such doubt may

19

be removed. The Owner wil l provide suchclarifications as may be necessary, in writing, tothe Contractor. Any information otherwise obtainedfrom the Owner or the Engineer shall not in anyway relieve the Contractor of his responsibility tofulfil his obligations under the Contract.

4.1.05 CONTRACT AGREEMENT AND PERFORMANCEGUARANTEEThe Contractor shall enter into a ContractAgreement with the Owner within sixty (60) daysfrom the date of acceptance of 'Notice of Award ofContractor' or within such extended time as maybe granted by the Owner. The Performance BankGuarantee for the proper fulfillment of the Contractshall be furnished by the Contractor in theprescribed form within thirty (30) days of 'Notice ofAward of Contract'. The Performance Guaranteeshall be as per terms prescribed in clause 23 ofInstructions to Bidders of this Volume-I.

4.1.06 MANNER OF EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

4.1.06.1The Owner, after the issue of the Letter of Awardto the Contractor, will send one copy of the finalAgreement to the Contractor for his scrutiny andapproval.

4.1.06.2The Agreement, unless otherwise agreed to, shallbe signed within 60 days of the acceptance of theLetter or Award, at the office of the Owner on a dateand time to be mutually agreed. The Contractorshall provide for signing of the Contract,Performance Guarantee in six copies, appropriatepower of attorney and other requisite materials. Incase the Contract is to be signed beyond thestipulated time, the Bid Guarantee submitted withthe proposal will have to be extended accordingly.

4.1.06.3The Agreement will be signed in Three originalsand the Contractor shall be provided with onesigned original and the rest will be retained by theOwner.

4.1.06.4The Contractor shall provide free of cost to theOwner all the engineering data, drawings anddescriptive materials submitted with the bid, in atleast six (6) copies to form a part of the Contractimmediately after issue of Letter of Award.

4.1.06.5Subsequent to signing of the Contract, theContractor at his own cost shall provide the Ownerwith at least Ten (10) true copies of Agreement withinthirty (30) days after the signing of the Contract.

4.1.07 EFFECT AND JURISDICTION OF CONTRACT4.1.07.1The Contract shall be considered as having come

into force from the date of the issue of Letter ofIntent/Letter of Award.

4.1.07.2The laws applicable to this Contract shall be thelaws in force in India. The Courts of.................................... (To be filled by concernedBuyer) shall have exclusive jurisdiction in allmatters arising under this Contract.

4.1.08 ASSIGNMENT AND SUB-LETTING OF CONTRACT

4.1.08.1The Contractor may, after informing the Engineershall assign or sub-let the Contract or any partthereof other than for raw materials, for minor detailor any part of the plant for which makes are identifiedin the Contract. Suppliers of the equipment notidentified in the Contract or any change in theidentified supplier shall be subject to approval bythe Engineer. The experience list of the equipmentvendors under consideration by the Contractor forthis Contract shall be furnished to the Engineer forapproval prior to procurement of all such items/equipments. Such assignment sub-letting shallnot relieve the Contractor from any obligation, dutyor responsibil ity under the Contract. Anyassignment as above without prior written approvalof Engineer shall be void.

4.1.08.2For components/equipments procured by theContractors for the purposes of the Contract, afterobtaining the written approval of the Owner, theContractor's purchase specifications and enquiriesshall call for quality plans to be submitted by thesuppliers along with their proposals. The qualityplans called for from the Vendors shall set out,during the various stages of manufacture andinstallation, the quality practices and proceduresfollowed by the Vendor's quality control organization,the relevant reference documents/standards used,acceptance level, inspection documentation raised,etc. Such quality plans of the successful vendorshall be discussed and finalized in consultationwith the Engineer and shall form a part of thepurchase order/contract between the Contractorand the Vendor. Within 3 weeks of the release ofthe same purchase order/contracts for such boughtout items/components, a copy of the same withoutprice details but together with detailed purchasespecifications, quality plans and delivery conditionsshall be furnished to the Engineer by the Contractor.

4.1.09 PATENT RIGHTS AND ROYALTIESRoyalties and fees for patents covering materials,articles, apparatus, devices, equipments orprocesses used in the Works shall be deemed tohave been included in the Contract Price. TheContractor shall satisfy all demands that may bemade at any time for such royalties or fees and healone shall be liable for any damages or claims forpatent infringements and shall keep the Ownerindemnified in that regard. The Contractor shall, athis own cost and expense, defend all suits orproceedings that may be instituted for allegedinfringement of any patents involved in the Works,and, in case of an award of damages, the Contractorshall pay for such award. In the event of any suit orother proceedings instituted against the Owner, thesame shall be defended at the cost and expenseof the Contractor who shall also satisfy/comply anddecree, order or award made against the Owner.But it shall be understood that no such machine,plant, work, material or thing has been used by theOwner for any purpose or any manner other thanthat for which they have been furnished andinstalled by the Contractor and specified underthese specification. Final payment to the Contractor

20

by the Owner will not be made while any such suitor claim remains unsettled. In the event anyapparatus or equipment, or any part thereoffurnished by the Contractor, is in such suit orproceedings held to constitute infringement, andits use in enjoined, the Contractor shall, at hisoption and at his own expense, either procure forthe Owner, the right to continue use of saidapparatus, equipment or part thereof, replace it withnon-infringing apparatus or equipment or modifyit, so it becomes non-infringing.

4.1.10 TIME-THE ESSENCE OF CONTRACT4.1.10.1The time and the date of completion of the Works

as stipulated in the Contractor's proposal andaccepted by the Owner without or withmodifications, if any and so incorporated in theAward Letter shall be deemed to be the essenceof the Contract. The Contractor shall so organizehis resources and perform his work as to completeit not later than the date agreed to.

4.1.10.2The Contractor shall submit a detailed PERTnetwork within the time frame agreed aboveconsisting of adequate number of activitiescovering various key phases of the works such asdesign, procurement, manufacturing, shipmentand field erection activities within fifteen (15) daysafter the date of acceptance of Notice of Award ofContract. This network shall also indicate theinterface facilities to be provided by the Owner andthe dates by which such facilities are needed.Contractor shall discuss the network so submittedwith the Owner and the agreed network which maybe in the form as submitted or in revised form inline with the outcome of discussions shall formpart of the Contract to be signed within sixty (60)days from the date of acceptance of Notice of Awardof Contract. During the performance of Contract, ifin the opinion of the Engineer proper progress isnot maintained, suitable changes shall be madein the Contractor's operations to ensure properprogress.

4.1.10.3The above PERT network shall be reviewed andperiodic review reports shall be submitted by theContractor as directed by the Engineer.

4.1.10.4Subsequent to the award of the Contract, theContractor shall make available to the Engineer, adetailed manufacturing programme, in line with theagreed Contract network. Such manufacturingprogramme shall be reviewed, updated andsubmitted to the Engineer, once every two monthsthereafter.

4.1.11 CONTRACT PRICE

The lump sum prices quoted by the Contractor inhis bid with additions and deletions as may beagreed before signing of the Contract, for the entirescope of the work viz. furnishing and erection ofequipments covered under the specifications anddocuments shall be treated as the Contract Price.

4.1.11.1 CHANGE OF QUANTITYThe Owner reserves the right to vary the quantities

of items or groups of items to be ordered asspecified in the accompanying TechnicalSpecifications, as may be necessary, during theexecution of the Contract, but such variationsunless otherwise specified in the accompanyingTechnical Specifications shall be limited to plus orminus twenty percent (20%) of the original quantityordered.

4.1.12 DEDUCTIONS FROM CONTRACT PRICE

All costs, damages or expenses which the Ownermay have paid, for which under the Contract theContractor is liable, will be claimed by the Owner.All such claims shall be billed by the Owner to theContractor regularly as and when they fall due. Suchbills shall be supported by appropriate and certifiedvouchers or explanations, to enable the Contractorto properly identify such claims. Such claims shallbe paid by the Contractor within fifteen (15) days ofthe receipt of the corresponding bills and if not paidby the Contractor within the said period, the Ownermay then deduct the amount, from any moneysdue or becoming due by him to the Contractor underthe Contract or may be recovered by actions of Lawor other-wise, if the Contractor fails to satisfy theOwner of such claims.

4.1.13 CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT4.1.13.1All adjustments in the Contract Price shall be

computed in accordance with the conditions andformulae prescribed in the relevant clauses ofInstructions to Bidders of this Volume-I, theaccompanying Special Conditions of Contract andfurther satisfying the requirements specified herein.

4.1.13.2The Contract Price stated in the ContractAgreement is the base price. A certain fixedpercentage of the base price as indicated in theSpecial Conditions of Contract shall not be subjectto any price adjustment. The balance percentageviz. the cost portion shall only be subject to priceadjustment.

4.1.13.3Price adjustment shall be applicable to the costportion, only if changes in the cost of labour andmaterials (either increases or decreases) occur duringthe Contract period, directly affecting the cost portion.

4.1.13.4Variations in the cost of labour and materials shallbe determined by comparing published labour andmaterial indices as of thirty (30) days prior to thedate set for opening of bids with the same indicespublished during the manufacture at the respectivecut off periods for labour and material as specifiedin clause 22 of Instructions to Bidders of thisVolume-I.

4.1.13.5The total computed variation in the ex-factory priceof equipment alone shall be restricted to a limitingpercentage as specified in clause 22 of SectionINB of this Volume-I.

4.1.13.6The Price adjustment for the erection shall bemade on the value of erection work done asindicated in each billing. For this purpose, the AllIndia Consumer Price Index published for the

21

month of work performed shall be taken.4.1.13.7Every three months after the award of Contract,

and a month prior to shipment of equipment (in thecase of ex-factory price component of ContractPrice), and every month after establishing his Siteoffice (in the case of erection) the Contractor shallsubmit to the Engineer a written notice of thechanges, if any, that have occurred in the specifiedmaterial and labour indices during the previousreporting period containing the effective date ofsuch change, the amount of change, the amountof Contract Price adjustment and documentaryevidence to substantiate the price adjustment.

4.1.13.8The Contract Price adjustment provisions detailedabove, shall only be applicable if so specified inthe Special Conditions of Contract.

4.1.14 PACKING, FORWARDING AND SHIPMENT4.1.14.1The Contractor, wherever applicable, shall after

proper painting, pack and crate all equipment insuch a manner as to protect them from deteriorationand damage during rail and road transportation tothe Site and storage at the Site till the time oferection. The Contractor shall be held responsiblefor all damages due to improper packing.The Contractor shall notify the Owner of the date ofeach shipment from his works, and the excepteddate of arrival at the Site for the information of theOwner.The Contractor shall also give all shippinginformation conceming the weight, size and contentof each packing including any other informationthe Owner may require.

The fol lowing documents shal l be sent byregistered post to the Owner within 3 days from thedate of shipment, to enable the Owner to makeprogressive payments to the Contractor:Application for payment in the standard format ofthe Owner (3 copies)Invoice (6 copies)

Packing list (6 copies)Pre-despatch clearance certificate, if any ( 3 copies)Test certificate, wherever applicable (3 copies)

4.1.14.2The Contractor shall prepare detailed packing listof all packages and containers, bundles and loosematerial forming each and every consignmentdespatched to Site. The Contractor shall further beresponsible for making al l necessaryarrangements for loading, unloading and otherhandling right from his works up to the Site andalso till the equipment is erected, tested andcommissioned. He shall be solely responsible forproper storage and safe custody of all equipment.

4.1.15 DEMURRAGE, WHARFAGE, ETC.All demurrage, wharfage and other expensesincurred due to delayed clearance of the materialor any other reason shall be to the account of the

Contractor.4.1.16 INSURANCE

4.1.16.1The Contractor shall arrange, secure and maintaininsurance as may be necessary and for all suchamounts to protect his interests and the interestsof the Owner, against all risks as detailed herein.The form and the limit of such insurance, as definedherein together with the under-writer thereof in eachcase shall be acceptable to the Owner, However,irrespective of such acceptance, the responsibilityto maintain adequate insurance coverage oncomprehensive all risks basis at all times duringthe period of Contract shall be that of the Contractoralone. The Contractor's failure in this regard shallnot relieve him of any of his contractualresponsibilities and obligations.

4.1.16.2Any loss of damage to the equipment, duringhandling, transporting, storage and erection, tillsuch time the plant is taken over by the Owner,shall be to the account of the Contractor. TheContractor shall be responsible for preferring of allclaims and make good for the damage or loss byway of repairs and/or replacement of the portion ofthe Works damaged or lost. The transfer of titleshall not in any way relieve the Contractor of theabove responsibilities during the period of theContract. The Contractor shall provide the Ownerwith a copy of all insurance policies and documentstaken out by him in pursuance of the Contract. Suchcopies of document shall be submitted to the Ownerimmediately after such insurance coverage. TheContractor shall also inform the Owner in writing atleast sixty (60) days in advance, regarding theexpiry, cancellation and/or change in any of suchdocuments and ensure revalidation/renewal, etc.as may be necessary well in time.

4.1.16.3The risk that are to be covered under the insuranceshall include, but not be limited to, the loss ordamage in transit, theft, pilferage, riot, civilcommotion, weather conditions, accidents of allkinds, fire, etc. The scope of such insurance shallcover the entire value of the Works from time totime.

4.1.16.4All costs on account of insurance liabilities coveredunder the Contract will be on Contractor's accountand will be included in Contract Price. However,the Owner may from time to time, during thependency of the Contract, ask the Contractor inwriting to limit the insurance coverage risks and insuch a case, the parties to the Contract will agreefor a mutual settlement for reduction in contractPrice to the extent of reduced premium amounts.

4.1.16.5 Workmen's Compensation Insurance: Thisinsurance shall protect the Contractor against allclaims applicable under the Workmen'sCompensation Act, 1948 (Government of India).This policy shall also cover the Contractor againstclaims for injury, disability, disease or death of hisor his Sub-Contractor's employee, which for anyreason are not covered under the Workmen'sCompensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not

22

be less than:Workmen's Compensation : As per Statutory

ProvisionsEmployee's liability : As per statutory

Provisions

4.1.16.6Comprehensive Automobile Insurance: Thisinsurance shall be in such a for to protect theContractor against all claims for injuries, disability,disease and death to members of publicincluding the Owner's men and damage to theproperty of others arising from the use of motorvehicles during, on or off the site operations,irrespective of the Ownership of such vehicles. Theliability covered shall be as herein indicated:Fatal Injury : Rs 100,000 each person

Rs 200,000 each occurrenceProperty Damage : Rs.100,000 each occurence

4.1.16.7Comprehensive General Liability Insurance: Theinsurance shall protect the Contractor against allclaims arising from injuries, disabilities, diseaseor death of members of public or damage toproperty of others, due to any act of omission onthe part of the Contractor, his agents, hisemployees, his representatives and Sub-Contractors or from riots, strikes and civilcommotion. This insurance shall also cover all theliabilities of the Contractor arising out of the Clauseentitled `Defence of Suits' under General Termsand conditions of Contract of this Volume - I.

4.1.16.8 The hazards to be covered will pertain to all theworks and areas where the Contractor, his Sub-Contractors, his agents and his employees haveto perform work pursuant to the Contract.

4.1.16.9 The above are only illustrative list of insurancecovers normally required and it wil l be theresponsibility of the Contractors to maintain allnecessary insurance coverage to the extent bothin time and amount to take care of all his liabilitieseither direct or indirect, in pursuance of theContract.

4.1.17 LIABILITY FOR ACCIDENTS AND DAMAGESUnder the Contract, the Contractor shall beresponsible for loss or damage to the plant untilthe plant is taken over in accordance with clauseentitled 'Taking Over' vide clause 3.24 above.

4.1.18 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY INCOMPLETION

4.1.18.1 If the Contractor fails to successfully completethe trial operation within the time fixed under theContract, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner asliquidated damages, not as penalty a sumspecified for each specified period of delay. Thedetails of such liquidated damages are broughtout in the accompanying Special Conditions ofContract.

4.1.18.2 The total amount of liquidated damages for delayunder the Contract will be subject to a maximum offive percent (5%) of the Contract Price.

4.1.18.3 Above stipulations are non-negotiable. Bids notcomplying with the above will not be opened andshall be returned to the bidder.

4.1.19 CONTRACTOR'S DEFAULT

4.1.19.1 If the Contractor shall neglect to execute the Workswith the diligence and expedition or shall refuse orneglect to comply with any reasonable orders givento him, in writing by the Engineer in connectionwith the Works or shall contravene the provisionsof the Contract, the Owner may give notice in writingto the Contractor to make good the failure, neglector contravention complained of. Should theContractor fail to comply with the notice within thirty(30) days from the date of service thereof, then andin such case the Owner shall be at liberty to employother workmen and forthwith execute such part ofthe Works as the Contractor may have neglectedto do or if the Owner shall think fit, it shall be lawfulfor him, without prejudice to any other right he mayhave under the Contract, to take the Works whollyor in part out of the Contractor's hands and re-contract with any other person or persons, completethe Works or any part thereof and in that event theOwner shall have free use of all Contractor'sequipment that may have been at the time on theSite in connection with the Works without beingresponsible to the Contractor for fair wear and tearthereof and to the exclusion of any right of theContractor over the same, and the Owner shall beentitled to retain and apply any balance which mayotherwise be due on the Contract by him to theContractor, or such part thereof as may be necessary,the payment of the cost of executing the said part ofthe Works or of completing the Works as the casemay be. If the cost of completing the Works orexecuting a part thereof as aforesaid shall exceedthe balance due to the Contractor, the Contractorshall pay such excess. Such payment of excessamount shall be independent of the liquidateddamages for delay which the Contractor shall haveto pay if the completion of Works is delayed.

4.1.19.2 In addition, such action by the Owner as aforesaidshall not relieve the Contractor of his liability to payliquidated damages for delay in completion ofWorks as defined in Clause 18.0 of this Section.

4.1.19.3 The termination of the Contract under this clauseshall not entitle the Contractor to reduce the valueof the Performance Bank Guarantee nor the timethereof. The Performance Guarantee shall be validfor the full value and for the full period of the Contractincluding guarantee period.

4.1.20 FORCE MAJEURE4.1.20.1 Force majeure is herein defined as any cause

which is beyond the control of the Contractor or theOwner as the case may be which they could notforesee or with a reasonable amount of diligencecould not have foreseen and which substantiallyaffect the performance of the Contract, such as:(a) natural phenomena, including but not limited

to floods, draughts, earthquakes and

23

epidemics;(b) acts of any Government, including but not

l imited to war, declared or undeclared,priorities, quarantines, embargoes;

provided either party shall within fifteen (15) daysfrom the occurrence of such a cause notify the otherin writing of such causes.

4.1.20.2 The Contractor or the Owner shall not be liablefor delays in performing his obligations resultingfrom any force majeure cause as referred to and/or defined above. The date of completion will,subject to hereinafter provided, be extended by areasonable time even though such cause mayoccur after Contractor's performance of hisobligations has been delayed for other causes.

4.1.21.1 DELAYS BY OWNER OR HIS AUTHORISEDAGENTS

In case the Contractor's performance is delayeddue to any act of omission on the part of the Owneror his authorized agents, then the Contractor shallbe given due extension of time for the completionof the Works, to the extent such omission on thepart of the Owner has caused delay in theContractor's performance of his work. Regardingreasonableness or otherwise of the extension oftime, the decision of the Engineer shall be final.In addition, the Contractor shall be entitled to claimdemonstrable and reasonable compensation ifsuch delays have resulted in any increase in thecost. The Owner shall examine the justification forsuch a request for claim and if satisfied, the extentof compensation shall be mutually agreeddepending upon the circumstances at the time ofsuch an occurrence.In case there is any delay in receiving R.O.W ordelay in giving the required inputs or clearance ofjob, the contractor will make written request withcomplete details for time extension to the owner,90 days before date of expiry of contract. Owner willaccess the same & will give the time extension 30days before date of expiry of contract. Incase Ownerfails to give the time extension before expiry of thecontract, no payment due to the Contractor will beheld up by the Owner on that account.

4.1.21.2 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITYQuantity Variation: Contractor will carry out the jobas per instruction of engineer in-charge beyondthe quantities mentioned in contract. Contractor willbe paid accordingly. Engineer In-charge will insuretimely approval from competent authority for theincrease in quantities so that payment due to theContractor is not held up for the want of same.

Drawing approval: The owner wil l approvedrawings with in 21 days from the date of receipt ofdrawings. Owner shal l communicate anymodification / comments within 21 days, failingwhich drawings will be deemed to be approvedgood for construction.

4.1.22 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT ON OWNER'S

INITIATIVE4.1.22.1The Owner reserves the right to terminate the

Contract either in part or in full due to reasons otherthan those mentioned under clause entitledContractor's Default. The Owner shall in such anevent given fifteen (15) days' notice in writing to theContractor of his decision to do so.

4.1.22.2 The Contractor upon receipt of such notice shalldiscontinue the work on the date and to the extentspecified in the notice, make all reasonable effortsto obtain cancellation of all orders and contracts tothe extent they are related to the work terminatedand terms satisfactory to the Owner, stop all furthersub-contracting or purchasing activity related to thework terminated, and assist the Owner inmaintenance, protection, and disposition of theWorks acquired under the Contract by the Owner.

4.1.22.3 In the event of such a termination the Contractorshall be paid compensation, equitable andreasonable, dictated by the circumstancesprevalent at the time of termination.

4.1.22.4 If the Contractor is an individual or a proprietaryconcern and the individual or the proprietor diesand if the Contractor is a partnership concern andone of the partners dies, then unless the Owner issatisfied that the legal representatives of theindividual Contractor or of the proprietor of theproprietary concern and in the case of partnership,the surviving partners, are capable of carrying outand completing the contract the Owner shall beentitled to cancel the Contract as to its incompletedpart without being in any way liable to payment ofany compensation to the estate of deceasedContractor and/or to the surviving partners of theContractor's firm on account of the cancellation ofthe Contract. The decision of the Owner that thelegal representatives of the deceased Contractoror surviving partners of the Contractor's firm cannotcarry out and complete the Contract shall be finaland binding on the parties. In the event of suchcancellation the Owner shall not hold the estate ofthe deceased Contractor and/or the survivingpartners of the Contractor's firm liable to damagefor not completing the Contract.

4.1.23 NO WAIVER OF RIGHTSNeither the inspection by the Owner or the Engineeror any of their officials, employees or agents norany order by the Owner or the Engineer for paymentof money or any payment for or acceptance of, thewhole or any part of the Works by the Owner or theEngineer, nor any extension of time, nor anypossession taken by the Engineer shall operateas a waiver of any provision of the Contract, or ofany power herein reserved to the Owner, or anyright to damages herein provided, nor shall anywaiver of any breach in the Contract be held to be awaiver of any other or subsequent breach.

4.1.24 CERTIFICATE NOT TO AFFECT RIGHT OF OWNERAND LIABILITY OF CONTRACTORNo interim payment certificate of the Engineer, nor

24

any sum paid on account, by the Owner, nor anyextension of time for execution of the Works grantedby the Engineer shall affect or prejudice the rightsof the Owner against the Contractor or relieve theContractor of his obl igations for the dueperformance of the Contract, or be interpreted asapproval of the Works done or of the equipmentfurnished and no certificate shall create liability forthe Owner to pay for alterations, amendments,variations or additional Works not ordered, inwriting, by the Engineer or discharge the liability ofthe Contractor for the payment of damage whetherdue, ascertained, or certified or not, or any sumagainst the payment of which he is bound toindemnify the Owner, nor shall any such certificatenor the acceptance by him of any sum paid onaccount or otherwise affect or prejudice the rightsof the Contractor against the Owner.

4.1.25 SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTE

4.1.25.1 Except as otherwise specifically provided in theContract all disputes concerning questions of factarising under the Contract shall be decided by theEngineer subject to a written appeal by theContractor to the Engineer, whose decision shallbe final to the parties hereto.

4.1.25.2 Any disputes or differences including thoseconsidered as such by only one of the parties arisingout of or in connection with the Contracts shall beto the extent possible settled amicably betweenthe parties.

4.1.25.3 If amicable settlement cannot be reached thenall dispute issues shall be settled by arbitration asprovided in Clause 26 below.

4.1.26 ARBITRATION4.1.26.1 If any dispute or difference of any kind whatsoever

shall arise between the Owner and the Contractor,arising out of the Contract for the performance ofthe Work whether during the progress of the Worksor after its completion or whether before or afterthe termination, abandonment or breach of theContract, it shall, in the first place, be referred toand settled by the Engineer, who, within a period ofthirty (30) days after being requested by either partyto do so, shall give written notice of his decision tothe Owner and the Contractor.

4..126.2 Save as hereinafter provided, such decision inrespect of every matter so referred shall be finaland binding upon the parties until the completionof the Works and shall forthwith be given effect toby the Contractor who shall proceed with the Workswith all due diligence, whether he or the Ownerrequires arbitration as hereinafter provided or not.

4.1.26.3 If after the Engineer has given written notice ofhis decision to the parties, no claim to arbitrationhas been communicated to him by either partywithin thirty (30) days from the receipt of suchnotice, the said decision shall become final andbinding on the parties.

4.1.26.4 In the event of the Engineer failing to notify hisdecision as foresaid within thirty (30) days after

being requested as aforesaid, or in the event ofeither the Owner or the Contractor beingdissatisfied with any such decision, or within thirty(30) days after the expiry of the first mentionedperiod of thirty (30) days, as the case may be, eitherparty may require that the matters in dispute bereferred to arbitration as hereinafter provided.

4.1.26.5 All disputes or differences in respect of which thedecision, if any, of the Engineer has not becomefinal or binding as aforesaid, shall be settled byarbitration in the manner hereinafter provided.

4.1.26.6 The arbitration shall be conducted by threearbitrators, one each to be nominated by theContractor and the Owner and the third to be namedby the President of the Institution of Engineers,India. If either of the parties fails to appoint itsarbitrator within sixty (60) days after receipt of anotice from the other party invoking the Arbitrationclause, the President of the Institution of Engineers,India, shall have the power at the request of eitherof the parties, to appoint the arbitrator. A certifiedcopy of the said President making such anappointment shall be furnished to both the parties.The arbitration shall be conducted in accordancewith the provisions of the Indian Arbitration Act, 1940or any statutory modification thereof. The venue ofarbitration shall be ................................(To be filledby the Buyer)

4.1.26.7 The decision of the majority of the arbitrators shallbe final and binding upon the parties. The expensesof the arbitration shall be paid as may be determinedby the arbitrators. The arbitrators may, from time totime, with the consent of all the parties enlarge thetime for making the award. In the event of any of theaforesaid arbitrators dying, neglecting, resigning orbeing unable to act for any reason, it will be lawfulfor the party concerned to nominate anotherarbitrator in place of the outgoing arbitrator.

4.1.26.8 The arbitrator shall have full powers to reviewand/or revise any decision, opinion, directions,certification or valuation of the Engineer inconsonance with the Contract, and neither partyshall be limited in the proceedings before sucharbitrators to the evidence or arguments put beforethe Engineer for the purpose of obtaining the saiddecision.

4.26.9 No decision given by the Engineer in accordancewith the aforegoing provisions shall disqualify himas being called as a witness or giving evidencebefore the arbitrators on any matter whatsoeverrelevant to the dispute or difference referred to thearbitrators as aforesaid.

4.1.27 GRAFTS AND COMMISSIONS ETC.Any graft, commission, gift or advantage given,promised or offered by or on behalf of the Contractoror his partner, agent, officers, directors, employeeor servant or any one on his or their behalf in relationto the obtaining or to the execution of this or anyother Contract with the Owner, shall in addition toany criminal liability which it may incur, subject theContractor to the cancellation of this and all other

25

contracts and also to payment of any loss ordamage to the Owner result ing from anycancellation. The Owner shall then be entitled todeduct the amount so payable from any moneysotherwise due to the Contractor under the Contract.

4.1.28 LANGUAGE AND MEASURESAll documents pertaining to the Contract includingspecifications, schedules notices correspondence,operating and maintenance instructions, drawingsor any other writing shall be written in Englishlanguage. The metric system of measurement shallbe used exclusively in the Contract.

4.1.29 RELEASE OF INFORMATION

The Contractor shall not communicate or use inadvertising, publicity, sales releases or in any othermedium photographs or other reproduction of theWorks under this Contract, or descriptions of the Site,dimensions, quantity, quality or other information,concerning the Works unless prior written permissionhas been obtained from the Owner.

4.1.30 CONSTRUCTION OF THE CONTRACT4.1.30.1 Notwithstanding anything stated elsewhere in the

bid documents, the Contract to be entered into willbe treated as a divisible supply and erectionContract. The supply portion of the Contract willrelate to the supply of equipment and materialsand the erection portion will relate to the handlingat the Site, storage, erection, construction, testing,commissioning etc. as def ined in the biddocuments. The Owner will pay the sales tax forthe supply of equipment and materials inaccordance with law. The sales tax should not beincluded in the bid price in the proposal butindicated separately.

4.1.30.2 In case of divisible supply and erection contract,or where the Owner hands over his equipment tothe contractor for executing then the contractor shallat the time of taking delivery of the equipment/dispatch documents be required to execute anIndemnity Bond in favor of the Owner in the formacceptable to Owner for keeping the equipment insafe custody and to utilize the same exclusively forthe purposes of the said contract. Samples ofproforma for the Indemnity bond is enclosed asAnnexure - C (GCC) and D (GCC) to this Volume -I.

4.1.30.3 The Contract shall in all respects be construedand governed according to Indian laws.

4.1.30.4 It is clearly understood that the total considerationfor the Contract(s) has been broken up into variouscomponents only for the convenience of paymentof advance under the Contract(s) and for themeasurement of deviations or modifications underthe Contract(s).

4.1.31 COMPLETION OF CONTRACTUnless otherwise terminated under the provisionsof any other relevant clause, this Contract shall bedeemed to have been completed at the expiration

of the Guarantee Period as provided for under theclause entitled 'Guarantee' in this Section of theVolume-I.

4.1.32 ENFORCEMENT OF TERMSThe failure of either party to enforce at any time anyof the provisions of this Contract or any rights inrespect thereto or to exercise any option hereinprovided, shall in no way be construed to be awaiver of such provisions, rights or options or inany way to affect the validity of the Contract. Theexercise by either party of any of its rights hereinshall not preclude or prejudice either party fromexercising the same or any other right it may havehereunder.

4.1.33 ENGINEER'S DECISION4.1.33.1 In respect of all matters which are left to the

decision of the Engineer including the granting orwith-holding of the certificates, the Engineer shall,if required to do so by the Contractor give in writinga decision thereon.

4.1.33.2 If in the opinion of the Contractor, a decision madeby the Engineer is not in accordance with themeaning and Intent of the Contract, the Contractormay file with the Engineer within fifteen (15) daysafter receipt of the decision, a written objection tothe decision. Failure to file an objection within theallotted time will be considered as acceptance ofthe Engineer's decision and the decision shallbecome final and binding.

4.1.33.3 The Engineer's decision and the filing of thewritten objection thereto shall be a conditionprecedent to the right to request arbitration. It is theintent of the Agreement that there shall be no delayin the execution of the Works and the decision ofthe Engineer as rendered shall be promptlyobserved.

4.1.34 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS ANDCONSULTING ENGINEERSThe Contractor shall agree to cooperate with theOwner's other contractors and Consult ingEngineers and freely exchange with them suchtechnical information as is necessary to obtain themost efficient and economical design and to avoidunnecessary duplication of efforts. The Engineershall be provided with three copies of al lcorrespondence addressed by the Contractor toother Sub-contractors and Consulting Engineersin respect of such exchange of technicalinformation.

4.1.35 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL4.1.35.1 The Contractor shall undertake to train free of

cost, engineering personnel selected and sent bythe Owner at the works of the Contractor in case ofspecialized equipment as specified in the TechnicalSpecifications. The period and the nature of trainingfor the individual personnel shall be agreed uponmutually between the Contractor and the Owner.These engineering personnel shall be given

26

special training in the shops, where the equipmentwill be manufactured and/or in their Collaborator'sworks and where possible, in any other plant whereequipment manufactured by the Contractor or hisCollaborator is under installation or test, to enablethose personnel to become familiar with theequipment being furnished by the Contractor.

4.35.2 All travell ing and l iving expenses for theengineering personnel to be trained during the totalperiod of training will be borne by the Owner. Theseengineering personnel while undergoing trainingshall be responsible to the Contractor for discipline.

4.35.3 In the event of the Owner, for any reason, failing toavail of the training facilities, he shall not be entitledfor any rebate whatsoever on this account.

4.1.36 SUSPENSION OF WORK4.1.36.1 The Owner reserves the right to suspend and

reinstate execution of the whole or any part of theWorks without invalidating the provisions of theContract. Orders for suspension or reinstatementof the Works will be issued by the Engineer to theContractor in writing. The time for completion ofthe Works will be extended for a period equal toduration of the suspension.

4.1.36.2 Any necessary and demonstrable costs incurredby the Contractor as a result of such suspensionof the Works will be paid by the Owner, providedsuch costs are substantiated to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer. The Owner shall not be responsiblefor any liabilities if suspension or delay is due tosome default on the part of the Contractor or hisSub-contractor.

4.1.37 POWER TO VARY OR OMIT WORK4.1.37.1 No alterations, amendments, omissions,

suspensions or variations of the Works (hereinafterreferred to as 'Variation') under the Contract asdetailed in the Contract Documents, shall be madeby the Contractor except as directed in writing bythe Engineer, but the Engineer shall have full powersubject to the provision hereinafter contained fromtime to time during the execution of the Contract, bynotice in writing, to instruct the Contractor to makesuch Variation without prejudice to the Contract.The Contractor shall carry out such Variation andbe bound by the same conditions as far asapplicable as though the said Variation occurredin the Contract Documents. If any suggestedVariation would, in the opinion of the Contractor, ifcarried out, prevent him from fulfilling any of hisobligations or guarantees under the Contract, heshall notify the Engineer thereof in writing and theEngineer shall decide forthwith, whether or not thesame shall be carried out and if the Engineerconfirms his instructions, Contractor's obligationsand guarantees shall be modified to such an extentas may be mutually agreed. Any agreed differencein cost occasioned by any such Variation shall beadded to or deducted from the Contract Price asthe case may be.

4.1.37.2 In the event of the Engineer requiring any Variation,

such reasonable and proper notice shall be given tothe Contractor to enable him to work hisarrangements accordingly, and in cases where goodsor materials are already prepared or any design,drawings or pattern made or work done requires tobe altered, a reasonable and agreed sum in respectthereof shall be paid to the Contractor.

4.1.37.3 In any case in which the Contractor has receivedinstructions from the Engineer as to therequirements of carrying out the altered oradditional substituted work which either then orlater on, will in the opinion of the Contractor, involvea claim for additional payments, the Contractorshall immediately and in no case later than thirty(30) days, after receipt of the instructions aforesaidand before carrying out the instructions, advise theEngineer to that effect. But the Engineer shall notbecome liable for the payment of any charges inrespect of any such Variations, unless theinstructions for the performance of the same shallbe confirmed in writing by the Engineer.

4.1.37.4 If any Variation in the Works, results in reductionof Contract Price, the parties shall, agree, in writing,so to the extent of any change in the price, beforethe Contractor proceeds with the change.

4.1.37.5 In all the above cases, in the event of adisagreement as to the reasonableness of the saidsum, the decision of the Engineer shall prevail.

4.1.37.6 Notwithstanding anything stated above in thisclause, the Engineer shall have the full power toinstruct the Contractor, in writing, during theexecution of the Contract, to vary the quantities ofthe items or groups of items in accordance withthe provisions of clause entitled 'Quantity Variation'in section GCC of this Volume-I. The Contractorshall carry out such variations and be bound by thesame conditions, as through the said variationsoccurred in the Contract Documents. However, theContract Price shall be adjusted at the rates andthe prices provided for the original quantities in theContract.

4.1.38 GUARANTEE4.1.38.1 The Contractor shall warrant that the equipment

will be new and in accordance with the ContractDocuments and be free from defects in materialand workmanship for a period of twelve (12)calendar months commencing immediately uponthe satisfactory completion of the Trial Operations/Commissioning. The Contractor's liability shall belimited to the replacement of any defective parts inthe equipment of his own manufacture of those ofhis Sub-contractors, under normal use and arisingsolely from faulty design, materials, and/orworkmanship provided always that such defectiveparts are repairable at the Site and are not in themeantime essential in the commercial use of theplant. Such replaced defective parts shall bereturned to the Contractor unless otherwisearranged. No repairs or replacements shallnormally be carried out by the Engineer when theplant is under the supervision of the Contractor'ssupervisory engineers.

27

4.1.38.2 In the event of an emergency where, in thejudgement of the Engineer, delay would causeserious loss or damage, repairs or adjustmentsmay be made by the Engineer or a third party chosenby the Engineer without advance notice to theContractor and the cost of such work shall be paidby the Contractor, or by the Surety. In the event suchaction is taken by the Engineer, the Contractor willbe notified promptly and he shall assist whereverpossible in making the necessary corrections. Thisshall not relieve the Contractor's liability under theterms and conditions of the Contract.

4.1.38.3 If it becomes necessary for the Contractor toreplace or renew any defective portions of the plantunder this clause, the provisions of this clause shallapply to the portions of the plant so replaced orrenewed until the expiration of twelve (12) monthsfrom the date of such replacement or renewal. Ifany defects be not remedied within a reasonabletime, the Engineer may proceed to do the work atthe Contractor's risk and costs, but withoutprejudice to any other rights which the Owner mayhave against the Contractor in respect of suchdefects.

4.1.38.4 The repaired or new parts will be furnished anderected free of cost by the Contractor. If any repairis carried out on his behalf at the Site, the Contractorshall bear the cost of such repair.

4.1.38.5 The cost of any special or general overhaulrendered necessary during the maintenanceperiod due to defects in the plant or defective workcarried out by the Contractor shall be borne by theContractor.

4.1.38.6 The acceptance of the equipment by the Engineershall in no way relieve the Contractor of hisobligation under this clause.

4.1.38.7 In the case of those defective parts which are notrepairable at Site but are essential for thecommercial operation of the equipment, theContractor and the Engineer shall mutually agreeto a program of replacement or renewal which willminimize interruption to the maximum extent, inthe operation of the equipment.

4.1.38.8 At the end of the Guarantee Period, theContractor's liability ceases except for latentdefects. In respect of goods supplied by Sub-contractors to the Contractor where a longerguarantee (more than 12 months) is provided bysuch Sub-contractors, the Owner shall be entitledto the benefit of such longer guarantees.

4.1.38.9 The provisions contained in this clause will notbe applicable:(a) If the Owner has not operated the equipment

according to generally approved industrialpractices and in accordance with theconditions of operation specified and inaccordance with the operating manuals, if any.

(b) In cases of normal wear and tear of the partsto be specifically mentioned by the Contractorin the offer.

4.1.38.10 Above stipulation are non-negotiable. Bids not

complying with the above will not be opened andshall be returned to the bidder.

4.1.39 REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE PARTS ANDMATERIALS

4.1.39.1 If during the progress of the Works the Engineershall decide and inform in writing to the Contractor,that the Contractor has manufactured any plant orpart of the plant unsound or imperfect or hasfurnished any plant inferior than the qualityspecified, the Contractor on receiving details ofsuch defects or deficiencies shall at his ownexpense within seven (7) days of his receiving thenotice, or otherwise, within such time as may bereasonably necessary for making it good, proceedto alter, re-construct or remove such work andfurnish fresh equipment up to the standards of thespecifications. In case the Contractor fails to doso, the Engineer may on giving the Contractorseven (7) days' notice in writing of his intentions todo so, proceed to remove the portion of the Worksso complained of and, at the cost of the Contractor,perform all such work or furnish all such equipmentprovided that nothing in this clause shall bedeemed to deprive the Owner of or affect any rightsunder the Contract which the Owner may otherwisehave in respect of such defects and deficiencies.

4.1.39.2 The Contractor's full and extreme liability underthis clause shall be satisfied by the payment to theOwner of the extra cost, of such replacementprocured, including erection, as provided for in theContract, such extra cost being the ascertaineddifference between the price paid by the Owner forsuch replacements and the Contract-Price portionfor such defective plant and repayments of any sumpaid by the Owner to the Contractor in respect ofsuch defective plant. Should the Owner not soreplace the defective plant, the Contractor's extremeliability under this clause shall be limited torepayment of all sums paid by the Owner underthe contract for such defective plant.

4.1.40 DEFENCE OF SUITSIf any action in Court is brought against the Owneror Engineer or an office or agent of the Owner, forthe failure or neglect on the part of the Contractor toperform any acts, matters, covenants or things underthe Contract, or for damage or injury caused by thealleged omission or negligence on the part of theContractor, his agents, representatives or his sub-contractors, workmen, suppliers or employees, theContractor shall in all such cases indemnify andkeep the Owner, and the Engineer and / or hisrepresentative, harmless from all losses, damages,expenses or decrees arising of such action.

4.1.41 LIMITATION OF LIABILITIESThe final payment by the Owner in pursuance ofthe Contract shall mean, the release of theContractor from all his liabilities under the Contract.Such final payment shall be made only at the endof the Guarantee Period as detailed in Clause 39

28

above and till such time as the contractual liabilitiesand responsibilities of the Contractor, shall prevail.All other payments made under the Contract shallbe treated as on account payments.

4.42 MARGINAL NOTESThe marginal notes to any clause of the Contractshall not affect or control the construction of suchclause.

4.1.43 TAXES, PERMITS & LICENCESThe Contractor shall be liable and pay all non-Indian taxes, duties, levies, lawfully assessedagainst the Owner or the Contractor in pursuanceof the Contract. In addition the Contractor shall beresponsible for payment of all Indian duties, leviesand taxes lawfully assessed against the Contractorfor his personal income & property only. Thisclause shall be read in conjunction with clause15.0 of Section INB of this Volume I.

4.1.44 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PHOTOGRAPHSDuring the various stages of the Works in thepursuance of the Contract, the Contractor shall athis own cost submit periodic progress reports asmay be reasonably required by the Engineer withsuch materials as charts, net works photographs,test certificates, etc. Such progress reports shallbe in the form and size as may be required by theEngineer and shall be submitted in at least three(3) copies.

4.1.45 LONG TERM AVAILABILITY OF SPARES4.1.45.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the long term

availability of spares to the Owner for the full life ofthe equipments covered under the Contract. TheContractor shall guarantee that before going out ofproduction of spare parts of the equipment coveredunder the Contract, he shall give the Owner at leasttwelve (12) months advance notice so that the lattermay order his bulk requirement of spares, if he sodesires. The same provision will also be applicableto Sub-Contractor. Further, in case ofdiscontinuance of manufacture of any spares bythe Contractor or his sub-contractor the Contractorwill provide the Owner two years in advance, withfull manufacturing drawings, material specificationsand technical information required by the Ownerfor the purpose of manufacture of such items.

4.1.45.2 Further, in case of discontinuance of supply ofspares by the Contractor or his Sub-Contractors theContractor will provide the Owner with fullinformation for replacement of such spares withother equivalent makes, if so required by the Owner.

4.1.45.3 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a"directory" of his Sub-Contractors giving theaddresses and other particulars of his sub-contractors. The Owner, if he so desires, shallhave the right to procure the spares directly fromSub-Contractors.

4.1.45.4 Notwithstanding anything stated elsewhere in the

bid documents, the prices of all spares which maybe procured to cover long term requirementsbeyond the 3 years maintenance and operationalrequirements, will be generally in accordance withthe prices quoted by the sub-contractor and in anycase will not exceed the ex-works/F.O.B pricesquoted by the Contractor for initial sparerequirements for 3 years after taking into accountthe price adjustment in accordance with therelevant clauses of the bid documents but withoutany ceiling in the amount of variations in the prices.The above option of procuring future requirementof spares by the Owner shall remain valid for aperiod of 10 years from the date of acceptance ofthe Letter of Award.

4.1.45.5 The Contractor will indicate in advance the deliveryperiod of the items of spares, which the Ownermay procure in accordance with the sub-clause45.4. In case of emergency requirements of spares,the Contractor would make every effort to expeditethe manufacture and the delivery of such spareson the basis of mutually agreed time schedule.

4.1.45.6 The procedure specified in Clause 45.4 and 45.5shall apply for future procurement of items includedin standby spare list, mandatory spares lists,optional spares list and special tools, plants andequipment list, if any, specified in the bid documents.

4.1.46 PAYMENTS4.1.46.1 The payment to the Contractor for the performance

of the works under the contract will be made by theOwner as per the guidelines and conditionsspecified herein. All payment made during theContract shall be on account payments only. Thefinal payment will be made on completion of all theworks and on fulfillment by the Contractor of all hisliabilities under the Contract.

4.1.46.2 CURRENCYOF PAYMENTAll payments under the Contract shall be in IndianRupees only.

4.1.46.3 DUE DATE OF PAYMENTOwner will made progressive payment as andwhen the payment is due as per the terms ofpayment set forth in the accompanying SpecialConditions of Contract. Payment other than underthe Letter of Credit will become due and payableby the Owner within thirty (30) days from the date ofreceipt of Contractor' bill/invoice/debit note by theOwner provided the documents submitted arecomplete in all respects.

4.1.46.4 PAYMENT SCHEDULEThe Contractor shall prepare and submit to theEngineer for approval, a break-up of the ContractPrice. This Contract Price break-up shall beinterlinked with the agreed detailed PERT networkof the Contractor setting forth his starting andcompletion dates for the various key phases ofworks prepared as per condition in Clause 10 of

29

this Section GCC of Volume-I. Any payment underthe Contract shall be made only after theContractor's price break-up is approved by theEngineer. The aggregate sum of the Contractor'sprice break-up shall be equal to the lump-sumContract Price.

4.1.46.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTSThe Contractor shall submit application for thepayment in the prescribed proforma of the Owner.Proforma for application for payment is enclosed asAnnexure-A (GCC) to this Section GCC of Volume-I.Each such application shall state the amountclaimed and shall set forth in detail, in the order ofthe payment schedule, particulars of the worksincluding the works executed at site and of theequipment shipped/brought on to the site pursuantto the contract up to the date mentioned in theapplication and for the period covered since thelast preceding certificate, if any.Every interim payment certificate shall certify thecontract value of the works executed up to the datementioned in the application for the paymentcertificate, provided that no sum shall be includedin any interim payment certificate in respect of theworks that, according to the decision of the Engineer,does not comply with the Contract, or has beenperformed, at the date of certificate prematurely.

4.1.46.6 MODE OF PAYMENTThe Owner will establish an irrevocable Letter ofCredit in favor of the Contractor through the Owner'sbank, valid for the completion period agreed tobetween the Contractor and the Owner.

The payments due on receipt of equipment andmaterials and those for the inland transportationand the erection portion of the works shall be madedirect to the Contractor by the Owner.

4.1.46.7 TERMS OF PAYMENT1. The terms of payment for the price componentsof the equipment, erection and allied works aredetailed herein for each equipment package. Acertain percentage of the equipment, erection andallied works price component of each packageshall be paid as initial advance on fulfillment of thefollowing by the Contractor:

For the Ex-works price component of theequipmenta) Acceptance of Letter of Awardb) Submission of an uncondit ional Bank

Guarantee for an equivalent amount, whichshall be initially kept valid till 90 days after theschedule date for successful completion oftrial operations/commissioning. The proformaof Bank Guarantee for advance is enclosedas Annexure-B (GCC) to this Section GCC ofVolume-I. The value of bank guarantee (othersecurity) for advance shall be allowed to bereduced every six months after first runningaccount bill/stage payment under the contract,

if the value of such B.G. (Security) is morethan Rs. five (5) lacs and validity is more thanone year. The cumulative amount of reductionat any point of time shall not exceed 75% ofthe advance corresponding to cumulativevalue of supplies/work completed as per acertificate to be issued by the Engineer-in-Charge. It should be clearly understood thatthe reduction in value of advance bankguarantee or other security as above shall notin any way dilute the Contractor'sresponsibilities and liabilities under thecontract including in respect of supplies/workfor which the reduction in the value of BankGuarantee (for other security) is allowed.

c) Submission of an unconditional bankguarantee towards Contract PerformanceGuarantee valid up to ninety (90) days after theend of the guarantee period, in accordance withclause 23.0 of Section INB of this Volume-I.

d) Submission of Detai led complet ionprogramme based on the Work Schedulestipulated in the Letter of Award and its approvalby Owner.

For the Erection Price Componenta) On establishing his office at Site preparatory

to mobilization of his erection establishment.b) Submission of an uncondit ional Bank

Guarantee covering the advance amountwhich shall be initially kept valid till ninety (90)days after the schedule date for successfulcompletion of trial operations/commissioning.The proforma of Bank Guarantee for advanceis enclosed as Annexure-B (GCC) to thisSection GCC of Volume-I.

c) Signing of Contract Agreement.2. All further payments under the contract shall bemade as stipulated in the Special Conditions ofContract after signing the Contract Agreement. Thepayment linked with despatch of materials shallonly be made after production of all despatchdocuments as specified in L/C conditions and/orin the relevant contract conditions which will inter-alia include the Material Despatch ClearanceCertificate (MDCC) issued by the Owner.In case of erection, progressive payments shall bemade only after the issue of certificates by theEngineer's Field Quality surveillance representativefor the successful completion of quality checkpoints involved in the quantum of work billed.3. Inland Transportation & InsuranceInland transportation (including port handling) andinland insurance charges shall be paid to thecontractor on pro-rata to the value of the equipmentreceived at site and on production of the invoicesby the contractor. However, wherever equipmentwise inland transportation charges have beencalled for in the Bid Proposal Sheets and have beenfurnished by the Contractor. The payment of inlandtransportation charges shall be made after receiptof equipment at site based on the charges thusidentified by the Contractor in his proposal and

30

incorporated in the Contract. The aggregate of allsuch pro-rata payments shall however, not exceedthe total amount quoted by the bidder in his bidand incorporated in the contract.

ANNEXURE-A (GCC)

Page 1 of 2

PROFORMA FOR APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTSProject :Equipment Package : Date :Name of Contractor : Contract No. :Contract Value : Contract Name :Unit reference : Application serial :

numberTo

........................................................

........................................................

........................................................*

[Buyer's Address to be indicated here)

Dear Sir, APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT *

Pursuant to the above referred Contract dated.................................. the undersigned hereby applies forpayment of the sum of ..........................................................

(specify amount and currency in which claim is made)The above amount is on account of : (check whicheverapplicable)Initial advance (Schedule **)Interim payment as advance (Schedule **)Progressive payment against despatch of equipment(Schedule **)Progressive payment against receipt of equipment at site(Schedule **)

Progressive payment against supervision of Erection(Schedule **)Inland transportation (Schedule **)

v v v

ANNEXURE-A (GCC)

Page 2 of 2Inland insurancePrice adjustmentExtra work not specified in Contract (Ref. Contract changeorder no. ......................)Others (specify)

Final payment (Schedule **)as detailed in the attached Schedule(s) which form anintegral part of this specification.

3. The payment claimed is as per item(s) no(s)..................of the payment schedule annexed to the abovementioned contract.

4. This application consists of this page, a summary ofclaim statement (Schedule **) and the following signedschedules :

1. .................................2. .................................3. .................................

The following documents are also enclosed :

1. .................................2. .................................3. .................................

---------------------------Signature of Contractor/

authorized signatory* Applications for payments will be made to 'Engineer',

as to be designated for this purpose at the time ofaward of the Contract.

** Proforma for the Schedules will be mutually discussesand agreed to during the finalisation of the ContractAgreement.

v v v

ANNEXURE-B (GCC)

Page 1 of 3

PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

[The non-judical stamp paper should bein the name of issuing Bank]

Ref : ................................... Bank Guarantee No...............Date : ........................................

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(Address of Owner)

Dear Sirs,

In consideration of the .........................................................(hereinafter referred to as the 'Owner' which expressionshall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof,include all successors, administrators and assigns)having awarded to M/s.............................................................with its Registered/Head Office at................................................. hereinafter referred to as'Contractor' which expression shall unless repugnant tothe context or meaning thereof, include its successors,

31

administrators, executors, and assigns) a contract by issueof Owner's Letter of Award No......................... dated....................... and the same having been unequivocallyaccepted by the Contractor, resulting into a Contract bearingno ...................... dated ....................... valued at ........................for ..................................... (scope of work) contract(hereinafter called the Contract) and the Owner havingagreed to made an advance payment to the Contractor forperformance of the above Contract amounting to............................................................................................. (infigures and words) as an advance against Bank Guaranteeto be furnished by the Contractor.We ............................................................................ having its

(name of the Bank)Head office at .............................................................................

(address)hereinafter referred to as the Bank which expression shallunless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof,include its successors, administrators, executors andassigns) do hereby guarantee and undertake to pay theOwner immediately on demand any or, all monies payableby the Contractor to the extent of .............................……….at any time up to ………………………..(words and figures)

without any demur, reservation, recourse, contest orprotest and/or without any reference to the Contractor. Anysuch demand made by the Owner on the Bank shall beconclusive and binding not withstanding any differencebetween the Owner and the Contractor or any disputepending before any Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any otherauthority. We agree that the Guarantee

v v v

ANNEXURE-B (GCC)

Page 2 of 3

herein contained shall be irrevocable and shall continueto be enforceable till the Owner discharges this Guarantee.The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting inany way the liability of the Bank under this Guarantee fromtime to time to vary the advance or to extend the time forperformance of the Contract by the Contractor. The Ownershall have the fullest liberty without affecting thisGuarantee, to postpone from time to time the exercise ofany powers vested in them or of any right which they mighthave against the Contractor, and to exercise the same atany time in any manner, and either to enforce or to forebearto enforce any covenants contained or implied in theContract between the Owner and the Contractor or anyother course or remedy or security available to the Owner.The Bank shall not be released of its obligations underthese presents by any exercise by the Owner of its libertywith reference to matters aforesaid or any of them or byreason of any other act or forbearance or other acts ofomission or commission on the part of the Owner or anyother indulgence shown by the Owner or by any othermatter or thing whatsoever which under law would but forthis provision, have the effect of relieving the Bank.

The Bank also agrees that on the certification of the Ownerthe amount of the Bank guarantee shall stand reduced tothe extend so notified by the Owner semi annually. It isfurther agreed that the reduction so notified by the Ownershall be conclusive and binding on the bank without anyreservation.The Bank also agrees that the Owner at its option shall beentitled to enforce this Guarantee against the Bank as aPrincipal debtor, in first instance without proceedingagainst the Contractor and notwithstanding any securityor other guarantee that the Owner may have in relation tothe Contractor's liabilities.

Notwithstanding anything contained hereinabove, ourl iabil i ty under this guarantee is l imited to........................................................ and it shall remain in forceup to and including ............................... @ ............................and shall be extended from time to time for such periods(not exceeding one year) as may be desired by M/s................................................................. on whose behalf thisGuarantee has been given...................................................

Dated this ...................... day of .............. 20 ............... at ............

v v v

ANNEXURE-B (GCC)

Page 3 of 3WITNESS :-----------------------------

(Signature) (Signature) ..................................----------------------------- (Name) ……....…….....................

(Name)----------------------------- (Designation with Bank(Official Address) Stamp) .........................................

Attorney as per Power ofAttorney------------------------------------------

No.................................................Dated............................................

* Strike whichever is not applicable@ The date shall be 90 days after the schedule date ofsuccessful completion of the tr ial operations/commissioning.Note : While getting the Bank Guarantee issued, biddersare required to ensure compliance to the points mentionedat 'Bank Guarantee Verification Check List' enclosed atAnnexure-E (INB) to Conditions of Contract, Vol.I Bidder tofill up the check list as per the aforesaid proforma enclosedat Annexure-E (INB) and ensure its submission alongwith the Bank Guarantee.

v v v

32

absolutely responsible for the safe transit/protectionand custody of the equipment at ..................... "@".............................. site against all risks whatsoevertill the equipments are duly used/erected inaccordance with the terms of the contract and theplant/package duly erected and commissioned inaccordance with the terms of the Contract is takenover by ..................... "@" ......................... TheContractor undertakes to keep ..................... "@"......................... harmless against any loss ordamage that may be caused to the Equipments.

3. The Contractor undertakes that the Equipmentsshall be used exclusively for the performance/execution of the Contract strictly in accordance withits terms and conditions and no part of theequipments shall be utilized for any other work orpurpose whatsoever. It is clearly understood by theContractor that no-observance of the obligationsunder this Indemnity Bond by the Contractor shallinter-alia constitute a criminal breach of trust onthe part of the Contractor for all intents andpurposes including legal/penal consequences.

4. That ..................... "@" .............................. is and shallremain the exclusive Owner of the Equipments freefrom all encumbrances, charges or liens of anykind, whatsoever. The equipments shall at all timesbe open to inspection and checking by Engineer-in-Charge/Engineer or other employees/agentsauthorized by him in this regard. Further, ....................."@" ............................ shall always be free at all timesto take possession of the Equipments in whateverform the equipments may be, if in its opinion, theequipments are likely to be endangered, misutilisedor converted to uses other than those specified inthe Contract, by any acts of omission ofcommission on the part of the Contractor or anyother person or on account of any reasonwhatsoever and the Contractor binds itself andundertakes to comply with the directions or demandof ..................... "@" .............................. to return theEquipments without any demur or reservation.

5. That this Indemnify Bond is irrevocable, if at anytime any loss or damage occurs to the equipmentsor the same or any part thereof is misutilised inany manner whatsoever, then the contractor herebyagrees that the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/Engineer of ..................... "@" .............................. asto assessment of loss or damage to the Equipmentshall be final and binding on the Contractor. TheContractor binds itself and undertakes to replacethe lost and / or damaged equipments at its owncost and / or shall pay the amount of loss to..................... "@" .............................. without any demur,reservation or protest. This is without prejudice toany other right or remedy that may be available to..................... "@" .............................. against thecontractor under the Contract and under thisIndemnity Bond.

6. NOW THE CONDITION, of this Bond is that if theContractor shall duly and punctually comply withthe terms and conditions of this Bond to thesatisfaction of ..................... "@" ..............................,THEN, the above Bond shall be void, but otherwise,it shall remain in full force and virtue.

ANNEXURE-C (GCC)

PROFORMA OF INDEMNITY BOND TO BE EXECUTEDBY THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE EQUIPMENTS

HANDED OVER BY OWNER FOR PERFORMANCE OFITS CONTRACT

[Entire Equipment Consignment in one lot](On non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value)

INDEMNITY BONDTHIS INDEMNITY BOND IS made this ....................... day of............ 20 ............. (year) by .......................................... aCompany registered under the Companies Act, 1956/Partnership Firm/Proprietary concern having itsRegistered Office at ..................................... .................................(hereinafter called as "Contractor" or "Obligor" whichexpression shall include its successors and permittedassigns) in favour of ..................................................... aCompany incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956having its registered off ice at......................................................... and its Project at.............................. (hereinafter called ................"@"..............(@ Brief Name of the Buyer to be indicated here) whichexpression shall include its successors and assigns).WHEREAS ..................... "@" ...................... (@ Brief Nameof Buyer to be indicated here) has awarded to theContractor a Contract for ............................................. vide itsLetter of Intent/Award Letter/Contract No.........................dated ................... and its Amendment No......................................... and AmendmentNo.................................. (applicable when amendmentshave been issued) (hereinafter called the "Contract") interms of which ..................... "@" .............................. is requiredto hand over various Equipments to the Contractor forexecution of the Contract.

AND WHEREAS by virtue of Clause No....... of the saidContract, the Contractor is required to execute an IndemnityBond in favour of ..................... "@" .............................. for theEquipments handed over to it by ..................... "@".............................. for the purpose of performance of theContract/Erection portion of the Contract (hereinafter calledthe "Equipments").

NOW, THEREFORE, this Indemnity Bond witnesseth asfollows :1. That in consideration of various equipments as

mentioned in the Contract, valued atRs.......................................... (Rupees...............)handed over to the Contractor for the purpose ofperformance of the Contract, the Contractor herebyundertakes to indemnify and shall keep ....................."@" .............................. indemnified, for the full valueof the Equipments. The Contractor herebyacknowledges actual receipt of the Equipmentsetc. as per despatch title documents, handed overto the Contractor as detailed in the Scheduleappended hereto. The Contractor shall hold suchEquipments etc. in trust as a "Trustee" for and onbehalf of ..................... "@" ...........................

2. That the contractor is obliged and shall remain

33

ANNEXURE-D (GCC)

PRORORMA OF INDEMNITY BOND TO BE EXECUTED BYTHE CONTACTOR FOR THE EQUIPMENTS HANDED

OVER AND TO BE HANDED OVER IN INSTALMENTS BYOWNER FOR PERFORMANCE OF ITS CONTRACT.

(On non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value)

INDEMNITY BONDTHIS INDEMNITY BOND IS made this ...................... day of.............. 20..............(year) by .......................................... aCompany registered under the Company Act, 1956/Partnership Firm/Proprietary concern having itsRegistered Office at ..................................... .................................(hereinafter called as "Contractor" or "Obligor" whichexpression shall include its successors and permittedassigns) in favour of ................................................... aCompany incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956having its registered office at,...........................................................and its Projectat................................. (hereinafter called ..................... "@".............................. [@Brief Name of Buyer to be indicatedhere] which expression shall include its successors andassigns).WHEREAS ....................."@"............................... has awardedto the Contractor a Contract for .............................................vide its Letter of Intent/Award Letter/Contract No......................... dated ................. and its Amendment No......................................... and Amendment No.................................. (applicable when amendments havebeen issued) (hereinafter called the "Contract") in termsof which ............................ "@" .............................. is requiredto hand over various Equipments to the Contractor forexecution of the Contract.

AND WHEREAS by virtue of Clause No....... of the saidContract, the Contractor is required to execute an IndemnityBond in favour of ..................... "@" .............................. for theEquipments to be handed over to it by ..................... "@".............................. for the purpose of performance of theContract/Erection portion of the Contract (hereinafter calledthe "Equipments)".

NOW, THEREFORE, this Indemnity Bond witnesseth asfollows :1. That in consideration of various Equipments as

mentioned in the Contract, valued atRs.......................................... (Rupees...............) to behanded over to the Contractor in installments fromtime to time for the purpose of performance of theContract; the Contractor hereby undertakes toindemnify and shall keep ..................... "@".............................. indemnified, for the full value ofthe Equipments. The Contractor herebyacknowledges actual receipt of the init ialinstallment of the Equipments etc. as per detailsin the Schedule appended hereto. Further, theContractor agrees to acknowledge actual receiptof the subsequent installments of the Equipmentsetc. as required by ..................... "@" ..............................in the form of schedules consecutively numbered

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Contractor hashereunto set its hand through its authorizedrepresentative under the common seal of theCompany, the day, month and year first abovementioned

SCHEDULE

Particulars of Quantity Particulars of Value of Signature ofthe Equipments Despatch Title the Attorney inhanded-over Documents Equipments token of

--------------------------------- receiptRR/GR/ CarrierBill ofladingNo & Date

-------------------- ---------- ----------------- -------------- ---------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------For and on behalf ofM/s. ....................................

WITNESS :I. 1. Signature ------------------ Name----------------------

2. Name ----------------------- Signature ----------------3. Address -------------------- Designation -------------

Authorized

representative*II. 1. Signature ------------------

2. Name ----------------------- Common Seal(In case of Company)

3. Address -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------@ : - Brief Name of the Buyer to be indicated.

* : - Indemnity Bonds are to be executed by theauthorised persons and (i) In case of contractingCompany under common seal of the Company or(ii) having the power of attorney issued undercommon seal of the company with authority toexecute Indemnity Bonds, (iii) In case (ii), the originalPower of Attorney if it is specifically for our contractor a Photostat copy of the Power of Attorney if it is aGeneral Power of Attorney and such documentsshould be attached to Indemnity Bond.NOTES: Proforma of "Trust Receipt" to be given byContractor and "Authorisation Letter" to be given bythe Project Authority shall be as per formatsenclosed herewith as Appendix-I and II respectively.

v v v

34

which shall be attached to this Indemnity Bond soas to form integral parts of this Bond. The Contractorshall hold such Equipments etc. in trust as a"Trustee" for and on behalf of ..................... "@".............................. .

2. That the contractor is obliged and shall remainabsolutely responsible for the safe transit/protectionand custody of the equipment at ..................... "@".............................. project site against all riskswhatsoever till the equipments are duly used/erected in accordance with the terms of the contractand the plant/package duly erected andcommissioned in accordance with the terms of theContract is taken over by ..................... "@"............................... The Contractor undertakes tokeep ..................... "@" .............................. harmlessagainst any loss or damage that may be caused tothe Equipments.

3. The Contractor undertakes that the Equipmentsshall be used exclusively for the performance/execution of the Contract strictly in accordance withits terms and conditions and no part of theequipments shall be utilised for any other work orpurpose whatsoever. It is clearly understood by theContractor that no-observance of the obligationsunder this Indemnity Bond by the Contractor shallinter-alia constitute a criminal breach of trust onthe part of the Contractor for all intents andpurposes including legal/penal consequences.

4. That ........................... "@" .............................. is andshall remain the exclusive Owner of theEquipments free from all encumbrances, chargesor liens of any kind, whatsoever. The equipmentsshall at all times be open to inspection andchecking by Engineer-in-Charge/Engineer or otheremployees/agents authorized by him in this regard.Further, ............................ "@" .............................. shallalways be free at all times to take possession ofthe Equipments in whatever form the equipmentsmay be, if in its opinion, the equipments are likelyto be endangered, misutilised or converted to usesother than those specified in the Contract, by anyacts of omission or commission on the part of theContractor or any other person or on account ofany reason whatsoever and the Contractor bindsitself and undertakes to comply with the directionsor demand of ..................... "@" .............................. toreturn the Equipments without any demur orreservation.

5. That this Indemnity Bond is irrevocable, if at anytime any loss or damage occurs to the equipmentsor the same or any part thereof is misutilised inany manner whatsoever, then the contractor herebyagrees that the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/Engineer of ..................... "@" .............................. asto assessment of loss or damage to the Equipmentshall be final and binding on the Contractor. TheContractor binds itself and undertakes to replacethe lost and/or damaged equipments at its owncost and / or shall pay the amount of loss to..................... "@" .............................. without any demur,reservation or protest. This is without prejudice toany other right or remedy that may be available to..................... "@" .............................. against the

contractor under the Contract and under thisIndemnity Bond.

6. NOW THE CONDITION, of this Bond is that if theContractor shall duly and punctually comply withthe terms and conditions of this Bond to thesatisfaction of ..................... "@" ..............................THEN, the above Bond shall be void, but otherwise,it shall remain in full force and virtue.IN WITNESSS WHEREOF, the Contractor hashereunto set its hand through its authorizedrepresentative under the common seal of theCompany, the day, month and year first abovementioned.

SCHEDULE

Particulars of Quantity Particulars of Value of Signature ofthe Equipments Despatch Title the Attorney inhanded-over Documents Equipments token of

--------------------------------- receiptRR/GR/ CarrierBill ofladingNo & Date

-------------------- ---------- ------------------ -------------- ---------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------For and on behalf ofM/s. ....................................

WITNESS :I. 1. Signature ------------------ Name----------------------

2. Name ----------------------- Signature ----------------3. Address -------------------- Designation -------------

Authorizedrepresentative*

II. 1. Signature ------------------2. Name ----------------------- Common Seal

(In case of Company)3. Address --------------------

@ : - Brief Name of the Buyer to be indicated.* : - Indemnity Bonds are to be executed by the

authorized persons and (i) In case of contractingCompany under common seal of the Company or(ii) having the power of attorney issued undercommon seal of the company with authority toexecute Indemnity Bonds, (iii) In case (ii), the originalPower of Attorney if it is specifically for our contractor a Photostat copy of the Power of Attorney if it is aGeneral Power of Attorney and such documentsshould be attached to Indemnity Bond.Note : Proforma for "Trust Receipt" to be given byContractor and "Authorization Letter" to be given byProject Authority shall be as per formats enclosedherewith as Appendix-I and II respectively.

v v v

35

APPENDIX - I

TO ANNEUXRE-C/D (GCC)

TRUST RECEIPT FOR PLANT, EQUIPMENT ANDMATERIALS RECEIVED FROM

OWNER UNDER CONTRACT NO...................................DATED ..........................

We M/S ....................................................................................having our Principal place of business at............................................................................have beenawarded a Contract No. .........................................dated........................for ............................................by............................................................ [Name of the Buyer]

We do hereby acknowledge the receipt of the Plant,Equipment and Materials as are fully described andmentioned under Documents of Title/RR/LR etc and inthe schedule annexed hereto, which shall form an integralpart of this receipt, as "Trustee" of................................................................ [Name of the Buyer].The aforesaid materials etc. so received by us shall beexclusively used in the successful performance of theaforesaid Contract and for no other purposes whatsoever.We undertake not to create any charge, lien, orencumbrance over the aforesaid materials etc. in favourof any other person/institutions(s)/Banks.

For M/S...........................................Dated ...................... (AUTHORISED SIGNATORY)

Place ........................ SEAL OF COMPANY)

v v v

APPENDIX - II

TO ANNEUXRE-C/D (GCC)PROFORMA OF AUTHORISATION LETTER

To, Ref. No. :Date :

M/s .....................................................................................

Ref.: Contract No. ..................... dated ..................... for................. awarded by ........................................................[Name of the Buyer]

Dear Sir,

Kindly refer to Contract No. ........................... Dated....................... for ........................... You are hereby authorizedon behalf of .......................... [Name of the Buyer] having itsregistered office at ......................................................... andits Project at .................................. to take physical deliveryof materials/equipments covered under DespatchDocument/Consignment Note No. ...................... *........................ dated .............................. and as detailed inthe enclosed schedule for the sole purpose of successfulperformance of the aforesaid contract and for no otherpurposes, whatsoever.

(Signature of Project Authority)**Designation .................................Date .............................................

Encl. : As above.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------** To be signed not below the rank of Manager

" Mention LR/RR No.

SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT COVERED UNDER DESPATCH TITLE DOCUMENT (RR NO / LR NO......................................)

S.NO PACK AGE

LOA NO./ CONTRACT AGREEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS/ EQUIPMENTS

SPECN NO,

QUANT - ITY

VALUE REMAR KS

(SIGNATURE OF THE PROJECT AUTHORITY)

36

4.2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (SCC)

ASSOCIATED WITH ......................................

The following Special Conditions of Contract (Volume - IA)shall supplement the Conditions of Contract (Vol.I).Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shallprevail over those in the Conditions of Contract. Thecorresponding clause numbers of the Conditions ofContract are indicated in parentheses.

4.2.01 Scope of workThe scope of work under improvement ofdistribution system includesAssessment of condition of the existing system,plotting of the existing system , , survey, proposingthe High Voltage Distribution, location oftransformers , sizing of aerial bunched HT & LTcables, supply of materials / equipment , storage& handling at site, erection, testing &commissioning of 11 kV / 415 VoltsDistribution transformers and H.V. DistributionSystem on turn key basis.Design manufacture, supply & erection of 33 kV /11 kV Distribution system including design of civilfoundation trenches control rooms on turn keybasis.Survey, design, manufacture, supply, erection andcommissioning of 11 kV lines on turnkey basis.

4.2.02 TIME-THE ESSENCE OF CONTRACT (Clause 10.0,SECTION GCC)

(i) The Bidder shall include in the proposal hisprogramme for furnishing and erecting (includingtesting and putting into satisfactory operation) theequipment covered in this Construction of 33KV/11KV Sub-Station Package, 11KV lines, HVDSSystem & 11kV pole mounted station.

The programme shall be in the form of masternetwork identifying the key phases in various areasof total work, like design, procurement, manufactureand field activities. In addition, key milestone dates(10-15 numbers) shall also be identified coveringthe above area. The master network will beprepared separately for 33/11KV station and 11KVLines and feeder wise programme for HVdistribution system and shall conform to thefollowing schedule date of completion (Scheduleto be indicated by the owner) :

Sl. Activity Period in monthsNo. from the date of

Letter of Award1. Approval of Engineering drawings2. Completion of detailed engineering3. Completion of ordering of BOIs4. Commencement of Civil Work5. Completion of Civil Works6. Commencement of supplies7. Completion of supplies

(including mandatory spares)8. Completion of erection,9. Testing & Commissioning

Note: Spares shall not be despatched before thedespatch of correspond- ing main equipment.The charging of the Sub-Station/Lines/HVDS willcommence any day with in 30 days after readinessfor charging.This Master Network and the key milestone dateswill be discussed and agreed before the issue ofLetter of Award. Engineering drawing and datasubmission schedule shall also be discussed andfinalised before the issue of Letter of Award.

After the Award of Contract, the Contractor shallplan the sequence of work of manufacture anderection to meet the above stated dates ofsuccessful completion of test charging of theequipment and shall ensure all work/manufacture,shop testing, inspection & shipment of theequipment in accordance with the requiredconstruction/erection sequence.Within one month of acceptance of the Letter ofAward, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineerfor his review and approval, two copies (1reproducible, 1 print) of detailed network scheduleswith Master Network activities further explodedbased on the Master Network (mutually agreed bythe Owner & Contractor) showing the logic &duration of the activities covered in both the Firstand Second Contract in the following areas:"Design, engineering, Procurement (includingbought out items), manufacturing, testing andinspection at manufacturers works, supply, storage,construction, erection, testing and commissioningof the complete scope."

37

(ii) Detailed Manufacturing ProgrammeDetailed manufacturing Programme for all themanufacturing activities at Contractor's/Sub-Contractor's works shall also be furnished within60 days of Letter of Award.The manufacturing network shall be supported bydetailed procurement programme for critical boughtout items/raw materials.

(iii) Pre-Erection Activity ProgrammeThe erection network will be supported by detailedPre-erection activity programme covering thefollowing :a) Manpower Deploymentb) T&P Mobilisation planc) Detailed Site Mobilisation Plan

(iv) Within one week of approval of the networkschedule, the Contractor shall forward to theEngineer, copies of the Computer initial run Data.The type of outputs and number of copies of eachtype to be supplied by the Contractor shall bedetermined by the Engineer.

(v) All the networks shall be updated every month or ata frequency mutually agreed upon. Within sevendays following the Monthly Review, a progressmeeting shall be held, whenever possible at theworks, wherein the major items of the plant ofequipment are being produced. The meeting willbe attended by the Engineer and responsiblerepresentatives of the Contractor that the Engineerconsiders necessary for the meeting.

(vi) Access to Contractor's and sub-contractor's workshall be granted to the Engineer at all reasonabletimes for the purpose of ascertaining the progress.

(vii) Progress ReportsDuring execution of the Contract / Manufacture/erection/commissioning, the Contractor shallfurnish monthly progress reports in a timely mannerto the Owner or the Engineer in a format asspecified by the Owner or the Engineer. Theprogress reports shall indicate progress achievedduring the month, and total progress upto the monthas against scheduled and anticipated completiondates in respect of key phase of work of manufactureand shipment such as release of drawing forfabrication, procurement of raw materials,fabrication, inspection and testing. The progressreports shall be furnished separately for :a) Design work.b) Items to be manufactured at Contractor's

works.c) Brought out items required at Contractor's

works for further processing.d) Brought out items to be despatched directly to

site.e) Financial targets and shall cover the progress

during the month, cumulative progress asagainst monthly/cumulative targets,anticipated completion dates.

4.2.03 QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDING FORTURNKEY PACKAGES UNDER APDRP PROJECTS

To be qualified for the bidding, the bidder mustmeet the following minimum criteria:

(i) The bidder must have successfully executedcontracts for construction of at least:(A) 50 (fifty) kms. of 11 kV or above voltage class

lines(B) 5 (five) nos. 33 kV or above voltage class

substations in the last five yearswhich must be in satisfactory operation for atleast two years as on the date of bid opening.

(ii) A firm which does not meet all the requirements ofpara 1.0 A&B but have

Successfully executed contracts as per 1.0 (A) inthe last 5 years which is inSatisfactory operation for at least two years as onthe date of bid opening may

form a consortium (as a lead partner) with anotherfirm who have successfully executed jobs as perPara 1 (B) above.

Similarly a f irm which does not meet therequirement of Para 1 (A) & (B)

but has successfully executed contracts as per 1(B) in the last 5 years which

must be in satisfactory operation for at least 2 yearsas on the date of bidopening. Can form a consortium with (as a leadpartner) another firm who has successfullyexecuted contract as per 1(A) above.

(iii) The bidder or the partner(s) of the consortium musthave executed similar

contracts on turnkey basis and should haveadequate in house design & engineeringinfrastructure facilities, quality assurance and safetyset up to carry out similar type of work.

(iv) The bidder or the partner(s) of the consortium mustbe in possession of HT ElectricalContractor'License.

(v) The bidder must have minimum average annualturnover for the best three years out of last fivefinancial years of Rs.50 Crore out of which at least20 Crore should be from supply and erection ofl ines /sub stat ions business. In case of aConsortium, the figures for each of the partnersshall be added together to determine the bidder'scompliance with the above minimum criteria.However, the lead partner must meet, not less than50% of the above minimum criteria and the otherpartner must meet, not less than 25% of the aboveminimum criteria.

(vi) The bidder shall furnish documentary evidence insupport of the qualifying requirements as stipulatedabove. The turnover from supply & erection can becertified by Chartered Accountant.This PQ will be valid for the particular Discom forall APDRP Projects for a period of one year fromthe date of finalisation of PQ.

(vii) Notwithstanding anything stated hereinabove, theOwner reserves the right to assess the capacityand capability of the bidder to execute the contract,

38

should the circumstances warrant suchassessment in the overall interest of the owner.The owner also reserves the right to waive off minordeviations if, in the opinion of the owner, do notmaterially affect the capability of the bidder toperform the contract.

4.2.04 CONSORTIUM BIDSBids submitted by a Consortium as per QualifyingRequirements shall additionaly comply with thefollowing requirements:(i) The Bid shall include all the information

required as per clause 3.1 of ITB for eachConsortium Partner;

(ii) The bid, shall be signed so as to be legallybinding on both the partners;

(iii) One of the partners, responsible for performinga key component of the Contract, shall benominated as Lead Partner: this authorisationshall be evidenced by submitting with the bid apower of attorney signed by legally authorisedsignatories of other the partner.

(iv) The Lead Partner shall be authorised to incurliabilities and receive instructions for and onbehalf of other partner of the Consortium, andthe entire execution of the Contract includingpayment shall be done exclusively with the LeadPartner.

(v) Both partners of the Consortium shall be liablejointly and serverally for the execution of thecontract in accordance with the Contract.

4.2.05 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALSThe construction materials such as cement,reinforcement steel, structural steel etc. requiredfor civil construction/foundation work under thiscontract shall be arranged by the bidder from hisown sources.

4.2.06 GUARANTEE FOR COMPLETION OF CONTRACTContractor / Consortium Partner wil l makecommitment for completing ------------ crore of workwithin one year of award of work. The value of thecontract will be based on the unit rates quoted bythe contractor. Before award of contract, thecontractor will submit performance guarantee of10 % or the value of the job in committing tocomplete within 1 year . If the contract period givenis more than 1 yr then the contractor will submitperformance guarantee for 10% of the value of thecontract he is committing to complete in the period.This performance guarantee will remain valid for 6months more than the contract period. In casecontractor fails to complete the committed value ofthe contract awarded within the period for fault notattributed to the owner or force majeure reasons,his PG will be forfeited.

4.2.07 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITYFor 33KV/11KV substation, the contractor will carryout site investigation, design and quote the job on

turn key basis.The contractor will quote form thesubstation onL.S basis based on the single line diagram andsectional views provided by the owner.For HVDS system the contractor will quote on thebasis of BOQ provided by the owners. However,the contractor's responsibility will include : A ) Plotting of existing system B) Estimating the existing load on the LT side of

the systemC) Existing voltage at the tail endD) Existing load on transformerE) Propose HV Distribution systemF) Propose location and rating of transformersG) Laying of HT AB cableH) Identify new poles to be erectedI) Laying of LT AB CableJ) Supply of equipment ,erection and testing and

commissioning of the system.The contractor will be paid on the basis of actualquantities based on the unit rate quoted and agreedby the owner.

4.2.08 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY 4.2.08.1Owner will furnish the details of the work to be

awarded under the contract . This will include

a) Details of 33KV/11KV Sub-Station to beconstructed.

b) Details of 33KV/11KV lines to be constructed.Give its details & app length of the lines to beconstructed.

c) Identification of the area which needs to bechanged to HVDS system and the no. of 11KVfeeders to be constructed in the area andapproximate BOQ for the same

d) No of 11KV lines & distribution transformer tobe dismantled & app. BOQ

e) Stores where dismantled materials are to behanded over.

f) Right of Way and land for the construction of thesubstations.

4.2.09 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES (Clause 18.0, Section GCC)4.2.09.1If the contractor fails to successfully complete

the job under the scope of contract as per theschedule specified in the contract, the Contractorshall pay to the Owner as Liquidated Damagesand not as penalty, a sum calculated at the rateof one half of one percent (1/2%) of contract priceof the package for each week or part thereof ofdelay in the completion of the works up tomaximum of 5% of Contract Value.The determined liquidated damages for delaywill be recovered at the option of Owner, eitherfrom the Supply Contract or from the ErectionContract or from both.

4.2.09.2 The liquidated damages for delay in supply ofspares beyond the dates stipulated under theContract, shall be as follows.

4.2.09.3 In case delivery of spares is delayed beyond the

39

Scheduled date of delivery of spares, the Contractorshall pay to the Owner as liquidated damages andnot as penalty a sum calculated at the rate of onehalf of one percent (1/2%) of the Value ofundelivered spares, per week or part thereof ofdelay, subject to a maximum of five percent (5%) ofthe total value of all the spares ordered.

4.2.09.4 These liquidated damages for delay in delivery ofspares as specified in this para is independent ofthe provisions of liquidated damages for delay formain equipment mentioned at para 4.1 above.

4.2.09.5 The total amount of liquidated damages for delayunder the Contract will be subject to a maximum offive percent (5%) of the Contract Price.

4.2.09.6 The liquidated damages amount if any, shall bededucted from the payments due under theContract or by invoking the Contract PerformanceBank Guarantee and/or otherwise.

4.2.10 PRICE ADJUSTMENT (Clause 22.0, Section INB &Clause 13.0, Section GCC)All the prices and price components under subjectpackage shall be on firm price basis and shall notbe subject to any price adjustment or priceescalations throughout the execution of thecontract.

4.2.11 TERMS OF PAYMENT (Clause 46.0, Section GCC)For the terms of payment, Clause 46.7 entitled"Payment" of the General Conditions of Contract(GCC) of Vol.I shall be read in conjunction with thisclause.

4.2.11.1 The percentage payments specified here underfor each key phase of the work are so prescribedthat money advanced to the Contractor automaticallygets adjusted progressively. All payments shall bebased on detailed price break-up as may be agreedto by the Owner.

4.2.11.2 Ex-works Price Component of Equipment: The Ex-works Price Component of all equipment shall be paid asfollows

Nature of Payment % of total % of total Conditions to be fulfilled

Ex-Works Ex-WorksPrice of Price of thethe package equipment on

pro-rata basis1. 2. 3. 4.

a) Initial 10% - Unconditional acceptance of letter of award,signing of con tract, submission of performanceguarantee and BG for equivalent value of advance.

b) Prorate payment despatch 70% On production of invoices and satisfactoryevidence of shipment, insurance and materialdispatch clearance certificate issued by owner,inspection certificates

c) Pro-rata payment 10% Completion of Erection Activities oflinked to erection Individual Sub-Station and Feeders and Sections

of lines(d) Payment on Commissioning 10% Commissioning of Individual Sub-

Station and Feeders or after TWO months fromthe date of readiness for Commissioning,

4.2.11.3 Erection Price ComponentNature of Payment Condition to be fulfilled

(a) Initial Advance 10% of total erection price component of the Package subject toSubmission of BG and mobilization of site

(b) Progressive Pro-rata 85% of erection price component of the payment on monthly Basisequipment on certification of equipment

(i) One by the Engineer for the quantum of work completed, and the(ii) Other by the Engineer's field quality surveillance representative

for the(iii) successful completion of quality check points involved in the

quantum of erection work billed.(c) On successful completion 05% of the total erection price component on certification by the

Engineer and on submission of of 10% performance guarantee

40

4.2.11.4 Civil Works Price Components (excluding Structural Steel)Civil Works Price Component shall be paid as follows :

Nature of Payment % of total lumpsum Conditions to be fulfilled cost of civil works

1. 2. 3.(a) Initial advance on establishment 10% As laid down in clause no. 46.7.1

of site office preparatory of civil work (ii) (b) & (c), Sec. GCC, Vol.I. of biddocuments

(b) Progressive payment will be 80% Issue of Certificatemade on certification by the Engineer (i) One of the Engineer for the quantum ofon the basis work performed for various work completed anditems covered under civil work (ii) Other by the Engineer's Field Quality

Survillance representative of the successful completion of quantum work billed.

(c) On successful completion of 10% On certification by the Engineercommissioning of 33 KV / 11 KVsub-station

Further break-up of the above percentages for making monthly payments shall be furnished by you and will be discussedand agreed to by the Owner in the Billing Break-up. The payment for civil works which are covered in Unit rates will bebased on unit rates.

4.2.11.5 Ex-works price of Spares (Mandatory/Recommended)

Nature Payment % of Ex-works Conditions to be fulfilled(a) Pro-rata payment against despatches 75% price of the Production of invoices giving evidence of

spares despatched shipment, insurance, Material DespatchClearance Certificate (MDCC) issued byOwner's Corporate QA & I representative

(b) Pro-rata payment against 25% price of the spares Physical verification and certification byspares received at site received at site the Engineer of Spares received and stored

at site.

4.2.11.6 Inland transportation and Insurance Charges shallbe paid at actuals in case of order on Ex-worksprice basis for supply of materials.

4.2.11.7 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to theEngineer for approval, a breakup of the ContractPrice. The Contract Price Breakup shall beinterlinked with the agreed detailed PERT networkof the Contract setting forth his starting andcompletion dates for the various key phases ofWork and prepared as per conditions stipulated inSection GCC, Conditions of Contract. Any paymentunder the contract, subsequent to Initial Adfance,shall be made only after the Contractor's pricebreakup is approved by the Engineer. Theaggregate sum of the contractor's price breakupshall be equal to the total contract price. A pricebreak-up overvaluing those items of supply whichwill be shipped first will not be accepted.

4.2.12 LATENT DEFECTS LIABILITY (Clause 38.0 GCC)At the end of Guarantee Period, Contractor's liability

ceases except for latent defects. The Contractor'sliability for Latent defect shall be limited to a periodof five (5) years from the end of Guarantee periodfor complete construction of 33 KV / 11 KV Sub-station Package, lines and HVDS packages as thecase may be. For the purpose of this clause, thelatent defects shall be the defects inherently lyingwithin the material or arising out of design deficiencywhich don't manifest themselves during GuaranteePeriod defined in Clause 38.0, Section GCC, butmay surface later.(a) Design work(b) Items to be manufactured at Contractor's works.(c) Brought out items required at Contractor's

works for further processing.(d) Brought out items to be despatched directly to

site.(e) Financial targets and shall cover the progress

during the month, cumulative progress asagainst monthly/cumulative targets, anticipatedcompletion dates.

v v v

41

BASIS FOR ESTIMATE

ONLY FOR SUPPLY OF ITEMS

Bidders can quote for the unit prices based on prevailing taxes & duties in force as on date. Owner agrees to provideConcessional 'C' Form, for the brought out materials / equipment from outside the State by the Bidder.

BOTH FOR SUPPLY & INSTALLATION

Bidders shall quote unit rate for quantities indicated in the Schedule, which are of indicative in nature and for referenceonly. Successful bidders will be paid at the unit rates quoted for the actual quantities of work being executed.

ADDITIONAL ITEMS

In case of the Bidder has to supply any item other than what is mentioned in BOQ, the same shall be supplied by thebidder on the basis of landed cost at site +15% to cover overhead and profit.

Regarding the installation rate, the same shall be extrapolated from the similar items available in the rate schedule.

• HVDS IN RESIDENTIAL AREA WITH HT ACSR CONDUCTOR• 33 KV BAY EXTENSION FOR 11 KV HVDS• HVDS FOR INDUSTRIAL AREA WITH ACSR CONDUCTOR• 33 KV LINE

42

Supply of Equipment & line material for 11 KV HVD System in Residential area with AB Cable Client : Area classification Residential Project: Distribution System 11KV AB Cable Contractor: Distribution Transformer 1 phase 10 & 16 KVA Quantity Per KM

Sl. No. Description LOI qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole 35 Nos. 2 9 mtr. PSCC Pole 3 Nos. 3 10KVA , Single phase ,11/Ö3 / 0.240 KV Transformer 5 Nos. 4 Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-

63A ,10KA SP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers)

5 Nos.

5 16KVA , Single phase ,11/Ö3 / 0.240 KV Transformer 26 Nos. 6 Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-

100A ,10KA SP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers)

26 Nos.

7 11 kV 400A, 3 ph AB switch with insulators 2 Set 8 11 KV D.O Fuse, 1 Phase 30 Nos. 9 11kV L.A., 1 phase 30 Nos. 10 Clamp & Connector for jumpering 387 Nos.

10(a) Service line including GI wire & insulator 3000 Mtr 11(a) Supply & fabrication of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V cross

arm, DP channel, DP channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc

1050 Kgs.

11(b) Nut- bolt & washer 200 Kgs. 12 Untreated earth pit electrode 40 mm dia, 3 mtr long pipe 93 Nos. 13 Complete Stay Set with hardware and insulator 61 Set Cables of following sizes with 3 core AL. Conductor (XLPE Insulated) and 1 Core

bare AL. messanger cum neutral

14 HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 250 mtr. 15 HT AB Cable 1CX95 +1Cx34 sqmm 850 mtr. Cable Termination kit (Out door type) for following sizes

16 HT AB Cable 95sqmm 70 Nos. Suspension Clamps for 11KV ABC For below mentioned sizes

17 HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 8 Nos. Dead end Clamps(Anchor) for 11KV ABC For below mentioned sizes

18 HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 70 Nos. 19 Lugs to connect insulated rabbit conductor to trf. 68 Set 20 70sqmm. Lugs for earthing 728 Nos. 21 Danger Board (Size as per IE Rules) 35 Nos. 22 Anti Climbing device clamp Type 35 Nos. 23 Eye Hook for suspension / Dead End clamp 78 Nos. 24 8 SWG Guard wire 450 Mtr 25 7/10 GI wire 2725 m 26 1" (25 mm)dia GI pipe 280 m

43

Installation of Equipment & line for 11 KV HVD System in Residential area with AB Cable

Client : Area classification: Residential Project: Distribution System 11KV HT AB Cable Contractor: Distribution Transformer 1 phase 10 & 16 KVA Quantity Per KM

S.No Description LOI qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole without RCC/PCC or Brick paddling etc 35 Nos. 2-a Dismanteling of existing 9 mtr. PSCC Pole without Transportation 5 Nos. 2-b 9 mtr. PSCC Pole without without RCC/PCC or Brick paddling etc 3 Nos. 3-a 10KVA , Single phase ,11/Ö3 / 0.240 KV Transformer 5 Nos. 3-b Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-63A ,10KA SP

MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers) 5 Nos.

4-a 16KVA , Single phase ,11/Ö3 / 0.240 KV Transformer 26 Nos. 4-b Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-100A ,10KA SP

MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers) 26 Nos.

5 11 kV 400A, 3 ph AB switch with insulators 2 Set 6 11 KV D.O Fuse, 1 Phase 30 Nos. 7 11kV L.A., 1 phase 30 Nos. 8 Clamp & Connectorsn for jumpering 40 per pole

8(b) Sevice line including GI wire & insulator 3000 Mtr 9 (a) Erection of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V cross arm, DP channel, DP

channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc

1050 Kgs.

9 (b) Nut- bolt & washer 200 Kgs. 10 Untreated earth pit without chamber & with boring of 6-8 m for installation of 40 mm dia pipe 93 Nos. 11 Complete Stay Set with hardware and insulator 61 Set 12 Cables of following sizes with 3 core AL. Conductor (XLPE Insulated) and 1 Core bare AL.

messanger cum neutral

12-a HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 250 mtr. 12-b HT AB Cable 1CX95 +1Cx34 sqmm 850 mtr. 13 Cable Termination kit (Out door type) for following sizes HT AB Cable 95sqmm 70 Nos.

14 Suspension Clamps for 11KV ABC For below mentioned sizes HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 8 Nos.

15 Dead end Clamps(Anchor) for 11KV ABC For below mentioned sizes HT AB Cable 3CX95 +1Cx95 sqmm 70 Nos.

16 Lugs to connect insulated rabbit conductor to trf. 68 Set 17 70sqmm. Lugs for earthing 728 Nos. 18 Danger Board(Size as per IE Rules) 35 Nos. 19 Anti Climbing device clamp Type (Aprox.5 Kg) 35 Nos. 20 Eye Hook for suspension / Dead End clamp 78 Nos. 21 8 SWZ Guard wire 450 Per lacing 22 Stringing 4/8 SWG GI wire mtrs. 23 Soil Excavation for Pole /stay 88 cu.m 24 Dismantalling of existing DC & SC, LT O/H l ine (1Phase) 4050 mtr 25 Concrete for pole/stay 1:3:6-For one pole 1 Cu.m 30 cu mtr 26 Breaking of Asphalt/concrete for pole/stay/earthpit 1 cu mtr 27 Transportation of dismantled 9 mtrs. Long pole from site to NDPL 's store 3 Nos. 28 Transportation of dismantled overhead conductor from site to NDPL 's store 4050 Kgs. 29 7/10 GI wire , including Lug fixing 2125 m 30 1" (25 mm)dia GI pipe 280 m 31 HT Alluminium bus-bar of size 50x10x500mm of E91 Grade & mounted on 11KV solid core

insulator(jay-shree make only) for holding T-OFF Connector/termination kitse 30 m

32 Painting with Zebra Paint (Aprox.1.0M Hight on pole) 35 Per Pole 33 Engineering Charges (Survey, detail engineering, preparation of drawing like layout, general

arrangement, typical arrangement for pole, stay, transformer, distribution board, earthing etc. and preparation of drawing for submission to electrical inspector)

Lot

44

Supply of Equipments and Line Materials for 11 kV HVDS System in Industrial Area with ACSR Conductor

Client : Area Classification Residential Project : Distribution system 11 kV ACSR Dog Contractor : Distribution system LT AB Cable Distribution Transformers Single Phase 10 KVA & 16 KVA Quantity Per KM

S.No. Description Qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole 54 Nos. 2 Pin Insulator with hardware, 11 kV 107 Nos. 3 Disc Insulator with hardware, 11 Kv, 45 KN 104 Nos. 4 10kVA, 1 phase, 11/1.732/0.250 kV, Transformer 28 Nos. MCCB Distribution with SP-63A MCCB & Busbar arrangements for 8

outgoings 28 Nos.

5 16kVA, 1 phase, 11/1.732/0.250 kV, Transformer 16 Nos. 6 MCCB Distribution with SP-100A MCCB & Busbar arrangements for 8

outgoings 16 Nos.

7 11kV DO Fuse 1 Phase 44 Sets 8 Conductor/ Neutral line for Phase & Neutral Jumpering 4200 Mtrs 9 Clamps and connectors for jumpering 160 Nos.

9(a) Service line including GI wire & insulator 4400 Mtr 10 Supply & fabrication of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V

cross arm, DP channel, DP channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc

5200 Kgs.

10(a) Nut- bolt & washer 800 Kgs. 11 Untreated earth pit with electrode 40mm dia 3 mtr long GI pipe 142 Nos. 12 70 somm Cu luq for earthinq 352 Nos. 13 Stay Set with complete hardware 104 Sets 14 7/10 GI wire for stay set 1560 Mtr. 15 11 kV 400A GOAB switch with insulator (3 phase) 1 Sets 16 3/4 " dia GI pipe 88 Mtrs 17 1 " dia GI pipe 88 Mtrs 18 LA, 11 KV, 1 phase 44 Nos. 19 Danger board 54 Nos. 20 Anti climbing device 54 Sets

45

Installation of Equipments and Line for 11 kV HVDS System in Residential Area with ACSR Conductor

Client : Area Classification Residential Project : Distribution system 11 kV ACSR Dog Contractor : Distribution sstem LT AB Cable Distribution Transformers Single Phase

10 KVA & 16 KVA Quantity Per KM Sr.No

. Description Qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole (Rajendra make) without PCC/ RCC or brick padinq etc. 54 Nos. 2 Pin Insulator with hardware, 11 kV 107 Nos. 3 Disc Insulator with hardware, 11 Kv, 45 KN 104 Nos. 4 10kVA, 1 phase, 11/1.732/0.250 kV, Transformer 28 Nos.

4(a) Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-63A ,10KA SP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers)

28 Nos.

5 16kVA, 1 phase, 11/1.732/0.250 kV, Transformer 16 Nos. 5(a) Outdoor Type MCCB cum distribution box to be mount on transformer body (I/C-100A

,10KA SP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable for taking 5 connections for consumers) 16 Nos.

6 11kV DO Fuse 1 Phase 44 Sets 7 Jumpering with DOG Conductor/ Neutral line conductor 4200 Mtrs 8 Clamps and connectors for'jumpering 160 Nos.

8(a) Service line including GI wire & insulator 4400 Mtr 9(a) Erection of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V cross arm, DP

channel, DP channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc

5200 Kgs.

9(b) Nut- bolt & washer 800 Kgs. 10 Untreated earth pit without chamber 40mm dia GI pipe 2.5 m long including boring 6/8

mtr 142 Nos.

11 70 somm Cu luq for earthinq 352 Nos. 12 Stay Set with complete hardware 104 Sets 13 7/10 GI wire for stav set 1560 Mtr. 14 7/10 GI wire including lug fixing, clamping, excavation etc. 1420 Mtr. 15 11 kV 400A GOAB switch with insulator (3 phase) 1 Sets 16 Dismantaling of 400 KVA, 3 phase 11/.415 KV transformer and crediting to NDPL

store Nos.

17 Transportation of 400 KVA transformer Nos. 18 Transportation of dismantaled 9 mtr long PeC poles from site to NDPL's store 46 Nos. 19 Transportation of dismantaled conductor 1400 Mtrs 20 Excavation in normal soil 112 Cum 21 Concreting 1:3:6 for pole/stay 29 Cum 22 Engineering charges (Survey, detail engineering, preparation of drawing like layout,

general arragement, typical arrangement for pole, stay, transformer, distribution board, earthing etc and preparation of drawings to be submitted to electrical inspector by NDPL)

Lot

23 Installation of 3/4 " dia GI pipe 88 Mtrs 24 Installation of 1 " dia GI pipe 88 Mtrs 25 Brick batting for pole foundation including consumable 54 Nos. 26 LA, 11 KV, 1 phase 44 Nos. 27 Zebra paintinq for poles (1 mtr lenqth) 54 Nos. 28 Numberinq marker 54 Nos. 29 8 SWG guard wire for grid with lacing 1896 R Mtr. 30 4 SWG quard wire for grid with lacing 1896 R Mtr. 31 Danger board 54 Nos. 32 Anti climbing device 54 Sets

46

SUPPLY OF 33/11kV SUB-STATION AND ASSOCIATED 33kV FEEDERS/LINES FOR HVDS

Client : Project : Contractor :

S.No. Description of Item Supply of material for 33/11kV Substation Unit Qty

1 3-Ph, 50Hz, 33/11 kV, ONAN, Cu Wound, Outdoor Conventional type Power Transformer along with Transformer Oil & all Accessories, required for installation, testing, commissioning etc of the 10MVA capacity

No. 1

2 36KV, 250A, 25KA, 3-Ph, Outdoor type, Vacuum Circuit breaker with spring type operating mechanism along with support structure, marshalling box, terminal connectors and required accessories complete for installation, testing & commissioning

Set 1

3 12KV, 630/600amp, 25KA, 3-Phahse indoor type, V.C.B. with spring type operating mechanism mounted on rack out type trolley along with 12KV CT (400-200/5), 25KA, 12KV/120Volts PT and breaker control panel consisting of voltmeter, ammeter, Trivector Energy

Set 1

4 33KV, 630A, 25KA, 3-Ph, 3 Pin type, Horizontal Mounting type, Gang Operated, AB Switch along with Support Insulators, Operating Mechanism, Base Channel down Pipe, Arcing Horns, terminal connectors and required accessories for complete installation, testin

Set 1

5 30kV, 10kA, 1-Ph, Gapless Lighting/Surge Arres tor complete with insulating base, terminal connectors etc. complete as per TS

No. 3

6 Current Transformer having 2 Secondaries along with Terminal Connectors, Marshalling Box etc. complete as per TS: 36kV, 1-Phase, 800/400/200/100/1A, 25kA CT

No. 3

7 3-Ph, 33kV/11kV Indoor type Control & Relay Panel consisting of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Trivector Energy Meter, O/C & E/F Relays, indication lamp, Breaker Control Switch, Annunciation Windows with Annunciation Relays, Push-Button for Alarm Accept/Reset/Lamp T

No. 1

8 1-Phase, 33kV/110 volt, Single core Potential transformer as per TS No. 3 9 11kV 3C X 300 Sq.mm, XLPE HT Cable mtr 150 Power Cable (Aluminium Conductor). 1.1kV grade

10 4X16 Sq.mm mtr 150 Control Cable (Copper Conductor). 1.1kV grade

11 2X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 300 12 5X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 200 13 12X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 500 14 Double compression type Cable Glands for 1.1kV Grade PVC insulated Steel

armoured Power & Control Cable. Lot 1

15 11kV grade, HT Cable Jointing Kit suitable for 3CX300mm2 XLPE Cable No. 4 16 Clamps & Connectors No. 40 17 T-Clamps, Through Clamp, Connectors, P.G. Clamps etc. suitable for connection

ACSR Panther Conductor, various 33kV Equipments such as Transformer, CT, PT etc. complete as per requirement.

Lot 24

18 ACSR Panther Conductor for Bus Bar & Jumpers/Droppers/Termination mtr 200 19 33kV Pin/Bus Post Insulator along with Clamps (2X3X4) Set 3 20 Steel structure for proposed 10MVA transformer and accessories installation MT 3

21 Earthing Complete for proposed 10MVA transformer and structure Lot 1

47

INSTALLATION OF 33/11kV SUB-STATION AND ASSOCIATED 33kV FEEDERS/LINES FOR HVDS

Client : Project : Contractor :

S.No. Description of Item Installation of material for 33/11kV Substation Unit Qty

1 3-Ph, 50Hz, 33/11 kV, ONAN, Cu Wound, Outdoor Conventional type Power Transformer along with Transformer Oil & all Accessories, required for installation, testing, commissioning etc of the 10MVA capacity No. 1

2 36KV, 250A, 25KA, 3-Ph, Outdoor type, Vacuum Circuit breaker with spring type operating mechanism along with support structure, marshalling box, terminal connectors and required accessories complete for installation, testing & commissioning Set 1

3 12KV, 630/600amp, 25KA, 3-Phahse indoor type, V.C.B. with spring type operating mechanism mounted on rack out type trolley along with 12KV CT (400-200/5), 25KA, 12KV/120Volts PT and breaker control panel consisting of voltmeter, ammeter, Trivector Energy meter, O/C & E/F relays, indication lamps etc and terminal connectors Set 1

4 33KV, 630A, 25KA, 3-Ph, 3 Pin type, Horizontal Mounting type, Gang Operated, AB Switch along with Support Insulators, Operating Mechanism, Base Channel down Pipe, Arcing Horns, terminal connectors and required accessories for complete installation, testing & commissioning as per TS Set 1

5 30kV, 10kA, 1-Ph, Gapless Lighting/Surge Arrestor complete with insulating base, terminal connectors etc. complete as per TS No. 3

6 Current Transformer having 2 Secondaries along with Terminal Connectors, Marshalling Box etc. complete as per TS: 36kV, 1-Phase, 800/400/200/100/1A, 25kA CT No. 3

7 3-Ph, 33kV/11kV Indoor type Control & Relay Panel consisting of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Trivector Energy Meter, O/C & E/F Relays, indication lamp, Breaker Control Switch, Annunciation Windows with Annunciation Relays, Push-Button for Alarm Accept/Reset/Lamp Test, Mimic Diagram etc. & other components as per Techincal Specifications 33kV C&R Panel No. 1

8 1-Phase, 33kV/110 volt, Single core Potential transformer as per TS No. 3 9 11kV 3C X 300 Sq.mm, XLPE HT Cable mtr 150

Power Cable (Aluminium Conductor). 1.1kV grade 10 4X16 Sq.mm mtr 70

Control Cable (Copper Conductor). 1.1kV grade 11 2X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 300 12 5X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 200 13 12X2.5 Sq.mm mtr 500 14 Double compression type Cable Glands for 1.1kV Grade PVC insulated Steel armoured

Power & Control Cable. Lot 1 15 11kV grade, HT Cable Jointing Kit suitable for 3CX300mm2 XLPE Cable No. 4 16 Clamps & Connectors No. 40 17 T-Clamps, Through Clamp, Connectors, P.G. Clamps etc. suitable for connection ACSR

Panther Conductor, various 33kV Equipments such as Transformer, CT, PT etc. complete as per requirement. Lot 24

18 ACSR Panther Conductor for Bus Bar & Jumpers/Droppers/Termination mtr 200 19 33kV Pin/Bus Post Insulator along with Clamps (2X3X4) Set 3 20 Steel structure for proposed 10MVA transformer and accessories installation MT 3 21 Earthing Complete for proposed 10MVA transformer and structure Lot 1 22 Engineering Charges @ 10% of erection

48

Supply of Equipments and Line Materials for 11 kV HVDS System in Industrial Area with ACSR Conductor

Client Area Classification Industrial Project Distribution system 11 kV ACSR Dog Contractor Distribution system LT AB Cable Distribution Tra nsformers Three Phase 100 KVA & 25 KVA Quantity Per KM

S.No. Description Qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole without RCC/PCC or Brick padding etc 113 Nos.

2 Outdoor type MCCB cum distribution box 20KA TP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable fortaking 12 connections for consumers

1 Nos.

3 11 kV 400A, 3 ph AB switch with insulators 55 set 4 11kV D.O, Fuse 40A, 3 phase 55 set 5 11 kV LA 1 phase 164 Nos. 6 Phase/ neutral line/ jumpering with DOG Conduct 2333 Mtrs 7 Clamps & Connectors for jumpering 167 Nos. 8 Die cast PG Clamp for jumpering 1333 Nos. 9 11kV Pin insulator with hardware 394 Nos. 10 11kV Disc insulator with hardware (45 KN) 21 Nos.

11(a)

Supply & fabrication of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V cross arm, DP channel, DP channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc

28000 Kgs

11(b) Nut- bolt & washer 8000 12 Untreated earth pit without chamber & with boring of 6-8 m for installation of 40 mm dia oioe 273 Nos. 13 Complete Stav Set with hardware and insulator 215 Set

14 Cables of following sizes with 3 core AL Conductor (XLPE Insulated) and 1 Core bare AL messanger cum Aeutral

14-a L T AB Cable 3CX35 +1 Cx35 sqmm 333 Mtrs. 14-b L T AB Cable 3CX50 +1 Cx50 sqmm 667 Mtrs. 14-c L T AB Cable 3CX70 +1 Cx70 sqmm 533 Mtrs. 14-d L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 533 Mtrs. 14-e L T AB Cable 3CX120 +1 Cx120 sqmm 533 Mtl'$. 14-f L T AB Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm 333 Mtrs. 15 Cable Termination arrangement with lugs and sealing of ends

15-a L T AB Cable 3CX35 +1 Cx35 sqmm 7 Nos. 15-b L T AB Cable 3CX50 +1 Cx50 sqmm 13 Nos. 15-c LT AB Cable 3CX70 +1Cx70 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-d L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-e LT AB Cable 3CX120 +1Cx120 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-f L TAB Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm 11 Nos. 16 Suspension Clamps for LT ABC For below mentioned sizes

16-a L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 69 Nos. 16-b LT AB Cable 3CX150 + 1Cx150 sqmm and above 24 Nos. 17 Dead end (Anchor) Clamps for L T ABC For below mentioned sizes

17-a L T AS Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 69 Nos. 17-b L T AS Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm and above 24 Nos. 18 Lugs for earthing 1640 Nos. 19 Danaer Board with clamo(Size as per IE Rules) 113 Nos. 20 Anti Climbina device clamp Type 113 Nos. 21 Eye Hook for suspension / Dead End clamp (For Dog Conductor) 133 Nos. 22 Supply of Fencing for Transformer 3m(l)x 2.5m(w)x 2.5m(h) with 4 mm wire mesh (Pole at every

1 m' distance) 53 Set

23 8 SWG Guard wire with lacing 2589 Mtr. 24 4/8 SWG GI Wire stringing mtr. 25 GI strip 25x6 mm for earthing of equipments 67 mtr. 26 GI strip 50x6 mm for earthing of equipments 67 mtr. 27 200A MCCB With outdoor enclosure 53 Nos. 28 100 KVA 11/0.440 KV Transformer 53 Nos. 29 7/10 GI wire, including Lug fixing 7620 m 30 1" (25 mm)dia GI pipe 820 m 31 1CX300mm2 XLPE Cable for 63/l00KVA transformer LT end to MCCB 800 mtr.

49

Installation of Equipments and Line for 11 kV HVDS System in Industrial Area with ACSR Conductor

Client Area Classification Industrial Project Distribution system 11 kV ACSR Dog Contractor Distribution system LT AB Cable Distribution Transformers Three Phase 100 KVA &

25 KVA Quantity Per KM

Sr.No. Description Qty Unit

1 11 Mtr. PSCC Pole without RCC/PCC or Brick padding etc 113 Nos. 2 Dismanteling of existing 9 Mtr. PSCC Pole without Installation 88 Nos. 3-a 25 KVA, 3 Phase 11/0.440 KV Transformer 1 Nos. 3-b Outdoor type MCCB cum distribution box 20KA TP MCCB and bus outgoing suitable

fortaking 12 connections for consumers 1 Nos. 4 11 kV 400A, 3 ph AB switch with insulators 55 set 5 11kV D.O, Fuse 40A, 3 phase 55 set 6 11 kV LA 1 phase 164 Nos. 7 Phase/ neutral line/ jumpering with DOG Conduct 2333 Mtrs 8 Clamps & Connectors for iumperina 167 Nos. 9 11kV Pin insulator with hardware 394 Nos. 10 11kV Disc insulator with hardware 21 Nos. 11(a) Supply & fabrication of MS pole top bracket, V cross arm, back clamp for V cross

arm, DP channel, DP channel clamp, stay clamps angle, stay clamps side, DP cross bracing clamps for 11 KV line, U clamp, LT conductor dead end , stay clamp and angle stay clamp forsupporting DO fuse & LA, channel/ support, transformer belting and belting support, clamp for AB switch base channel 2 pairs, agle for LT distribution transformer etc 28000 kg

11(b) Nut- bolt & washer 8000 kg 12 Untreated earth pit without chamber & with boring of 6 -8 m for installation of 40 mm

dia pipe 273 Nos. 13 Complete Stav Set with hardware and insulator 215 Set 14 Cables of following sizes with 3 core AL Conductor (XLPE Insulated) and 1 Core bare

AL messanger cum Aeutral 14-a L T AB Cable 3CX35 +1 Cx35 sqmm 333 Mtrs. 14-b L T AB Cable 3CX50 +1 Cx50 sqmm 667 Mtrs. 14-c L T AB Cable 3CX70 +1 Cx70 sqmm 533 Mtrs. 14-d L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 533 Mtrs. 14-e L T AB Cable 3CX120 +1 Cx120 sqmm 533 Mtl'$. 14-f L T AB Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm 333 Mtrs. 15 Cable Termination arrangement with lugs and sealing of ends 15-a L T AB Cable 3CX35 +1 Cx35 sqmm 7 Nos. 15-b L T AB Cable 3CX50 +1 Cx50 sqmm 13 Nos. 15-c LT AB Cable 3CX70 +1Cx70 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-d L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-e LT AB Cable 3CX120 +1Cx120 sqmm 11 Nos. 15-f L TAB Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm 11 Nos. 16 Suspension Clamps for LT ABC For below mentioned sizes 16-a L T AB Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 69 Nos. 16-b LT AB Cable 3CX150 + 1Cx150 sqmm and above 24 Nos. 17 Dead end (Anchor) Clamps for L T ABC For below mentioned sizes 17-a L T AS Cable 3CX95 +1 Cx95 sqmm 69 Nos. 17-b L T AS Cable 3CX150 +1 Cx150 sqmm and above 24 Nos. 18 Lugs for earthing 1640 Nos. 19 Danaer Board with clamo(Size as per IE Rules) 113 Nos. 20 Anti Climbina device clamp Type (Aprox.5 Kg) 113 Nos. 21 Eye Hook for suspension / Dead End clamp (For Dog Conductor) 133 Nos. 22 Supply of Fencing for Transformer 3m(l)x 2.5m(w)x 2.5m(h) with 4 mm wire mesh

(Pole at every 1 m' distance) 53 Set 23 8 SWG Guard wire with lacing 1592 per lacing

50

Sr.No. Description Qty Unit

24 4/8 SWG GI Wire stringing mtr. 25 GI strip 25x6 mm for earthing of equipments 67 mtr. 26 GI strip 50x6 mm for earthing of equipments 67 mtr. 27 200A MCCB With outdoor enclosure 53 Nos. 28 Soil Excavation for Pole /stay 280 cu.m 29 100 KVA 11/0.440 KV Transformer Installation 53 Nos. 30 Dismentaling of existing PVC Cable including making of coil and rebound on drum for

followina size: 0 30-a up to 70 sqmm 4389 mtr. 30-b 95-150 sqmm 675 mtr. 30-c 150 sqmm and above 1688 mtr. 31 Dismantaling of existing DC & SCt LT O/H Line (1 Phase) 13693 mtr. 32 Concrete for pole/stav 1:3:6 113 cu mtr 33 Breaking of Asphalt/concrete for pole/stay/earthpit 1 cu mtr 34 Transportation of dismantled 9mtrs. Long pole from site to NDPL's store 88 Nos. 35 Transportation of 100KVA 11/O.415 KV ONAN transformer from NDPL's store to site 53 Nos. 36 Transportation of dismantled overhead conductor from site to store 13693 kg 37 Transportation of dismantled PVC insulated cable from site to store 6752 kg 38 Testing & Commissioning excluding oil testing & filteration of 400KVA, 11 /0.415KV

Transformer 53 Nos. 39 7/10 GI wire, including Lug fixing 5467 m 40 1" (25 mm)dia GI pipe 820 m 41 Painting with Zebra Paint (Aprox.1.0M Hight on pole) 113 Per Pole 42 1CX300mm2 XLPE Cable for 63/l00KVA transformer LT end to MCCB 800 mtr. 43 Engineering Charges (Survey, detail engineering, preparation of drawing like layout,

general arrangement, typical arrangement for pole, stay, transformer, distribution board, earthing etc. and preparation of drawing for submission to electrical inspector). Lot

51

33 KV Line - Supply BOQ for 1 Km Length Sr No Description of item Unit Quantity Remarks

1 11 Mtr long PSCC pole Nos 25 2 36 KV, 630 A,25 KA 3 phase AB switch Nos 2 For sectionisation as per

requirement. 3 30 KV, 10KA, 1phase LA Nos 6 Protection against

lightning as per requirement.

4 33 KV disc insulator along with hardware & all complete accessories

Nos 30

5 33 KV pin insulator along with pin Nos 60 6 ASCR Panther/ Wolf/ Dog Conductor for phase &

jumpering Mtrs 3200

7 Supply & fabrication of MS poles top bracket, V cross arm, clamp for V cross arm, clamp for stay, clamp for AB switch etc

MT 0.90

8 Nut, bolt & washers MT 0.25 9 Stay set with stay wire & stay insulator Sets 20 2 sets at each turning /

end point. 10 4 SWG GI wire for guard wire grid Mtrs 3000 11 Clamps & Connector for jumpering Per

pole 25

12 40 mm dia, 3 Mtrs long GI pipe electrode Nos 12 13 7/10 GI Wire rope for earthing Mtrs 180 14 1" Dia GI pipe for wire rope Mtrs 24 15 Zebra painting (1 Mtr length) Nos 25 16 Soil Excavation for pole /stay set Cum 45 17 Danger board 33 KV Nos 25 18 Anticlimbing device Nos 25

52

33 KV Line - Installation BOQ for 1 Km Length3

Sr No Description of item Unit Quantity Remarks

1 Insatallation of 11 Mtr long PSCC pole Nos 25 2 Insatallation of 36 KV, 630 A,25 KA 3 phase AB switch Nos 2 For sectionisation

as per requirement.

3 Insatallation of 30 KV, 10KA, 1phase LA Nos 6 Protection against lightning as per requirement.

4 Insatallation of 33 KV disc insulator along with hardware & all complete accessories

Nos 30

5 Insatallation of 33 KV pin insulator along with pin Nos 60 6 Installation of ASCR Panther/ Wolf/ Dog Conductor for

phase & jumpering Mtrs 3200

7 Erection of MS poles top bracket, V cross arm, clamp for V cross arm, clamp for stay, clamp for AB switch etc

MT 0.90

8 Nut, bolt & washers MT 0.25 9 Stay set with stay wire & stay insulator Sets 20 2 sets at each

turning /end point. 10 4 SWG GI wire for guard wire grid Mtrs 3000 11 Clamps & Connector for jumpering Per

pole 25

12 Untreated earth pit without chamber & with boring of 6-8 deep for installation of 40 mm dia 3 Mtrs long GI pipe electrode

Nos 12

13 7/10 GI Wire rope for earthing Mtrs 180 14 1" Dia GI pipe for wire rope Mtrs 24 15 Zebra painting (1 Mtr length) Nos 25 16 Soil Excavation for pole /stay set Cum 45 17 Danger board 33 KV Nos 25 18 Anticlimbing device Nos 25

53

6.01.1 GENERAL INFORMATIONThis specification covers Construction of 11kV HT line, LTlines having bare/ aerial bunched cables, supply andinstallation of Distribution Transformers of various ratingsand providing and restoring the consumer serviceconnections in the HVDS area.The scope of works also covers the survey of the proposedroute, tree clearance wherever necessary, transport ofmaterial to the locations, erection of overhead line anddistribution transformers as per specification or otherrelevant applicable standards. The contractor should bewell acquainted with I.E. Act 1910, I.E. Rule 1956 and Indiantelegraph act 1889 as amended from time to time so thatnecessary statutory provisions therein may be followed.

6.01.2 DETAILED SCOPEThe work involves:

(A) FOR CONVERSION OF EXISTING SYSTEM INTO HVDSa. Survey and study of the existing system: - Based on

the details of the areas of HVDS implementation, allsuccessful Bidders will have to send there Survey/Design officials to study the prevailing distributionsystem including connected consumer loads,electrical energy being fed from the feeding substationsand the specification of the materials used. The scopeof works also covers the survey of the proposed routeincluding pole spotting, tree clearance wherevernecessary, The approval of the owner shall be obtainedbefore commencement of the work.

b. Erection of 11 kV HT line using All Aluminium AlloyConductor (AAAC) / HT Arial Bunched Cables( forcongested and theft prone areas) on PSC pole.

c. Erection and commissioning of Single Phase or ThreePhase, 11kV/415 volts Distribution Transformers ofdifferent transformation capacities as indicated in theBid Price schedule. Supply of all equipments includingstructure, LT distribution box, fuses and switchgears.To carry out all related activities like earthing etc. tomake the DSS ready in all respects.

(B) FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 11 KV LINES (IF DE-SIRED BY THE OWNER)Survey of the route and pole spotting, testingmanufacturing and supply of various line materials viz AAAConductor, Insulator alongwith hardware fittings, PSCpoles etc. Erection of poles including casting offoundations as per the owner approved drawings and poletop hardware and stringing of the conductors there off.Commissioning of the lines..

6.01.3 SCOPERoute surveya. Right of Way - The successful Bidder will submit a layout

drawing of the proposed HVDS System and owner willarrange for the Right of Way Permissions from thevarious authorities for carrying out the HVDS Work.

b. Optimisation of Pole Location - Route survey includingpole spotting shall have to be carried out by theContractor. The Contractor should note that Purchaserwill not furnish the topographical maps prepared bySurvey of India but will make available any assistancethat may be required in obtaining the topographicalmaps.

Pole Spotting - While locating the poles on the line,the following shall be borne in mind:

(a) SpanThe span should be as near as possible to thebasic design span indicated in the schedule.

(b) Road CrossingAt all important road crossings, the poles shall befitted with strain type insulators but the groundclearance at the roads under maximumtemperature and in still air shall be such that evenwith conductor broken in adjacent span, groundclearance of the conductor from the road surfaceswill not be less than 5.8 meters

(c) Railway CrossingsAt the time of route survey, the railway crossingsshall be finalized as per the regulation laid downby the Railway Authorities. The following are theimportant features of the prevailing regulations(revised in 1987):(i) The crossing shall normally be at right angle to

the railway track.(ii) No crossing shall be located over a booster

transformer, traction switching station, tractionsub-station or a track cabin location in anelectrified area.The approval for crossing railway track shall beobtained by the Purchaser from the RailwayAuthority.

(d) Power Line CrossingsWhere this line is to cross over another line of thesame voltage or lower voltage, provisions to preventthe possibility of its coming into contact with otheroverhead lines shall be made in accordance withthe Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 as amended fromtime to time. All the works related to the aboveproposal shall be deemed to be included in thescope of the Contractor except if modifications arerequired to line below, in which case, the conditionsto be agreed upon.

(e) Telecommunication Line CrossingsThe angle of crossing shall be as near to 90 degreeas possible. However, deviation to the extent of 30degree may be permitted under exceptionallydifficult situations.When the angle of crossing has to be below 60degree, the matter will be referred to the authorityin-charge of the telecommunication system. On arequest from the Contractor, the permission of the

6.01 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FORCONSTRUCTION OF HVDS AND 11 KV LINE

54

telecommunication authority may be obtained bythe Purchaser. Also, in the crossing span, powerline support will be as near the telecommunicationline as possible, to obtain increased verticalclearance between the wires.

(f) Details EnrouteAll topographical details, permanent features, suchas trees, building etc. 5.5 meter on either side ofthe alignment shall be detailed on the route plan.

c. Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc. -Clearance from ground, bui ldings, trees andtelephone lines shall be provided in conformity withthe Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 as amended uptodate. The vendor shall select the height of the polessuch that all electrical clearances are maintained. RCCpoles shall be used for all road & drain crossings, ifrequired.

d. The minimum panting depth of poles shall begoverned by IS 1678. However, if due to the groundconditions, e.g. water logged area etc. depth of plantingof poles shall be suitably increased the vendor willsupply the poles of suitable height in order to maintainthe required clearances, the vendor will submit thedetails of the same on case to case basis.

e. Guarding mesh shall be used in all road/drain crossingand at all points as per statutory requirements. Thevendor shall provide & install anti climbing devicesand danger plates

f. The various items of work are described very briefly inthe Bid Form, Price Schedule. The various items of theSchedule shall be read in conjunction with thecorresponding sections in the Technical Specificationsincluding amendments and, additions, if any. TheBidder's rates shall be based on the description ofactivities in the Bid Form, Price and other Schedule aswell as necessary operations detailed in theseTechnical Specifications.

g. The unit rates quoted shall include minor details whichare obviously and fairly intended, and which may nothave been included in these documents but areessential for the satisfactory completion of the variousworks.

h. The unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of deploymentof all plant equipment, men, material, skilled &unskil led labour etc. essential for satisfactorycompletion of various works.

i. All measurements for payment shall be in S.I. units.Lengths shall be measured in meters corrected totwo decimal places. Areas shall be computed insquare meters & volume in cubic meters, rounded offto two decimals.

j. This Specification also includes the supply of hardwarefittings for insulators and all type of accessories forconductor as detailed in the Specification. Bidders shallsupply materials from the approved vendors only.

6.01.4 DETAILS OF LINE ROUTESFor this purpose, Bidders are requested to contact theowner's Representative at the address mentionedbelow:

6.01.5 FINAL SCHEDULEThe final schedule indicating location of poles, angleof deviation, road crossing and other details shall besubmitted for the approval of the Purchaser. Afterapproval, the Contractor shall submit six more sets ofthe approved reports along with one set of reproducibleof final profile drawings to the Purchaser for recordpurpose.

6.01.6 STATUTORY REGULATIONS AND STAN-DARDS

Statutory RegulationsThe Contractor is required to follow local statutoryregulations stipulated in Electricity (Supply) Act 1948,Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended and otherlocal rules and regulations referred in thisspecifications.

6.01.7 REFERENCE STANDARDSThe codes and/or standards referred to in thespecifications shall govern, in all cases wherever suchreferences are made. In case of a conflict betweensuch codes and/or standards and the specifications,latter shall govern. Such codes and/or standards,referred to shall mean the latest revisions,amendments/changes adopted and published by therelevant agencies unless otherwise indicated. Otherinternationally accepted standards, which ensureequal or better performance than those specified shallalso be accepted, subject to prior approval by thePurchaser.

6.01.8 TECHNICAL PARAMETERSElectrical System Data 11kV System(a) Nominal voltage (kV) 11(b) Maximum system voltage (kV) 12(c) BIL (Impulse) (kVPeak) 75(d) Power frequency withstand 28voltage (wet) (kVrms)

6.01.9 DETAILS OF LINE MATERIALSa. Particulars of Conductor

Type: AAAC Equivalent to ACSR Dog & Rabbit / HTABC cable.Standard specifications are enclosed

b. Particulars of InsulatorsType - Disc & Pin.

Standard specifications are enclosedc. Particular of HT Arial Bunched Cable

As per the Technical Specification enclosedd. Hardware And Clamps

HardwareAll hardware shall be drop forged from high carbon steeland all ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conformingto IS: 2633. Locking and split pins shall be of hard drawn

55

brass/phosphor bronze. Tension hardware should be ofbolted type with minimum 3 bolts.i. The clamps shall be corrosion resistant, light in weight

and cozy to handle. Suspension shall have case ofoscillation around a horizontal axis and small momentof inertia enabling it to follow freely the movement ofconductor. The mounting straps should be overall190mm length and made of mild steel. The spacingbetween the straps should be 100mm using G.I boltsand nut of 145 mm length having 16 threads of 16 mmdiameter along with a provision of suitable split pin forlocking arrangement. The split pin preferably of brassand length of 25mm.

ii. Bimetallic connectors used for copper to ACSRconductor connections shall be aluminium alloyclamps with necessary cast in copper liners. Tconnectors used between bus bars shall be ofaluminium alloy. The connectors should suit therespective equipment in respect of bolting/fixingarrangement. The requirements / details / drawing /sample should be approved by Employer / Owner.

iii. The suitable size of aluminium connectors/Bi-metallicconnectors shall be used for making connection tothe equipment terminals. These shall be fire wedgetype. The surface of the clamp shall be smooth with alledges rounded off.

iv. The Tee & P.G. connectors shall be cartridge fired 'C'wedge type conforming confirming to ANSI-C119.4 (AA):extra heavy duty class tested. The connectors shallhave maximum contact surface with the conductor,extremely low and stable contact resistance andminimum power loss. These shall maintain constantforce within the connection for the life of the connector/clamp while compensating for thermal expansion orgrip and increased life span.

v. The wedge type connector shall consist of C-memberand wedge. The wedge shall be inserted at a speed of40 m./sec approximately so as to be effective inabrading all sliding surface and disrupting surfaceoxide film to generate large number of contact spot inthe electrical interfaces. The mechanical stressesduring the wedge insertion shall cause plasticdeformation of the C-Clamp and shall increase thegeometrical conformation of the clamp to the conductor.An Oxidation inhibitor shall be applied to the surfacethereby elimination of oxidation of metallic surface. Thejumper T-clamp is required for connection of drop downtype single conductor jumpers to bus bars andequipment. The normal current carrying capacity ofclamp shall not be less than that specified in thespecification. These connectors shall be used insteadof the conventional PG and Tee clamp and shall beinstalled by powder-actuated tool using cartridges withvalid explosive license issued by Govt of India/StateGovt.

vi. Clamps shall be corona free and shall carry anoverload of at least 20% over the rated current of 250A.

c. Accessories for ConductorMid span compression joint

Repair sleevesd. POLES

Type -PSC polesStandard specifications are enclosedErection of PolesBidders has to refer drawings enclosed(Drawing No.GAD-0014)• The pole pit for the supports shall be excavated in the

direction of the line, as this will facilitate the easyerection of supports, in addition to giving greater lateralstability. The pits are to be excavated to a size of 1.2meter x 0.65 meter with its longer axis in the directionof line. The planting depth of pole over the baseconcrete should be as mentioned below:

S. Length of Planting Depth ExceptionNo. pole (Mts) in ground (Mts)

1 9 1.5 In wet soil and black2 11 1.6 cotton soil depth may

be increased by 0.2 mto 0.3 m and windspan limited

• Excavation rate for pole, stay and DP pits shall be quotedby the contractor for following type of soil includingdewatering of pits and shoring and shuttering wherenecessary. No quotation for dewatering duringexcavation and shoring and shuttering will beentertained:i. All soil other than hard rockii. Hard rock

• For soils other than hard rock excavation rate to bequoted shall include back filling the pits with excavatedsoils after concerning wherever necessary. For soilcovered by hard rock variety, the excavation rate shallinclude back filling with excavated rock bits andborrowed earth dully rammed after laying the designedrock foundation. The quoted rate shall cover allcontingencies during process of excavation. For anyreason; what so ever no extra claim will be accepted.

• The pole is to be erected in alignment with utmostcare and the excavated earth should be back filledproperly by ramming and concreting in the ratio 1:2:4.

FabricationAll MS pole top Structure shall be fabricated as per relevantIndian Standards.

6.01.10 POLE ACCESSORIESa. D.P. Structure Materials

All the horizontal members of the D.P. structure materialshould be mounted with suitable clamps and nut boltsand with the required clearance as per I.E. Rule 1956.

b. D.P. structure material dimension should be as perenclosed drawing.

c. The X-arms & the above steel materials shall be hotdipped galvanized generally conforming to IS - 2633/72. The clamps shall be designed to fit for the aboverail & RCC poles. The holes for the G.I. Pin shall bespaced as per the relevant I.S. specifications for 33kVcircuits.

56

6.01.11 CROSS ARMa. Type - "V" Shape cross arm, "U" shape cross arm, GI

cross armStandard specifications is enclosed

6.01.12 STAY SETSComprises of G.I. stay rod, G.I stay plate, the stay wire ofsize 7/10swg along with the break insulator of 16KV to beused along with the stay clamps and turn buckle. Detailshould be as per enclosed drawing.

6.01.13 STAY WIREStandard specifications is enclosed

6.01.14 PACKINGThe wires shall be supplied in 30-40 kg per coil. Thepacking should be done in accordance with the provisionof IS 6594 / 1977 or the latest version thereof. The wiresshall be supplied in coils (and not on reels). Each coilshall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shallbe protected by suitable wrapping.

6.01.15 TESTINGAll the tests specified in the above IS are required to beconducted as detailed therein.

6.01.16 TURN BUCKLE WITH EYE BOLTSTurn buckle with eye bolts for 11kV line conforming to thefollowing:i. One no of turn buckle made out of 22mm dia GI rod

and 75x75x6mm M.S. angle.ii. One eyebolt made out of 22mm dia GI rod with 40mm

inner dia eye to one end threaded up to 300mm lengthfrom the other side.

iii. Two nos. GI nuts suitable for the threaded portion ofeye bolt material specification IS-226/77 (tested quality)

iv. The breaking load and proof load shall be as per BS16/64 with amendment No.1.

v. GI wire with tensile strength 32Kg/mm to 55Kg/mmsoft quality 4.00mm dia 8SWG wire should conform toISS-280/1972 and galvanized to heavy type as per ISS-4826/1968 with up to date amendments.

6.01.17 ERECTION OF STAY SETSIncludes excavation of pit size 0.75 x 0.5 x 1.6 mtr. In allkinds of soil laterite/hard rock and providing of stay set byusing 7/10 Swg G.I stay wire, break insulator, Turn buckle,I hook and fixing the same to pole with set of stay clampswith G.I. bolts/nuts and embedding stay plate and rod byexcavated soil with ramming and concreting in the ratio1:2:4. The stay rod with plate shall be hot dippedgalvanized. The entire stay rod leaving the top 10cm withplate should be embedded in the pit with an angle between30 to 45 degrees of stay wire with the pole. The stay pitshould be filled with PCC of ratio 1:2:4. The G.I. stay wireof size 7/10SWG should be used with a break insulator ata height of 5mtr above ground level with G.I. turnbuckle. Allthe Nut bolts shall be hot dipped galvanized and ofappropriate size with full thread.

6.01.18 EARTHING OF LINEEarthing is to be done using 50mm dia CLASS "C'perforated G.I. pipe of length 1.5 mtrs and 8 SWG G.I. asper relevant IS.

6.01.19 DANGER BOARDSThe danger boards shall be as per the relevant IS for33kV/ 11kV voltage and duly enamelled and fixed withproper clamping arrangement:i. The letters, figures and the conventional skull and

bones of danger boards shall conform to IS:2551 andshall be in a signal red on the front of the board.

ii. The corners of the danger board shall be rounded offto remove sharp edges.

6.01.20 CEMENT CONCRETING -Cement Concreting is to be in the ratio of 1:2:4 to be usedon the poles and muffing to be properly curved.

6.01.21 ANTI-CLIMBING DEVICESTo be provided with G.I. Barbed wire, shall be providedand installed by the Contractor for all poles. The barbedwire shall conform to IS-278 (Grade A1). The barbed wiresshall be given chromating dip as per procedure laid downin IS:1340.

6.01.22 PAINTING MATERIALSAll the metal parts except G.I. parts are to be painted withone coat of red oxide and one coat of aluminium paint tothe satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

6.01.23 HT/LT/ ROAD CROSSING GAURDINGSThe Gaurdings shall consists of GI guard cross arm oflength 2.5 mtrs made out of 75 x 40 x 6 mm channel &shall be hot dipped galvanized generally conforming toIS-2633/72. The clamps shall also be hot dippedgalvanized generally conforming to IS-2633/72 & suitablefor 90ib/yd rail pole & for 9 & 11 metrs long RCC Poles.Gaurdings shall be erected with ground & line clearancesas per the I.E. rules. The guarding has been providedwith GI wire 8 Swg, binding wire & suitable I bolt & nutbolts for cross arm to cross arm. The spacing betweeneach guard loop between two poles shall be at a maximumdistance of 1.5 mtrs apart & conforming to the relevantspecifications as per the I.E. rules.

6.01.24 STRINGING OF CONDUCTORIncludes spreading of conductors or HT AB Cables withoutany damage and stringing with proper tension withoutany kinks/damage including binding of conductor at pinpoints, jumpering at cut points etc. The ground & lineclearances at road crossings along roads, L.T. crossings& other crossings shall be as per the relevant I.E. rules.

6.01.25 INSPECTION AND TESTSa. General

All standard tests, including quality control tests, in

57

accordance with appropriate Indian/internationalstandard, shall be carried out unless otherwisespecified.

b. InspectionIn addition to the provision of Conditions of Contract,the following shall also apply:i. The Contractor shall keep the Purchaser informed

in advance about the time of starting and of theprogress of manufacture and fabrication of variousMS Components at various stages, so thatarrangements could be made for inspection.

ii. The acceptance of any part of items shall in no wayrelieve the Contractor of any part of his responsibilityfor meeting all the requirements of theSpecification.

iii. The Purchaser or his representative shall have freeaccess at all reasonable times to those parts ofthe Contractor's works which are concerned withthe fabrication of the Purchaser's material forsatisfying himself that the fabrication is being donein accordance with the provisions of thespecifications.

iv. Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall bemade at the place of manufacture prior to despatchand shall be conducted so as not to interfereunnecessarily with the operation of the work.

v. Should any component of the set be found not tocomply with the approved design, it shall be liableto rejection. No component once rejected shall beresubmitted for inspection, except in cases wherethe Purchaser or his authorised representativeconsiders that the defects can be rectified.

vi. Defect, which may appear during fabrication shallbe made good with the consent of, and accordingto the procedure proposed by the Contractor andapproved by the Purchaser.

vii. All guages and templates necessary to satisfy thePurchaser shall be supplied by the Contractor.

viii.The specified grade and quality of material shallbe used by the Contractor. To ascertain the qualityof material used, the inspector may at his discretionget the material tested at an approved laboratory.

6.01.26 PACKINGa. Bolts, nuts, washers and other attachments shall be

packed in double gunny bags accurately tagged inaccordance with the contents.

b. The packing shall be properly done to avoid losses/damages during transit. Each bundle or package shallbe appropriately marked.

6.01.27 STANDARDSa. The manufacturing, fabrication, galvanizing, testing,

erection procedure and materials used for manufactureand erection of poles shall conform to the followingIndian Standards (IS)/International Standards whichshall mean latest revisions, with amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specificallystated otherwise in the specification. In the event ofsupply of material conforming to Standards other than

specified, the Bidder shall confirm in his bid that theseStandards are equivalent to those specified. In case ofaward, salient features of comparison between theStandards proposed by the Bidder and those specifiedin this document will be provided by the Contractor toestablish their equivalence.

b. The material and services covered under thesespecifications shall be performed as per requirementsof the relevant standard code referred hereinafteragainst each set of equipment and services. OtherInternationally acceptable standards, which ensureequal or higher performance than those specified shallalso be accepted.

Sl. Indian Title InternationallyNo. Standards (IS) recognised

Standards/Guides

1. IS:209-1992 Specification for Zinc ISO/R/752ASTM B6

2 IS 278-1991 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire ASTM A1213. IS:2016-1992 Plain Washers ISO/R887

ANSI B18-22.14. IS:2551 -1990 Danger Notice Plates5. IS:2629-1990 Recommended Practice for Hot ASTM A123

Dip Galvanising of Iron and Steel CSA G1646. IS:2633-1992 Method of Testing Uniformity of ASTM A123

Coating of Zinc Coated Articles CSA G1647. IS:3043-1991 Code of Practice for Earthing8. IS :5613-1993 Code of Practice for Design. ASCE 52

(Part-II) Installation and Maintenanceof Overhead Power LinesSection 1-DesignSection 2-Installation & maintenance

9. Indian Electricity Rules.10. IS:800 Specification for Steel Fabrication11. Publication Regulation for Electrical Crossing

No.19 (N)/700 of Railway Tracks

6.01.28 POLE ERECTION, STRINGING ANDINSTALLATION OF LINE MATERIALS

a. General(i) The scope of erection work shall include the cost of all

labour, tools, plants and all other incidental expensesin connection with erection and stringing work.

(ii) The Contractor shall be responsible for transportationto site of all the materials to be provided by theContractor as well as proper storage and preservationof the same at his own cost, till such time the erectedline is taken over by the Purchaser Similarly, theContractor shall be responsible for transportation,proper storage, safe custody, and loss or damage ofall Purchaser's supplied items for incorporation in thelines and shall maintain and render proper account ofall such materials at all times. The Contractor shallreimburse the cost of any of the materials lost ordamaged during storage and erection.

(iii) Contractor shall set up required number of storesalong the line and the exact location of such storesshall be discussed and agreed upon with thePurchaser. Purchaser supplied items shall bedispatched to the railway stations situated nearest tothe stores set up by the Contractor. From these railway

58

stations, receipt, unloading, loading and transportationto the stores shall be the entire responsibility of theContractor.

b. AssemblyThe Contractor shall give complete details of theerection procedures he proposes to follow.

c. Insulator fixingPin insulators shall be used on all poles and straininsulator on angle and dead end poles. Damagedinsulators and fittings, if any, shall not be used. Prior tofixing, all insulators shall be cleaned in a manner thatwill not spoil, injure or scratch the surface of theinsulator, but in no case shall any oil be used for thatpurpose.

d. Handling of Conductor and EarthwireRunning Out of the Conductors: The contractor shallbe entirely responsible for any damage to the pole orconductors during stringing. Care shall be taken thatthe conductors do not touch and rub against the groundor objects, which could scratch or damage the strands.The sequence of running out shall be from the top todown i.e. the top conductor shall be run out first,followed in succession by the side conductors.Unbalanced loads on poles shall be avoided as far aspossible.When lines being erected run parallel to existingenergized power lines, the Contractor shall takeadequate safety precautions to protect personnel fromthe potentially dangerous condition.

e. Monitoring of conductors during stringingThe conductor shall be continuously observed for looseor broken strands or any other damage during therunning out operations.

Repair to conductors, if necessary, shall be carriedout with repair sleeves.Repairing of the conductor surface shall be carriedout only in case of minor damage, scuff marks, etc.The final conductor surface shall be clean, smoothand free from projections, sharp points, cuts,abrasions, etc.The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for anydamage to the poles during stringing.

f. Crossings

Derricks or other equivalent methods ensuring thatnormal services need not be interrupted nor damagecaused to property shall be used during stringingoperations where roads, channels,telecommunication lines, power lines and railway lineshave to be crossed. However. shut down shall beobtained when working at crossings of overhead powerlines. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible forthe proper handling of the conductor, earthwire andaccessories in the field.

g. ReplacementIf any replacements are to be effected after stringingand tensioning or during maintenance e.g.replacement of cross arms, the conductor shall besuitably tied to the pole at tension points or transferredto suitable roller pulleys at suspension points.

h. Permitted Extra Consumption of 'Purchaser Supplied

Materials'The Contractor shall be supplied with conductor as perthe following norms:

Quantity of Conductor = line length as per detailed surveyx 3 phases

The Contractor shall make every effort to minimizebreakage, loss and wastage of the line materials duringerection. However, the Contractor shall be permitted anextra consumption of Purchaser supplied materials up tothe limits specified in Table 10.1 and shall be permitted todispose of the scrap, if any, at their end.

Table: Permitted extra consumption of Purchasersupplied materialsItem % of permitted extra consumptionConductor 2Insulators 2In case of conductor, the permitted extra consumption limitof one percent is inclusive of sag, jumpering, damage,loss and wastage etc.The Contractor shall not be required to return to thePurchaser empty conductor drums and shall dispose ofthe same at his cost.A conductor drum, which has been opened by theContractor shall not be taken back by Purchaser and theunused conductor in such drums may be treated as wastepermissible within the overall limits specified.The Contractor shall return to the Purchaser all Purchasersupplied material not incorporated in the works, exceptthose permitted by Purchaser as wastage, Otherwise, theContractor shall pay in respect of such excess materials,which he is unable to return, at rates corresponding to theactual cost of procurement plus 5% thereof.i. Permitted Extra Consumption of 'Contractor Supplied

Materials'The quantities of earthwire, hardware fittings, conductor &earthwire accessories indicated in BOQ are tentative andactual quantity will depend upon final survey (check survey).Payment for contractor supplied line materials shall bemade for the quantities incorporated in the works pluspermitted extra quantities as mentioned below, howeverthe quantity of earthwire incorporated in the works arecalculated as under:

Quantity of earthwire = Line length as per detailed survey

Contractor shall make every effort to minimize thebreakage, losses and wastage of the line material duringerection. However the Contractor shall be permitted theextra consumption upto the limit as specified in the tablebelow and shall be permitted to dispose of the scrap, ifany, at their end.Item % of permitted extra consumptionEarthwire 2Hardware fittings 2Conductor / Earthwire Accessories 2Note: In case of earthwire the permitted extra consumptionlimit of 2% is inclusive of sag, jumpering, damages, losses& wastage.The Contractor shall not be required to return to the

59

Purchaser empty earthwire drums and shall dispose ofthe same at his cost.i. Final Checking, Testing and CommissioningAfter completion of the works, final checking of the lineshall be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that allfoundation works, pole erection and stringing have beendone strictly according to the specifications and asapproved by the Purchaser. All the works shall bethoroughly inspected in order to ensure that:

(i). Sufficient backfilled earth covers each foundationpit and is adequately compacted.

(ii).All poles are used strictly according to finalapproved drawing and are free of any defect ordamage whatsoever.

(iii).The stringing of the conductors has been done asper the desired clearances.

(iv). All conductor accessories are properly installed.(v).All other requirements for completion of works such

as fixing of danger plate and anti-climbing devicehave been fulfilled.

(vi).The insulation of the line as a whole is tested bythe Contractor through provision of his ownequipment, labour, etc., to the satisfaction of thePurchaser.

(vii).All poles are properly grounded.(viii).The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning

purpose.

6.01.29 DRAWINGSThe following is the general list of the documents anddrawings that are to be approved by the Purchaser:i. Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.ii. Detailed survey report showing ground clearance and

pole locations.iii. Pole accessories drawings like design plate, name

plate etc as per standard drawing.iv. Quality Planv. Approved vendor list.

6.01.30 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERAs a part of this scheme, there is a provision to installdistribution transformers on 11 kV line. The contractor shallsupply, install, test and commission 3-phase 11kV/415volts and 1-phase 11/1.732kV/240 volts DistributionTransformers of 16kVA, 25kVA, 40kVA, 63kVA & 100 kVAcapacity ratings.The detail of the work related to Distribution Transformeris given below:

(i) Erection of Transformer3- phase transformers shall be erected on a Double Polestructure with 2 no. 11 mts. long PSC pole with requiredworking load. The gap between the two poles shall be 6feet. The transformer shall be mounted on MS channels(as per drawing enclosed), which will be installed betweenthe two poles. The details of the installation of thetransformer are shown in the drawing enclosed. Thecontractor shall also supply & install the anti-climbingdevice & the danger plates as per the relevant IS andshown in the drawing referred above. The danger plates,

details are also shown in drawing.1- phase transformer shall be erected on single polestructure with 11 mtr long PSC pole or 9 mtr long PSCpole with working load of 400 Kg as per drawing enclosed.

(ii) Erection of PoleThe contractor shall cast PCC padding, not less than 75mm thick, in the excavated pits so as to increase thecontact surface between pole & the soil. The poles shallthen be lifted to the pit with the help of wooden supports.The pole shall then be kept in the vertical position with thehelp of 25 mm (min.) manila ropes, which will act as thetemporary anchor. The verticality of the pole shall bechecked by sprit level in both longitudinal & transversedirections. Once this is done, the concreting shall be donein the pit.The temporary anchor shall be removed only when polesset properly in the foundation.(iii) Erection of D.P. StructureOnce the poles are erected, the horizontal /cross bracingshall be fitted. Between the two poles, Four stays/strutsalong the line tow in each directions. Two stays/struts shallalso be installed in the perpendicular directions.M 400 concrete mixture shall be use in all concreting.(iv) Erection of LA, G.O.A.B. Switch, D.O. FuseThe erection of LA, G.O.A.B. switch, D.O. fuse is also incontractor scope. The equipment & accessories shall bechecked for proper alignment and tightness after installation.G.O.A.B. switch shall be operated to check proper make &break operation. Insulators of LA & G.O. A.B switch shall bechecked physically before and after installation.(v) EarthingPipe earthing shall use used to earth the distributiontransformers. The location of the earth pits andconnections to various earth pits shall be as per drawing.(a) Earthing of 1-Phase TransformerEarthing of 1-phase transformer shall be done with threeelectrodes (as per enclosed drawing of earth electrode).One electrode shall be used for LA/ surge arrestorseparately. Second electrode shall be used for earthing ofHT neutral bushing. Third electrode shall be used for LTneutral earthing. LT & HT neutral point shall be connectedwith jumpering to take additional caution. Structuralearthing shall be done by putting jumpers from LT neutralpoint. In case of 11KV, 4 wire system HT neutral point of1-phase transformer shall be connected with neutral localgrid wire (in case of 4 wire bare conductor system) andwith messenger cum neutral (in case of HT AB cable).

(b) Earthing of 3- phase transformerEarthing of 3-phase transformer shall be done with fiveelectrodes (as per enclosed drawing of earth electrode).One electrode shall be used for LA/ surge arrestorseparately. Two electrodes shall be used for neutralbushing of transformer. Two electrodes shall be used forbody of transformer and structural earthing.(vi) Electrical ConnectionsThe HT side connections shall be made with ACSRconductor of suitable rating. LT side connections shall bemade with LT XLPE cables. The contractor shall proposethe size of LT cables for each rating of distributiontransformers in his bid. Cable glands of IS marks shall beused for all the cable entries in distribution box. Jumperingshall be done as per REC practices.

60

6.02 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FORPRESTRESSED CEMENT CONCRETE POLES(9.0 & 11.0 METERS) FOR 11KV & LT OVERHEAD POWER LINES

The contractor shall properly dress all the LT cablesemanating from distribution box. The contractor shallprovided all jointing material i.e. sleeves etc. and carry outall jointing works. In case any cable needs to be burieddue to site conditions, the contractor shall use PVC conduitpipes for the same.(vii) Distribution BoxLT distribution box shall be of 1.8 gauge MS sheet, housingMCCBs of suitable rating. The contractor shall give thecomplete drawing of the distribution box showing the all-internal arrangement. All cable shall have bottom entry.Suitable no. of holes with IS approved gaskets will beprovided in the distribution box . Rubber gasket shall beused in the door to avoid ingress of moisture and otherelements in the distribution box. The door shall have glasswindow. The wire mesh shall be fixed on the door so as toprotect the glass. The door shall have locking arrangementand shall be hinged to the body of the distribution box. Thedistribution box shall be painted as per relevant ISstandards.The distribution box shall be suitable earthed. Earthingarrangement as per relevant IS standards shall beprovided.(viii) Protection & Isolation(a) HT side:The contractor shall supply & install Metal Oxide LA toprotect the transformer from any electrical surge andlightening strokes. DO fuse shall be used to protecttransformer on HT side in case of over current & earthfaults. The contractor shall specify the rating of the fuseelement in the bid for each rating of transformer. Gangoperated AB switch shall be used to isolate the transformerfrom 11 KV circuit in case of faults.(b) LT side:

The Electric power from the transformer is drawn throughthe incomer MCCBs of suitable rating to protect thetransformer from the faults occurring at the consumer'spremises.6.01.31 Service connectionsThe ultimate of the proposed scheme is to provideelectrical power to domestic & industrial consumers inareas under consideration. The contractor will provide theservice connections to various consumers. The serviceconnections shall be given using aerial bunched XLPEcables. The service connection shall be complete withStatic energy meters in consumer's premises. To provideall material & installation thereof in order to complete thework of service connection in all respect shall be in thescope of the contractor.As far as possible the service connection shall be givenfrom the pole of the HT line, which is nearest to theconsumer's premise.(a) Service Cable: The service connections shall be

provided by using aerial bunched XLPE cables. Thecables to be used for service connection shall travel inair from the distribution box to the premise of theconsumers.

The size & type of the cable to be used for serviceconnections to various consumers shall be as perREC specification (26/1983).

(b) Extra Supports: The service cable (LT aerial bunchedcable) shall be firmly anchored in the consumerpremise. The contractor shall supply & fix the same. Incase, extra supporting pole(s) is required to maintainthe required ground clearance at road crossing etc.the contractor shall provide & install the supportingpoles with cost implication to the owner.

6.02.1 PSC POLESPSC poles shall be of solid rectangular type with an overalllength of 9.0 M & 11.0 M Poles suitable for use in 11 KVoverhead power lines.Applicable StandardsExcept when they conflict with specific requirements inthis Specification, the PSC poles shall comply with therelevant provisions made in the following Indian Standardsor the latest versions thereof.a) IS: 1678, Specification for pre-stressed concrete poles

for overhead power, traction and telecommunication lines.b) IS: 2905, Method of test for concrete poles for overhead

power and telecommunication lines.

c) IS: 7321, Code of Practice for selection, handling anderection of concrete poles for overhead power andtelecommunication lines.

6.02.2 TERMINOLOGYFor the purpose of this specification, followingdefinitions shall apply:

(i) Average Permanent LoadThat fraction of the working load, which may beconsidered of long duration over a period ofone year.

(ii) Load FactorThe ratio of ultimate transverse load to thetransverse load at first crack.

(iii) TransverseThe direction of the line bisecting the anglecontained by the conductor at the pole. In thecase of a straight run, this will be normal to therun of the line.

v v v

61

(iv) Transverse Load at First CrackFor design, the transverse load at first crackshall be taken as not less than the value of theworking load.

(v) Working Load

The maximum load in the transverse direction,that is ever likely to occur, including the windpressure on the pole. This load is assumed toact at a point 600mm below the top with the buttend of the pole planted to the required depth asintended in the design.

(vi) Ultimate FailureThe condition existing when the pole ceases tosustain a load increment owing to eithercrushing of concrete, or snapping of the pre-stressing tendon or permanent stretching ofthe steel in any part of the pole.

(vii) Ultimate Transverse LoadThe load at which failure occurs, when it isapplied at a point 600 mm below the top andperpendicular to the axis of the pole along thetransverse direction with the butt end of the poleplanted to the required depth as intended inthe design.

6.02.3 APPLICATION(i) 9.0 M and 11.0 M Poles

These poles shall be used at tangent locationsfor 11KV in different wind pressure zones inaccordance with REC Construction Standardsreferred to in the following table:

Pole Line description Reference tolength REC Constn.

Standards9.0M 11KV lines without earthwire L.T. A-4, B-5

lines, horizontal formation11.0M 11KV lines with earthwire L.T. A-5, B-6

lines, vertical formation

The adoptable spans shall be as per RECConstruction Standards A-8 (for 11 KV Lines).These poles shall be used for double polestructures of distribution transformer centersas per REC Construction Standards F-1 to F-4and for special locations in 11 KV and L.T. Lines,such as road crossings etc.In case, rail poles/RCC poles are considerednecessary for road crossing or for any otherpurpose, the same shall be in the scope ofbidder and he shall quote for the same asspecified in Bid Price Schedule (BPS).

(ii) These poles shall be used at tangent locationsof 11/0.4 KV lines using conductor formationand clearances as per REC ConstructionStandard M-3. These poles shall be designedfor the working load of 200 Kg. (suitable for windpressure of 100 Kg/mt.2). The maximumpermissible spans shal l be as per RECConstruction Standard M-2.

(iii) These poles shall be used for double polestructures of distribution transformer centres

as per REC Construction Standards F-1 to F-4and for special locations in LT lines, such asroad crossings etc.

6.02.4 MATERIAL(i) Cement

The cement used in the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall be ordinary orrapid hardening Portland cement conformingto IS: 269 - 1976 (Specification for ordinary andlow heat Portland cement) or IS : 8041 E-1978(Specification for rapid hardening Portlandcement).

(ii) AggregatesAggregates used for the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall confirm to IS :383 (Specif ication for coarse and fineaggregates from natural sources for concrete).The nominal maximum size of aggregates shallin no case exceed 12 mm.

(iii) WaterWater should be free from chlorides, sulphates,other salts and organic matter. Potable waterwill be generally suitable.

(iv) AdmixtureAdmixture should not contain Calcium Chlorideor other chlorides and salts which are likely topromote corrosion of pre-stressing steel. Theadmixture shall conform to IS 9103.

(v) Pre-Stressing SteelThe pre-stressing steel wires including thoseused as untensioned wires (See Annex. I II andIII), should conform to IS: 1785 (Part-I)(Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wirefor pre-stressed concrete, Part-I cold drawnstress relieved wire), IS: 1785 (Part-II)(Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire)or IS:6003 (Specification for indented wire forpre-stressed concrete). The type designs givenin the annexure are for plain wires of 4 mmdiameter with a guaranteed ultimate strengthof 175 kg/mm2 and for plain wires of 5 mmdiameter with a guaranteed ultimate strengthof 160 kg/mm2. All pre-stressing steel shall befree from splits, harmful scratches, surfaceflaws, rough, aged and imperfect edges andother defects likely to impair its use in pre-stressed concrete.Reinforcement for RCC polesAll reinforcing bars shall conform to IS 432 (PartI) or IS 432 (Part-II) or IS 1786 as the case maybe. All reinforcement shall be free from loosescale, rust and coats of paint, oil, grease, clayor other material that may have deterioratingeffect on the bond between the reinforcementand the concrete.

(vi) Concrete MixThe concrete mix shall be designed to therequirements laid down for controlled concrete(also called design mix concrete) in IS : 1343

62

- 1980 (Code of practice for pre-stressedconcrete) and IS : 456 - 1978 (Code of practicefor plain and reinforced concrete), subject tothe following special conditions:a) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days

should be at least 420 Kg/cm2.b) The concrete strength at transfer should

be at least 210 Kg/cm2.c) The mix should contain at least 380 Kg. of

cement per cubic meter of concrete.d) The mix should contain as low a water

content as is consistent with adequateworkability. If it becomes necessary to addwater to increase the workability, the cementcontent also should be raised in such away that the original value of water cementratio is maintained.

6.02.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSThe poles shall be designed for the fol lowingrequirements:a) The poles shall be planted directly in the ground with a

planting depth as per IS : 1678. Wherever, plantingdepth is required to be increased beyond the specifiedlimits or alternative arrangements are required to bemade, on account of ground conditions e.g. waterlogging etc., the same shall be in the scope of thebidder at no extra cost to owner. The bidder shall furnishnecessary design calculations/details of alternativearrangements in this regard.

b) The working load on the poles should correspond tothose that are likely to come on the pole during theirservice life. Designs given in the annexure are for 200kg applied at 0.6M from top.

c) The factor of safety for all poles above 9.0 Mts. shallnot be less than 2.0. For 7.5 M and 8.0 M poles, thefactor of safety shall not be less than 2.5.

d) The average permanent load shall be 40% of theworking load.

e) The F.O.S. against first load shall be 1.0.

f) At average permanent load, permissible tensile stressin concrete shall be 30 kg/cm2.

g) At the design value of first crack load, the modulus ofrupture shall not exceed 53.0 kg/cm2 for M-40.

h) The ultimate moment capacity in the longitudinaldirection should be at least one fourth of that in thetransverse direction.

i) The maximum compressive stress in concrete at thetime of transfer of pre-stress should not exceed 0.8times the cube strength.

j) The concrete strength at transfer shall not be less thanhalf, the 28 days strength ensured in the design, i.e.400 x 0.5 = 200kg/cm2.

For model check calculations on the design of poles,referred to in the annexure, a reference may be made tothe REC "Manual on Manufacturing of solid PCC poles,Part-I - Design Aspects"1 Dimensions and Reinforcements

The cross-sectional dimensions and the

details of pre-stressing wires should conformto the particulars given in the annexure.The provisions of holes for fixing cross-armsand other fixtures should conform to the RECstandards referred to in clause 1.4 of thisspecification.

2 Manufacture2.1 All pre-stressing wires and reinforcements

shall be accurately fixed as shown in drawingsand maintained in position during manufacture.The untensioned reinforcement, as indicatedin the drawings, should be held in position bythe use of stirrups which should go round allthe wires.

2.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched withuniform prestress in each wire. Each wire or agroup of wires shall be anchored positivelyduring casing. Care should be taken to seethat the anchorages do not yield before theconcrete attains the necessary strength.

3 CoverThe cover of concrete measured from theoutside of pre-stressing tendon shall benormally 20 mm.

4 Welding and Lapping of SteelThe high tensile steel wire shall be continuousover the entire length of the tendon. Weldingshall not be allowed in any case. However,jointing or coupling may be permitted providedthe strength of the joint or coupling is not lessthan the strength of each individual wire.

5 CompactingConcrete shall be compacted by spinning,vibrating, shocking or other suitable mechanicalmeans. Hand compaction shal l not bepermitted.

6 CuringThe concrete shall be covered with a layer ofsacking, canvass, hessian or similar absorbentmaterial and kept constantly we up to the timewhen the strength of concrete is at least equalto the minimum strength of concrete at transferof prestress. Thereafter, the pole may beremoved from the mould and watered atintervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit,the interval should depend on the atmospherichumidity and temperature.The prestressing wires shall be detensionedonly after the concrete has attained the specifiedstrength at transfer (i.e. 200 or 210 kg/cm2, asapplicable). The cubes cast for the purpose ofdetermining the strength at transfer should becured, as far as possible, under conditionssimilar to those under which the poles arecured. The transfer stage shall be determinedbased on the daily tests carried out on concretecubes till the specified strength indicated aboveis reached. Thereafter the test on concrete shallbe carried out as detailed in IS : 1343 (Code ofpractice for prestressed concrete). Themanufacturer shall supply, when required by

63

the owner or his representative, result ofcompressive test conducted in accordance withIS : 456 (Code of practice for plain and reinforcedconcrete) on concrete cubes made from theconcrete used for the poles. If the owner sodesired, the manufacturer shall supply cubesfor test purposes and such cubes shall betested in accordance with IS : 456 (Code ofpractice for plain and reinforced concrete).The detensioning shall be done by slowlyreleasing the wires, without imparting shock orsudden load to the poles. The rate ofdetensioning may be controlled by any suitablemeans either mechanical (screw type) orhydraulic.The poles shall not be detensioned or releasedby cutting the prestressing wires using flamesor bar croppers while the wires are still undertension.

7 Lifting Eye-Hooks or HolesSeparate eye-hooks or holes shall be providedfor handling the transport, one each at adistance of 0.15 times the overall length, fromeither end of the pole. Eye-hooks, if provided,should be properly anchored and should be onthe face that has the shorter dimension of thecross-section. Holes, if provided for liftingpurposes, should be perpendicular to thebroad face of the pole.

8 Holes for Cross Arms etcSufficient number of holes shall be provided inthe poles for attachment of cross arms andother equipments.

9 Stacking & TransportationStacking should be done in such a manner thatthe broad side of the pole is vertical. Each tierin the stack should be supported on timbersleeper located as 0.15 times the overalllength, measured from the end. The timbersupported in the stack should be aligned in avertical line.Poles should be transported with their broadfaces placed vertically and in such a mannerthat shocks are avoided. Supports should beso arranged that they are located approximatelyat a distance equal to 0.15 times the overalllength from the ends. The erection of the poleshould be carried out in such a way that theerection loads are applied so as to causemoment with respect to the major axis, i.e. therope used for hoisting the pole should beparallel to the broader face of the pole.

6.02.6 EARTHING1 Earthing shall be provided by having length of 8

SWG GI wire embedded in concrete duringmanufacture and the ends of the wires leftprojecting from the pole to a length of 100mmat 250 mm from top and 150 mm below groundlevel.

2 Earth wire shall not be allowed to come in

contract with the prestressing wires.2.1 Tests

2.1.1 Transverse Strength Test2.1.1.1 Poles made from ordinary Portland cement

shall be tested only on the completion of 28days and poles made from rapid hardeningcement only on the completion of 14 days, afterthe day of manufacture.

2.1.1.2 The poles may be tested in either horizontal orvertical position. If tested in horizontal position,provisions shall be made to compensate forthe overhanging weight of the pole, for thispurpose, the overhanging portion of the polemay be supported on a movable trolley orsimilar device.

2.1.1.3 The pole shall be rigidly supported at the buttend for a distance equal to the agreed depth ofplanting

2.1.1.4 Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm fromthe top of the pole and shall be steadily andgradually increased to the design value of thetransverse load at first crack. The deflection atthis load shall be measured.A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemednot to have passed the test if cracks wider than0.1 mm appear at a stage prior to the applicationof the design transverse load at first crack andthe observed ultimate transverse load is lessthan the design ultimate transverse load.The load shall then be reduced to zero andincreased gradually to a load equal to the firstcrack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimatetransverse load, and held up for 2 minutes. Thisprocedure shall be repeated until the loadreaches the value of 80 per cent of the minimumultimate transverse load and thereafterincreased by 5 per cent of the minimum ultimatetransverse load until failure occurs. Each timethe load is applied, it shall be held for 2minutes. The load applied to prestressedconcrete pole at the point of failure shall bemeasured to the nearest five Kilograms.The pole shall be deemed not to have passedthe test if the observed ultimate transverse loadis less than the design ultimate transverse load.

2.1.1.5 Measurement of CoverAfter completion of the transverse strength test,the sample pole shall be taken and checkedfor cover. The cover of the pole shall bemeasured at 3 points, one within 1.8 meter fromthe butt end of the pole, the second within 0.6meters from the top and the third at anintermediate point and the mean valuecompared with the specified value.The mean value of the measured cover shouldnot differ by more than (+) 1 mm from thespecified cover. The individual values shouldnot differ by more than (+) 3 mm from thespecified value.If these requirements are not met, theworkmanship with reference to aligning of the

64

end plates and prestressing wires andassembly of moulds should be improved andinspection at pre-production stage tightenedsuitably.

3.0 SAMPLING AND INSPECTION3.1 Scale of Sampling3.1.1 Lot: In any batch, all poles of the same class

and same dimensions shall be groupedtogether to constitute a lot.

3.1.1.1 Sub-lot: If the number of poles in a lot exceed500, the lot shall be divided into a suitablenumber of sub lots such that the number ofpoles in any sub-lot shall not exceed 500. Theacceptance or otherwise of a sub-lot shall bedetermined on the basis of the performance ofsamples selected from it.

3.1.2 The number of poles to be selected from a lotor a sub-lot shall depend upon its size and shallbe in accordance with Col.1 and 2 of thefollowing table:

SAMPLE SIZE AND CRITERION FOR CONFORMITY(Clauses 3.1.1, 3.1.1 & 3.1.2)Size of lot Dimensional Requirement No. of polesor sub-lot Sample No. Permissible for transverse

Size of defective strength testsamples

Upto 100 10 1 *101 to 200 15 1 3

201 to 300 20 2 4301 to 500 30 3 5

*The number of poles to be tested shall be subject to theagreement between the owner and supplier.

These poles shall be selected at random. In order toensure randomness, all the poles in the lot or the sub-lotmay be arranged in a serial order and starting from anyrandom pole, every rth pole may be included in the sample,r being the integral part of N/n where N is the size of the lotor the sub-lot and n is the sample size.

4.1 NUMBER OF TESTS4.1.1 All the poles as selected in 3.1.2 shall be tested

for overall length, cross-section anduprightness. The tolerance shall be (+) 15 mmon overall length (+), 3 mm on cross sectionaldimensions and 0.5 per cent on uprightness.

4.1.2 The number of poles to be tested for transversestrength test shall be accordance with Col. 4 ofthe above table. These poles may be selectedfrom those already tested in 4.1.1.

4.2 Criteria for Conformity

4.2.1 A lot or sub-lot shall be considered asconforming to this specification if the conditionsunder 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 are satisfied.

4.2.2 The number of poles which does not satisfythe requirements of overall length, cross-section and uprightness shall not exceed thecorresponding number given in Col.3 of Tablein 3.1.2. If the number of such poles exceedsthe corresponding number, all poles in the lotor sub-lot shall be tested for theserequirements and those not satisfying therequirements shall be rejected.

4.2.3 All the poles tested for transverse strength testshall satisfy the requirements of the test. If oneor more poles fail, twice the number of polesoriginally tested shall be selected from thosealready selected and subjected to the test. Ifthere is no failure among these poles, the lot orthe sub-lot shall be considered to have satisfiedthe requirements of this test.

5.0 MARKING The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with

the following particulars either during or aftermanufacture but before testing at a position so asto be easily read after erection in position.

a) Month and year of manufactureb) Transverse strength of pole in Kg.c) Maker's serial No. and mark.

6.0 DRAWINGS6.1 The drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be

approved/commented by the Owner as the casemay be within thirty (30) days of receipt of drawingsin Owner's design office. If the designs/drawingsare commented by the Owner, the Contractor shallsubmit revised design/drawings duly incorporatingall comments within fifteen (15) days of date ofissue of comments.

6.2 Pole accessories drawings like name plate, dangerplate, anti-climbing device etc. shall be preparedby the Contractor and submitted to the Owner inthree copies alongwith one re-producable, forrecord. These drawings shall be prepared in A4size only.

6.3 While submitting the drawings, the Contractor shallclearly indicate on each drawing Specification No.,Name of the line, letter reference no. and date onwhich the submission are made. The samepractice is also to be followed while submittingdistribution copies.

6.4 The Contractor shall furnish the drawings in fifteen(15) copies to the Owner for necessary distributionwithin fifteen (15) days after the receipt of theapproval from the Owner.

v v v

65

6.03.1 11kV OVERHEAD LINES(i) V' shape M.S. cross arm with clamps

(ii) X-arms shall be made as per GAD - 001.(iii) The cross arm shall be hot dipped galvanized

generally conforming to IS - 2633/72.(iv) The X-arm should not be welded/ jointed at any

place except as specified.(v) The clamps for the X-arm shall be of G.I. & shall be

hot dipped galvanized generally conforming to IS -2633/72.

(vi) The clamps shall be designed to fit for the specifiedPSC poles.

6.03 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CROSS-ARMS

6.03.2 G.I. X-Arm for 90 degrees cut points(i) It shall comprise of 75 x 40 x 6 mm 3.2 mtr. Long

ISMC channels to be provided on poles for 90degrees cut points.

(ii) The X-arm shall be hot dipped galvanized generallyconforming to IS - 2633/72.

(iii) The clamps shall be designed to fit for the specifiedPSC poles.

(iv) The holes for the G.I. pin shall be spaced as perthe relevant I.S. specifications for 11kV and LTcircuits.

v v v

6.04 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STAY SET

6.04.1 SCOPE:This specification provides for manufacturing, testing,dispatch, supply and delivery of Stay Set for 11kV. The stayset will consist of the following items:a. Stay wireb. Stay Insulatorc. Turn Buckled. Clampse. Anchor rod & platef. Stay pit anchor assemblyThe total stay wire arrangement is shown in drawingsenclosed.

6.04.2 GI STAY WIREThe specification for the GI stay wire shall be as follows.(i) APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Except when they conflict with the specificrequirements of this specification, the G.I. StayStranded Wires shall comply with the specificrequirements of IS: 2141-1979. IS: 4826-1979 &IS: 6594-1974 or the latest versions thereof.

(ii) APPLICATION AND SIZESa) The G.I. stranded wires covered in this

Specification are intended for use on theoverhead power l ine poles, distr ibutiontransformer structures etc.

b) The G.I. stranded wires shall be of 7/12SWG(7/2.5 mm) (11kV lines) and 7/14 SWG (7/2 mm)(LT lines) standard sizes.

(iii) MATERIALThe wires shall be drawn from steel made by theopen hearth basic oxygen or electric furnaceprocess and of such quality that when drawn to thesize of wire specified and coated with zinc, thefinished strand and the individual wires shall be of

uniform quality and have the properties andcharacteristics as specified in this specification.The wires shal l not contain sulphur andphosphorus exceeding 0.060% each.

(iv) TENSILE GRADEThe wires shall be of tensile grade 4, havingminimum tensi le strength of 700 N/mm2conforming to IS:2141.

(v) GENERAL REQUIREMENTSa. The outer wire of strands shall have a right-hand lay.

b. The lay length of wire strands shall be 12 to 18times the strand diameter.

(vi) MINIMUM BREAKING LOADThe minimum-breaking load of the wires before and afterstranding shall be as follows:No. of Wire dia Min. breaking load Min.wires & (mm) of the standard wire breakingconst. (KN)before stranding load of

(KN) Single wire7(6/1) 2.0 2.20 13.707(6/1) 2.5 3.44 21.407(6/1) 3.15 5.46 34.00

7(6/1) 4.0 8.80 54.9

(VII) CONSTRUCTIONa. The galvanized stay wire shall be of 7-wire

construction. The wires shall be so strandedtogether that when an evenly distributed pull isapplied at the ends of completed strand, each wireshall take an equal share of the pull.

b. Joints are permitted in the individual wires duringstranding but such joints shall not be less than 15meters apart in the finished strands.

c. The wire shall be circular and free from scale,irregularities, imperfection, flaws, splits and other

66

defects.

(viii) TOLERANCESA tolerance of (±) 2.5% on the diameter of wires beforestranding shall be permitted.(ix) SAMPLING CRITERIA

The sampling criteria shall be in accordance withIS:2141.

(x) TESTS ON WIRES BEFORE MANUFACTURE

The wires shall be subjected to the following testsin accordance with IS:2141.i) Ductility Testii) Tolerance on Wire Diameter

(xi) TESTS ON COMPLETED STRANDThe completed strand shall be tested for the followingtests in accordance with IS:2141.a) Tensile and Elongation Test:

the percentage elongation of the stranded wire shallnot be less than 6%.

b) Chemical analysis

c) Galvanizing Test :

The Zinc Coating shall conform to "Heavy Coating" as laiddown in IS:4826

(xii) MARKINGEach coil shall carry a metallic tag, securely attached tothe inner part of the coil, bearing the following information:a) Manufacturers' name or trade markb) Lot number and coil numberc) Sized) Constructione) Tensile Designationf) Layg) Coatingh) Lengthi) Massj) ISI certification mark, if any

(xiii) PACKINGThe wires shall be supplied in 75-100 Kg. coils. Thepacking should be done in accordance with the provisionsof IS:65943. For remaining items of stay sets mentioned in theenclosed drawing, relevant applicable Indian standardsshall be applicable.

(A) STRANDED GI WIRE:1. Scope: This specification provides for manufacture,

test dispatch supply and delivery of Galvanizedstranded steel wire.

2. Standards: The G.I. (Stay) Wires shall comply with thefollowing Indian Standards with their latestamendments unless otherwise modified in thisspecification or any other international standards whichensured equal or higher quality materials.

Stranded WireIS : 2141 1979IS : 4826 1979

IS : 6594 1974 and the relevant standardsindicated therein with latestamendment.

Hot dip galvanized with heavy coating for stranded wireshall confirm to IS: 4826-1979 with latest amendment.

6.05.1 MATERIALS(i) Materialsa) Stranded G.I. (Stay) wires 7/10 SWG equivalent to

7/3.15 mm

b) Stranded G.I. (Stay) wires 7/12 SWG equivalent to7/- mm

c) Stranded G.I. (Stay) wires 7/14 SWG equivalent to7/2.0 mm

d) Stranded G.I. (Stay) wires 7/16 SWG equivalent to7/- mm

1.1 The wire shall be drawn from steel made by the

v v v

6.05 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI WIRE

open hearth basic oxygen or Electric Furnaceprocess and of such quality that when drawn to thesize of wire specified and coated with zinc, thefinished strand and the individual wires shall be ofuniform quality and have the properties andcharacteristics as specified in this specification.The wires shal l not contain sulphur andphosphorus exceeding 0.060% each.

(ii) The wire shall be coated with zinc of grade Zn 98 ofIS: 209-1966 with latest amendment.

(iii) The wires shall be circular and shall be free fromscale, irregularities, imperfection, split surfaceflaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges. The zinccoating shall be smooth, even and bright.

(iv) Joints shall be permitted in the individual wiresduring stranding but these stranding joints shallbe less than 15 meters a part in the finishedstrands.

6.05 CONSTRUCTION(i) The wires shall be of grade 4 having minimum

Tensile strength of (700 N/mm2).(ii) The construction details shall be as specified in

table 'A' below. The galvanized stay strand shall beof 7 (seven) wire and wires shall be so strandedtogether that when an evenly distributed pull isapplied at the ends of the completed reach strandwill take an equal share of the pull

(ii) Minimum Breaking loadThe minimum breaking load of the wire before andafter stranded shall be as per IS : 2141/1979 with

67

latest amendment.No. of SWG of Diameter Minimum breaking load Length Strandswires Wire (mm) (KN/mm2) of single wire of lay minimum

before stranding breakingload (KN)

7 10 3.15 5.45 12 to 18 36.26times the strand

diameter7 12 -Do-7 14 2.0 2.20 -Do- 14.627 16 -Do-

TOLERANCE:The tolerance of ±2.5% of on the diameter of wires with amm2 .025 mm before stranding shall be permitted.(iv) The minimum elongation shall be as per IS: 2141-

1979 with latest amendments.6.05.3 Sampling criteria:

Sampling criteria and the tests shall be inaccordance with IS: 2141-1979.

6.05.4 TESTS(i) Test on wires before manufacture.

a. Ductility test in accordance with IS : 2141 withlatest amendment.

b. Measurement of diameter.

(ii)Test on completed strand.a. Tensile and Elongation test as per IS : 2141

with latest amendment.b. Chemical analysis of sample from each lot.c. Coating test.The uniformity of zinc coating shall be tested bymethod specified in IS: 2633-1964 with latestamendments. The wire shall withstand the numberof dips as specified in IS: 4826-1968 or latest

version indicated below in table 'B'.TABLE 'B' Hard HEAVY COATED WIRE

Nominal diameter Wt. of coating No. of dipsof galvanized wire wire g/m2 1 Min. ½ Min.(mm)/SWG

3.15/10 250 3 --/12

2.0/14 210 2-/16

WEIGHT OF COIL(i) The wires shall be supplied in 70-100 Kg. Coils.

(ii) MarkingEach coil should be provided with a label fixed firmlyon the inner part of the coil bearing the followinginformation.

a) Manufacturer's name or trade marksb) Lot number and coil numbersc) Sized) Constructionse) Tensile designationf) Layg) Coatingh) Lengthi) Massj) Contract No.k) ISI Certification markl) Identification mark if any.The above shall be legibly stamped upon a metalictape securely attached to the coil.

(iii) PackingEach coil shall be wrapped in hessain and packed ina manner acceptable to the purchaser.

6.06.1 Scope

This Specification covers design, engineering,manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection& testing before supply and delivery at site the Pininsulators and disc insulators alongwith fittings for11kV lines.

6.06.2 StandardsThe material shall conform in all respect to therelevant Indian standards with latest amendmentsindicated below.

Indian Standards Title

ISS: 731/1976 Porcelain insulators for overheadpower lines with a nominal voltagegreater than 1000 V

ISS: 2486 Metal fittings of insulators for(Part-1 to Part-4) overhead power lines with nominal

voltage greater than 1000 V

v v v

6.06 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV INSULATORS

In the event of the supply of insulators & fittings conformingto standards other than specified, the Bidder shall confirmin his bid that these standards are equivalent to thosespecified. In case of award, salient features of comparisonbetween the standards proposed by the Contractor andthose specified in this document will be provided by theContractor to establish their equivalence.6.06.3 Technical Description(i) General Requirementsa. All insulators for 11kV shall conform to Type B of

latest version of IS: 731. Pin type insulator shall beas per figure no 11 INS-1.

b. Pin insulator shall consist of a single piece ofporcelain, intended to be mounted rigidly on asupporting structure by a pin, which passes upinside the insulator. The pin type insulator shallhave a top groove and shall be threaded to take

68

mild steel pins. The profile of threads shall be asper IS: 1445.

c. The strain insulators shall be of Ball and Sockettype or Tongue or Clevis type with details as perfigure no. 11 INS-2

6.06.4 Qualifying Requirement for Insulator Manufacturer/SupplierThe manufacturer should have designed,manufactured, type tested and supplied discinsulators / Pin Insulators for 11kV or above voltagetransmission line of quantities not less than 50,000respectively.

6.06.5 Materials(i) Porcelain

The porcelain used in the manufacture of shellsshall be sound, free from defects thoroughly vitrifiedand smoothly glazed. It should not engage directlywith hard metal.

(ii) GlazeThe finished porcelain shall be glazed in browncolour. The glaze shall cover all exposed parts ofthe insulator and shall have a good lusture, smoothsurface and good performance under the extremeweather conditions of a tropical climate. It shall notcrack or chip by ageing under the normal serviceconditions. The glaze shall have the same co-efficient of expansion as of the porcelain bodythroughout the working temperature range. Theinsulator shall be so designed that the stressesdue to expansion and contraction in any part of theinsulator shall not lead to deterioration.

(iii) CementCement used in the manufacture of the insulatorshall not cause fracture by expansion or looseningby contraction. The cement shall not give rise tochemical reaction with metal fittings and itsthickness shall be as small and uniform aspossible. Proper care shall be taken to correctlycentre and locate individual parts during cementing.

(iv) Creepage DistanceHighest System Normal and moderately polluted

Voltage atmospherePin Insulator Disc Insulator

KV mm Mm12 230 230

The minimum Electro-mechanical strength of DiscInsulator shall be 45 KN.(v) Disc Insulatorsa. Pin and Cap

a1. Pins and Caps shall be made of drop forged steeland malleable cast iron/ spheroidal graphite iron/drop forged steel respectively, duly hot dipgalvanized and shall not be made by jointing,welding, shrink fitting or any other process frommore than one piece of material.

a2. Pin and Cap shall be designed to transmit themechanical stresses to the shell by compressionand develop uniform mechanical strength in theinsulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner

and outer surfaces concentric, of such design thatit will not yield or distort under load conditions.

a3. The pin ball shall move freely in the cap socket butwithout danger of accidental uncoupling duringerection or in position. The design of the discshould be such that stresses due to expansion orcontraction in any part of the insulator shall notlead to deterioration.

b. Security clipb1. Security clip for use with ball and socket coupling

shall be of R-shaped hump type which shall providepositive locking of the coupling as per IS:2486-(Part-Ill)/ IEC:372. The legs of the security clips shallbe spread after installation to prevent completewithdrawal from the socket. The locking deviceshould be resilient, corrosion resistant and ofsuitable mechanical strength. There shall be norisk of the locking device being displacedaccidentally or being rotated when in position-under no circumstances shall locking device allowseparation of insulator units or fittings.

b2. Security clips shall be made of good qualitystainless steel or phosphor bronze as per IS: 1385-1968. 2.5% extra Security clip shall be provided.

c. Ball and Socket DesignationThe dimensions of the balls and sockets shall beof 16 mm designation in accordance with thestandard dimensions stated in IS: 2486 - (Part - II).

6.06.6 InterchangeabilityThe disc insulators inclusive of fittings shall be ofstandard design suitable for use with the hardwarefittings of any make conforming to relevant Indian/International Standards.

6.06.7 Workmanship(i) All the material shall be of the latest design and

conform to the best modern practices adopted inthe distribution voltage field. Contractors shall offeronly such insulators as are guaranteed by him tobe satisfactory and suitable for specified voltagelevel lines and will give continued good service.

(ii) The design, manufacturing process and materialcontrol at various stages shall be such as to givemaximum working load, highest mobility, bestresistance to corrosion, good finish and eliminationof sharp edges and corners.

(iii) The design of the insulators shall be such thatstresses due to expansion and contraction in anypart of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.

(iv) In disc insulators, metal caps shall be free fromcracks, seams, shrinks, air holes, burrs and roughedges. All surfaces of the metal parts shall beperfectly smooth with no projecting points orirregularities. All load bearing surfaces shall besmooth and uniform so as to distribute the loadingstresses uniformly.

(v) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised to givea minimum average coating of Zinc equivalent to600 gm/sq.m. and shall be in accordance with therequirement of IS:2629-1985 and shall satisfy thetests mentioned in IS:2633 1986. The zinc usedfor galvanising shall be of Grade Zn 99.95 as per

69

IS:209-1979. The zinc coating shall be uniform,adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuousand free from imperfections such as flux, ash, ruststains, bulky white deposits and blisters. Thegalvanised metal parts shall be guaranteed towithstand at least six successive dips each lastingfor one (1) minute duration under the standardpreece test.

(vi) Before ball fittings are galvanized, all die flashingon the shank surface of the ball shall be carefullyremoved without reducing the dimensions belowthe design requirements.

(vii) In disc insulators, the design of the insulators shallbe such that the shell shall not engage directlywith hard metal. The design shall also be suchthat when units are coupled together there is nocontact between the shell of one unit and metal ofthe next adjacent unit. The design of the shell ribsshall be such that the security clip of the insulatorcan be engaged and disengaged easily with hotstick without damaging the shell ribs.

(viii) Insulator units after assembly shall be concentricand co-axial within limits as permitted by therelevant Indian Standards.

6.06.8 Equipment Marking(i) Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked

with the trademark of the manufacturer and month& year of manufacture. The guaranteed combinedmechanical and electrical strength shall be indicatedin kilo Newton followed by the word 'kN' to facilitateeasy identification and to ensure proper use.

(ii) The marking shall be on porcelain, and shall beprinted, not impressed and shall be applied beforefiring.

6.06.9 Bid Drawings(i) The Bidder shall furnish full description and

illustration of the material offered.(ii) The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the

outline drawing (6 copies) of each insulator unitincluding a cross sectional view of the insulatorshell. The drawing shall include but not limited tothe following information:(a) Dimensions with manufacturing tolerances(b) Minimum Creepage distance with positive

tolerance(c) Protected creepage distance(d) Eccentricity of the disc

(i) Axial run out(ii) Radial run out

(e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics(f) Size and weight of Pin Ball Shank / ball and

socket parts(g) Weight of unit insulator disc(h) Materials(i) Identification mark(j) Manufacturer's catalogue number

(iii) After placement of award, the Contractor shallsubmit fully dimensioned insulator drawingscontaining all the details as given in ClauseNo. 1.12.2 above, in four (4) copies to Owner

for approval. After getting approval from Ownerand successful completion of all the type tests,the Contractor shall submit 20 more copies ofthe same drawing to the Owner for furtherdistribution and field use at Owner's end.

6.06.1 TESTS AND STANDARDS(i) Tests

The following type, acceptance, routine testsand tests during manufacture shall be carriedout on the insulator individually and along withhardware fittings. For the purpose of this clause:

a. Type tests shall mean those tests, which are tobe carried out to prove the design process ofmanufacture and general conformity of thematerial to this specification. These tests shallbe carr ied out on samples prior tocommencement of commercial productionagainst the specification. The Bidder shallindicate this schedule for carrying out thesetests in the activity schedule.

b. Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, whichare to be carried out on samples taken fromeach lot offered for pre-despatch inspection forthe purpose of acceptance of that lot.

c. Routine tests shall mean those tests, whichare to be carried out on each insulator/hardware fitting to check requirements whichare likely to vary during production.

d. Tests during manufacture shall mean thosetests, which are to be carried out during theprocess of manufacture and end inspection bythe Supplier to ensure the desired quality of theend product to be supplied by him.

e. The norms and procedure of sampling forthese tests will be as per the Quality AssuranceProgramme to be mutually agreed to by theSupplier and Owner.

f. The standards and norms to which these testswill be carried out are listed against them. Wherea particular test is a specific requirement of thisspecification, the norms and procedure of theseshall be as specified in Annexure-A of thisSection or as mutually agreed to between theSupplier and the Owner in the QualityAssurance Programme.

g. For all types and acceptance tests, theacceptance values shall be the valuesguaranteed by the Bidder in the GuaranteedTechnical Particulars of this proposal or theacceptance value specified in this specificationwhichever is more stringent for that particulartest.

h. For all type and acceptance tests, the Biddershall guarantee only minimum values in theGuaranteed Technical Particulars. Bidder shallbe required to achieve the same or highervalues, as guaranteed, during testing for all typeand acceptance tests.

6.06.11 Type Tests

The following type tests shall be conducted on a

70

suitable number of individual insulator unit,components, materials or complete strings:(a) Verification of dimensions(b) Thermal mechanical performance test(c) Power frequency voltage withstand and

flashover test(i) dry(ii) wet

(d) Impulse voltage withstand and flashover test(dry)

(e) Visible Discharge test (dry)

(f) RIV test (dry)(g) Mechanical failing Load Test (for pin insulator

only)(h) 24 hr mechanical strength test (for strain / string

insulator only)(i) Acceptance Tests

(a) Visual examination(b) Verification of dimensions(c) Temperature cycle test(d) Galvanising test(e) Mechanical performance test

(f) Test on locking device for ball and socketcoupling

(g) Eccentricity test(h) Metallurgical Test(i) Grain size )

(ii) Inclusion rating ) For Metal fittings) only(iii) Chemical analysis ) (in Black condition)

(iv)Microstructure)(i) Mechanical Failing Load test (for Pin Insulator

only)(j) Electro-mechanical strength test (for Disc /

Strain Insulator only)(k) Porosity test(l) Puncture test (for Strain Insulator only)

(ii) Routine Tests(a) Visual Inspection

(b) Mechanical routine text (for Disc Strain Insulatoronly)

(c) Electrical routine test (for strain insulator only)(iii) Tests During Manufacture

On all components as applicable(a) Chemical analysis of zinc ) Annexure-A

used for galvanizing )(b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, )

metallographic test and magnetic)particle inspection for malleable )castings. )

(c) Chemical analysis hardness ) Annexure - A

tests and magnetic particle )

inspection for forgings )(d) Hydraulic Internal Pressure )

tests on disc insulator shells )

Any other test not mentioned above but included inthe latest version of IS: 7935 shall also be construedto be included in the above list of type, acceptance& routine tests.

(iv) Test VoltagesThe test voltages of insulators shall be as under: Highest Visible Wet Power Power Frequency Impulse System Discharge Frequency puncture withstand test voltage Voltage Test withstand Pin Strain/st withstand

Test Insulators ringInsulator TestInsulators

KV(rms) Kv(rms) KV(rms) Kv(rms) kV(rms) kV(rms) 12 9 35 105 1.3 times the 75

actural dryflash overvoltage ofthe insulator

The withstand and flashover voltages are referred to the'Reference Atmospheric Conditions' as per IndianStandards.

(v) Failing Loada. Mechanical Failing Load (For Pin Insulators only)

The insulators shall be suitable for a minimumfailing load of 5 KN (for 11kV) applied in transversedirection. Shackle insulators shall be suitable fora minimum failing load of 11.5KN for type 1insulator and 16.0KN for type 2 insulator.

b. Electro-Mechanical Failing Load (For StrainInsulators/ Disc Insulator Units)The insulators shall be suitable for a minimumfailing load of 45 kN (for 11kV lines) applied axially.

(vi) Testing Expensesa. Testing charges for the type test specified shall be

indicated separately in the prescribed schedule.b. Bidder shall indicate unit type test charges for all

type tests covered under this specificationseparately, in the relevant schedule of Prices asapplicable.

c. In case of failure of any type test, the Contractor iseither required to modify design of the material andsuccessfully carryout all the type tests as has beendetailed out in this specification or to repeat thatparticular type test at least three times successfullyat his own expenses.

d. Contractor shall indicate the laboratories in whichthey propose to conduct the type tests. They shallensure that adequate facilities are available in thelaboratory and the tests can be completed in theselaboratories within the time schedule guaranteedby them in the appropriate schedule.

e. The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routinetests and tests during manufacture specified hereinshall be treated as included in the quoted Ex-worksPrice.

f. In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type testsare requiredto be conducted, then all the expenses fordeputation of Inspector / Owner's representativeshall be deducted from the contract price. Also if onreceipt of the Contractor's notice of testing, the

71

Owner's representative does not find 'PLANT' to beready for testing the expenses incurred by theOwner for re-deputation shall be deducted fromcontract price.

g. The Contractor shall intimate the Owner aboutcarrying out of the type tests along with detailedtesting programme at least 3 weeks in advance ofthe scheduled date of testing during which theOwner will arrange to depute his representative tobe present at the time of carrying out the tests.

(vii) Sample Batch for Type Testinga. The Contractor shall offer material for sample

selection for type testing only after getting QualityAssurance Programme approved by the Owner.The Contractor shall offer at least three times thequantity of materials required for conducting all thetype tests for sample selection. The sample fortype testing will be manufactured strictly inaccordance with the Quality Assurance Programmeapproved by the Owner.

b. Before sample selection for type testing, theContractor shall be required to conduct all theacceptance tests successfully in presence ofOwner's representative.

(viii) Schedule of Testing and Additional TestsThe Bidder has to indicate the schedule of followingactivities in their bids(a) Submission of drawings for approval.(b) Submission of Quality Assurance programme

for approval.(c) Offering of material for sample selection for type

tests.(d) Type testing.

(ix) Additional Testsa. The Owner reserves the right of having at his own

expense any other test(s) of reasonable naturecarried out at Contractor's premises, at site, or inany other place in addition to the aforesaid type,acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself thatthe material comply with the Specifications.

b. The Owner also reserves the right to conduct allthe tests mentioned in this specification at his ownexpense on the samples drawn from the site atContractor's premises or at any other test centre.In case of evidence of non compliance, it shall bebinding on the part of the Contractor to prove thecompliance of the items to the technicalspecifications by repeat tests or correction ofdeficiencies, or replacement of defective items,all without any extra cost to the Owner.

(x) Co-ordination for testingThe Contractor shall have to co-ordinate testing ofinsulators with hardware fittings to be supplied byother Contractor and shall have to guarantee overallsatisfactory performance of the insulators with thehardware fittings.

(xi) Guarantee The Contractor of insulators shall guarantee overall

satisfactory performance of the insulators with thehardware fittings.

(xii) Test Reportsa. Copies of type test reports shall be furnished

in at least six (6) copies along with one original.One copy shall be returned duly certified by theOwner only after which the commercialproduction of the concerned material shall start.

b. Copies of acceptance test reports shall befurnished in at least six (6) copies. One copyshall be returned duly certified by the Owner,only after which the material shall bedespatched.

c. Record of routine test reports shall bemaintained by the Contractor at his works forperiodic inspection by the Owner'srepresentative.

d. Test certificates of test during manufacture shallbe maintained by the Contractor. These shallbe produced for verification as and whendesired by the Owner.

(xiii) Inspectiona. The Owner's representative shall at all times

be entitled to have access to the works and allplaces of manufacture, where insulator, and itscomponent parts shall be manufactured andthe representatives shall have full facilities forunrestricted inspection of the Contractor's andsub-Contractor's works, raw materials,manufacture of the material and for conductingnecessary test as detailed herein.

b. The material for final inspection shall be offeredby the Contractor only under packed conditionas detailed in the specification. The Owner shallselect samples at random from the packed lotfor carrying out acceptance tests. Insulatorsshall normally be offered for inspection in lotsnot exceeding 5000 nos. The lot should behomogeneous and should contain insulatorsmanufactured in the span of not more than 3-4consecutive weeks.

c. The Contractor shall keep the Owner informedin advance of the time of starting and theprogress of manufacture of material in theirvarious stages so that arrangements could bemade for inspection.

d. No material shall be despatched from its pointof manufacture before it has been satisfactorilyinspected and tested unless the inspection iswaived off by the Owner in writing. In the lattercase also the material shall be despatched onlyafter satisfactory testing for all tests specifiedherein have been completed.

e. The acceptance of any quantity of material shallbe no way relieve the Contractor of hisresponsibility for meeting all the requirementsof the specification and shall not preventsubsequent rejection, if such material are laterfound to be defective.

(xiv) Packing and Markinga. All insulators shall be packed in strong

seasoned wooden crates. The gross weight ofthe crates alongwith the material shall not

72

normally exceed 200 Kg to avoid handlingproblem. For marine transportation, crates shallbe paletted.

b. The packing shall be of sufficient strength towithstand rough handling during transit,storage at site and subsequent handling in thefield.

c. Suitable cushioning, protective padding, ordunnage or spacers shall be provided to preventdamage or deformation during transit and

ANNEXURE - A

1.0 Hydraulic Internal Pressure Test on Shells (ifapplicable)The test shall be carried out on 100% shells beforeassembly. The details regarding test will be asdiscussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractorand Owner in Quality Assurance Programme.

2.0 Thermal Mechanical Performance Test (ifapplicable)Thermal Mechanical Performance Test shall beperformed in accordance with IEC-383-1-1993Clause 20 with the following modifications :(1) The applied mechanical load during this test

shall be 70% of the rated electromechanical ormechanical value.

(2) The acceptance criteria shall be(a) X greater than or equal to R + 3S.

WhereX Mean value of the individual mechanicalfailing load.

R Rated electro-mechanical / mechanicalfailing load.S Standard deviation.

(b) The minimum sample size shall be takenas 20 for disc insulator units.

(c) The individual electromechanical failingload shall be at least equal to the rated value.Also puncture shall not occur before theultimate fracture.

3.0 Electromechanical/Mechanical Failing Load Test.This test shall be performed in accordance withclause 18 and 19 of IEC 383 with the followingacceptance:(i) X greater than or equal to R + 3S

handling.d. All packing cases shall be marked legibly and

correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at theirdestination and to avoid the possibility of goodsbeing lost or wrongly despatched on accountof faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings.Each wooden case/crate shall have all themarkings stenciled on it in indelible ink.

6.06.12 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARSThe bidder shall furnish the Guaranteed TechnicalParticulars as per annexure and submit it with his bid.

v v v

WhereX Mean value of the electro-mechanical/mechanical/ failing load.

R Rated electro-mechanical / mechanicalfailing load.S Standard deviation.

(ii) The minimum sample size shall be taken as20 for disc insulators units. However, for largerlot size, IEC 591 shall be applicable.

(iii) The individual electro-mechanical/mechanicalfailing load shall be at least equal to the ratedvalue. Also electrical puncture shall not occurbefore the ultimate fracture.

4.0 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for GalvanizingSamples taken from the zinc ingot shall bechemically analysed as per IS:209-1979. The purityof zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.

5.0 Tests for ForgingsThe chemical analysis hardness tests andmagnetic particle inspection for forgings, will beas per the internationally recognized proceduresfor these tests. The sampling will be based onheat number and heat treatment batch. The detailsregarding test will be as discussed and mutuallyagreed to by the Contractor and Owner in QualityAssurance Programme.

6.0 Tests on CastingsThe chemical analysis, mechanical andmetallographic tests and magnetic, particleinspect ion for cast ings wi l l be as per theinternationally recognized procedures for thesetests. The samplings will be based on heatnumber and heat treatment batch. The detailsregarding test will be as discussed and mutuallyagreed to by the Contractor and Owner in QualityAssurance Programme.

v v v

73

6.07.1 SCOPEThis Specif ication covers design, engineering,manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection & testingbefore supply and delivery at site of lT pin insulator, LTshackle insulators and insulator fittings for use on 415/240 V overhead power lines to be constructed under thisspecifications.

6.07.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDSThe insulators shall comply with IS:1445-1977 and thefittings with IS:7935-1975 or the latest versions thereof. Inthe event of the supply of insulators & fittings conformingto standards other than specified, the Bidder shall confirmin his bid that these standards are equivalent to thosespecified. In case of award, salient features of comparisonbetween the standards proposed by the Contractor andthose specified in this document will be provided by theContractor to establish their equivalence.

6.07.3 PORCELAIN INSULATORS(i) General Requirementsa. The porcelain shall be sound, free from defects,

thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.b. The glaze, unless otherwise specified, shall be

brown in colour. Except for the screw threads andthe parts on which the porcelain is supportedduring firing, which may be left unglazed, all othersurfaces of the insulator shall be effectively glazed.

c. The design of the insulator shall be such thatstresses due to expansion and contraction in anypart of the insulator shall not lead to itsdeterioration.

d. The insulator shall be in one piece.(ii) Type of Insulatorsa. Pin Insulator : Pin insulator is an insulator

consisting of a single piece of porcelain andintended to be mounted rigidly on a supportingstructure by a pin, which passes up inside theinsulator. The pin type insulator shall have a topgroove and shall be threaded to take mild steelpins, the profile of threads being as given in Fig. LTINS-1 . The dimensions of pin insulator shall beas shown in Fig. LT INS-2.

b. Shackle Insulator : Shackle insulator is an insulatorconsisting of a single piece of porcelain andintended to be mounted vertically or horizontally ,between and in contact with the two ends of a 'U'strap or a pair of straps with its axis vertical andintended to secure a line conductor in tension. Thedimensions of shackle insulator shall be as shownin Fig. LT INS-3 & LT INS-4.

(iii) Basic Insulation Levels

The test voltages of the insulators shall be as under:

Type of Insulator Wet One-Minute Power FrequencyPower Frequency Puncture WithstandWithstand Voltage Voltage

6.07 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 415/240V.PORCELAIN INSULATORS AND INSULATOR FITTINGS

KV (rms) KV (rms)Pin 10 60

Shackle 10 60

The withstand voltage in Column 2 above is referred tothe "Reference Atmospheric Conditions" as per IS:1445.(iv) Mechanical LoadsThe insulators shall be suitable for the minimum failingload specified as under:

Pin Insulator KN Shackle Insulator KN3.5 11.5 (Type 1)

- 16.0 (Type 2)

(v) TestsThe insulators shall comply with the following testsas per IS:1445.

a. Type Tests: The following tests shall constitute thetype tests :a) Visual examinationb) Verification of dimensionsc) Wet power-frequency voltage withstand testd) Temperature cycle teste) Mechanical failing load testf) Power-frequency puncture withstand test and

g) Porosity testb. Acceptance Tests: The test samples shall be

subjected to the following acceptance tests in theorder indicated below :

a) Verification of dimensionsb) Temperature cycle testc) Mechanical failing load testd) Porosity test

c. Routine Test: The visual examination shall becarried out on each insulator.Any other test not mentioned above but included inthe latest version of IS:1445. shall also beconstrued to be included in the above list of type,acceptance & routine tests .

(vi) Marking(a) Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly

marked to show the following :a) Name or trade mark of the manufacturerb) Year of Manufacture andc) ISI certification mark

(b) Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall beapplied before firing.

(vii) PackingAll insulators shall be packed in baskets, crates orboxes as per manufacturers' standard practice butsuitable for rough handling.

74

6.07.4 INSULATOR FITTINGS(i) Pins

General Requirementsa. The pins shall be obtained by the process of

forging. They shall be of good finish, free from flawsand other defects. The finish of the collar shall besuch that a sharp angle between the collar and theshank is avoided.

b. All ferrous pins, nuts and washers except thosemade of stainless steel, shall be galvanized. Thethreads of nuts shall be cut after galvanizing andshall be well oiled or greased.

c. Dimensions: Pins shall have a stalk length of135mm, shank length of 125 mm and minimumfailing load of 2.0 KN. The dimensions of the pinshall be as given in Fig. LT INS FITTINGS-1.

(ii) Shackle Insulator FittingsGeneral Requirements

a. All parts shall be of good finish and free fromflaws and other defects. The edges on theoutside of fittings, such as at the holes etc. shallbe rounded.

b. All ferrous fittings and the parts other than thoseof stainless steel shall be galvanised. Smallfittings like spring washers, nuts etc. may beelectro-plated with zinc.

(iii) Strap type fittings shall consist of thefollowing:

a) A pair of MS strapb) 2 Nos. MS bolts with hexagonal head and

nutsc) 2 Nos. spring washersd) Helically formed conductor dead-end

fitt ings made of aluminium alloy oraluminium-clad steel conforming to therequirements of REC Spec. No. 25/1983.

(iv) The complete details of shackle fittings to beused with steel cross-arms are shown in Fig.LT INS FITTINGS-2 & LT INS FITTINGS-3.

(i) Alternatively, 'U' clamp fittings shall berequired. These would consist of :a) MS 'U' - clampb) 1 No. MS bolt and nut

c) 1 No. spring washerd) Helically formed distribution side tie made

of aluminium alloy or aluminium-clad steelconforming to the requirements of RECSpec. No. 25/1983.

Note : 'U'clamp fittings are intended only for useon tangent locations or for service lines whereload is small; the strap fittings are meant forangle and dead-end locations.

(ii) TestsInsulator fittings shall comply with the followingtests as per IS:7935.

a. Type Tests : The following shall constitute thetype tests :a) Visual examinationb) Verification of dimensionsc) Checking of threads on headsd) Galvanising/electroplating test ande) Mechanical strength test (for pin insulator

fittings only)b. Acceptance Tests: The fol lowing shall

constitute the acceptance tests:

a) Checking of threads on heads andb) Galvanizing test

c. Routine Test: Visual examination test shall becarried out as routine testAny other test not mentioned above but includedin the latest version of IS: 7935 shall also beconstrued to be included in the above list oftype, acceptance & routine tests.

(iii) PackingFor packing of insulator pins and shacklefittings, double gunny bags or wooden cases,if deemed necessary, shall be employed.Helically formed fittings shall be packed in cardboard/wooden boxes. The gross weight of eachpacking shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Allnuts shall be hand-tightened over the bolts andscrewed up to the farthest point.

6.07.5 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICU-LARSThe bidder shall furnish the Guaranteed TechnicalParticulars as per annexure and submit it with his bid.

v v v

75

6.08 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FORGUY STRAIN INSULATORS

6.08.1 SCOPEThis Specification covers design, engineering,manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection &esting before supply and delivery at site of porcelainguy strain insulators for use 11 kV and 415/240 voltsoverhead lines

6.08.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDSUnless otherwise modified in this specification, theinsulators shall comply with IS:5300-1969 or the latestversion thereof. In the event of the supply of insulatorsconforming to standards other than specified, theBidder shall confirm in his bid that these standardsare equivalent to those specified. In case of award,salient features of comparison between the standardsproposed by the Contractor and those specified in thisdocument will be provided by the Contractor toestablish their equivalence.

6.08.3GENERAL REQUIREMENTS(i) The porcelain insulator shall be sound, free from

defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.(ii) The design of the insulator shall be such that the

stresses due to expansion and contraction in anypart of the insulator shall not lead to itsdeterioration.

(iii) The glaze, unless otherwise specified, shall bebrown in colour. The glaze shall cover the entireporcelain surface parts except those areas thatserve as supports during firing.

6.08.4 TYPE OF INSULATORS(i) The type of guy strain insulators for use on guy

wires of 11 kV & LT lines shall be as follows:Power Line Voltage Designation of Insulators

(as per IS:5300)415/240V A11000V C

6.08.5 DIMENSIONSThe dimensions of guy strain insulators shall be inaccordance with Figs. GUY INS-1 and GUY INS-2.

6.08.6 BASIC INSULATION LEVELSThe test voltage of the insulators shall be as under:

Designation of Dry one minute Wet one minuteInsulator power Frequency power Frequency

withstand voltage withstand voltageKV (rms) KV (rms)

A 18 8C 27 13

6.08.7 MECHANICAL STRENGTHThe insulators shall be suitable for the minimumfailing loads specified as under:

Designation of Insulator Minimum failing load (KN)

A 44C 88

6.08.8 TESTSThe insulators shall comply with the following routine, typeand acceptance tests as per IS:5300.(i) Routine Test

Visual examination(ii) Type Tests

a) Visual examinationb) Verification of dimensions

c) Temperature cycle testd) Dry one-minute power-frequency voltage

withstand teste) Wet one-minute power frequency voltage

withstand testf) Mechanical strength testg) Porosity test

(iii) Acceptance Tests: (to be conducted in thefollowing order)

a) Verification of dimensionsb) Temperature cycle testc) Mechanical strength testd) Porosity testAny other test not mentioned above but included inthe latest version of IS: 5300 shall also be construedto be included in the above list of type, acceptance& routine tests.

6.08.9 MARKING(i) Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked

to show the following :a) Name or trade mark of the manufacturerb) Year of manufacturec) ISI certification mark, if any.

(ii) Marking on porcelain shall be applied before firing.

6.08.10 PACKINGAll insulators shall be packed in wooden crates suitablefor easy but rough handling and acceptable for railtransport. Wooden separators shall be fixed between theinsulators to keep individual insulators in position withoutmovement within the crate.

6.08.11 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARSThe bidder shall furnish the Guaranteed TechnicalParticulars as per annexure and submit it with his bid.6.09. 11KV OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTIONTRANSFORMER (UPTO 400KVA)A seperate subcommittee has been constituted torecommend the specifications for Distributiontransformers and other APDRP products.Recommendations of that sub committee may be kindlyrefered to for specifications for Distribution Transformer.

v v v

76

6.09.1SCOPEThis specification covers Design, manufacture, testing atworks and supply of Horn Gap Fuses of high voltage, 50Hz three phase system.

6.09.2MATERIALS The various components shall conform to the followingspecifications.

(i) M.S. Channel, Flat and Round (Steel) to conform to I.S.2062 amended up to date(structural steel standardquality having tensile strength of 42-54 Kg./mm sq.)

(ii) Bolt and Nuts: These shall conform to the following ISSpecifications:IS: 1367 - 1980IS 4218 - 1976IS: 1363 - 1984

(iii) For galvanizing, zinc conforming to Grade 98.50 of IS-209 1979 specification for Zinc (Revised) shall be used.

(iv) Insulators: Insulators used for the Horn Gap Fuse Unitshall conform to relevant IS Standards in all respectswith regard to mechanical and electrical requirements.

6.09.3 (i)The electrical characteristics of the insulatorsshall be as follows :

System Power frequency Impulse CreepageVoltage withstand withstand distance

voltage in KV voltage in KV in mm11 KV 35 75 230/323

(ii) Mechanical loads for pin Insulators -540 Kg as min. failing load.

6.09.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSThe Horn gap fuse sets are required for protection on 11kV system. They will be mounted outdoors on suitablestructures. These sets will be exposed to atmosphericconditions and therefore, shall be robust in construction.Pin type of insulators shall be used in construction of thefuse units as per POWERGRID approved drawing.

6.09.5 WORKMANSHIPThe casting shall be of good finish and free from flaws,blow holes and other defects. The edges of the fittingsshall be smoothly rounded.

The M.S. flat, round etc. before any work is done on them,shall be carefully leveled, straightened and bent or forgedto the shape given in the drawing by methods which willnot injure the materials. No rough edges shall be permittedany where through out the work.Similar parts shall be uniform and inter changeable witheach other.The welding work shall be carried out properly and thesame shall not open under adverse climatic conditions.Holes in channel shall be drilled or machine punched. Allburrs left by drilling or punch shall be completely removed.

6.09 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FORH.T. HORN GAP FUSE

The Bolts and Nuts shall be well forged and free frominequalities, flaws and other defects. The heads shall besolid and in every respect well formed and shall not failwhen the bolts are tested to fracture at their full section forTensile Stress.The washers shall be clearly cut off or punched and entirelyfree from cracks after punching.

6.09.6 GALVANISINGAll ferrous parts (bolts, nuts, washers, M.S. flats, clampsand M.S. round holding clamps etc. for the insulator &horn gap fuses) shall be hot dip galvanized. The galvanizingshall conform to IS : 2633/72 in all respect. Aftergalvanizing, the surfaces shall be free from all sharp edgesand metal.

The threading on nut and bolt shall be cut beforegalvanizing.

6.09.7 THE MANUFACTURER/ TENDERER SHALLCLEARLY INDICATE WHAT TESTING FACILITIESTHEY HAVE GOT FOR TESTING THE H.G. FUSES.

The following type tests be carried out on H.G. Fuses.i) Dielectric Testsii) Temperature Rise Tests shall be done at rated current.

These tests shall be carried out as per proceduresgiven in IS : 9385/80 (Part 2) or latest version thereof.All the equipments offered should be fully type testedas per the relevant standards. In case the equipmentof the type and design offered has already been typetested the tenderer shall furnish four sets of the typetest reports along with the offer. The purchaser reservesthe right to demand repetition of some or all the typetests in the presence of purchaser's representative.For this purpose the tenderer may quote unit rates forcarrying cut each type test. For any change in thedesign/type, already type tested and the design/typeoffered against this specification the purchaserreserves the right to demand, repetition of tests withoutany extra cost. In case the equipment have not beentype tested earlier, all the type tests as per relevantstandards shall be carried out by the successfultenderer in the presence of purchaser's representative,on the unit selected and sealed by purchaser, withoutany extra cost, before commencement of delivery.

iii) The supplier/tenderer will have to guarantee thecomposition of the aluminium used and strength byactual test. The supplier/tenderer shall thereforemention in the offer the name of the manufacturer fromwhom the raw materials are purchased and alsosubmit the Test Certificate therefore.

iv) The supplier/tenderer will clearly and specificallyindicate the name of manufacturer of the pin insulator.Test certificate showing the results of the routine andtype tests carried out as per IS : 731/1971 will have tobe submitted along with the offer. The pin insulatorswill be inspected at the original manufacturer's factory.

77

6.09.8 REJECTION CLAUSE:The purchaser will select at works two assembled horngap fuse units at random from each lot of 100. These twoselected horn gap fuses would be subjected to the typetests specified above at supplier's cost. If the units fail tocomply with the requirements, the whole lot of 100 will berejected. The testing under this clause will be done in any

laboratory of the Purchaser/Board's choice includingBoard's laboratory.Notice of such test will be given by the Purchaser/Boardby ordinary post to the supplier after intimation of the lot isreceived and the date of test may not be altered to theconvenience or at the request of the supplier. The supplieris at liberty to be present during the testing.

6.10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR11KV A B SWITCH

v v v

6.10.1 SCOPE(i) This specification covers design, manufacturing,

assembly, testing before supply, inspection,packing and delivery and other basic requirementsin respect of out door type 12 kV rating Air BreakSwitch (A B Switch) for Distribution Transformerwith accessories and auxiliary equipment requiredfor their satisfactory operation.

(ii) The equipment offered shall be complete with allparts necessary for their effective and trouble freeoperation. Such parts shall be within the scope ofsupply irrespective of whether they are specificallyindicated in the BPS.

(iii) It is not the intent to specify, completely here in allthe details of design and construction of the A BSwitch. However, the A B Switch shall conform, inall respects to high standard of engineering,design and workmanship as listed in annexure I.

6.10.2 APPLICABLE STANDARD(i) The A B Switch shall conform to the latest revisions,

available at the time of placement of order ofrelevant standard, rules and codes listed inannexure-I. The Indian standard specifications canbe obtained on payment of requisite charges, fromthe Bureau of Indian Standard, Bahadur Shah JafarMarg Manak Bhawan, NewDelhi-22.

(ii) Equipment meeting with the stipulations ofequivalent IEC, ANSI, CSA, DIN standard, whichensure equal or better quality than the standardslisted in annexure-I, shall also be acceptable. Insuch case the contractor should submit along withhis offer, two copies of such standards in authenticEnglish translation, if the language of the standardis other than English.

6.10.3 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS(i) Type of A B Switch

The A B Switch shall be outdoor type suitable forhorizontal mounting on the support structure. TheA B switch shall be 3-phase 3-pin type gangoperated and of rotating type with one postinsulators per stack and single throw, double breakcharacteristic. It would be complete with arcinghorns, down pipe and operating mechanism.

(ii) Current DensityCurrent density to be adopted for all the parts of A BSwitch and terminal connector shall not exceedthe following limits:a. Hollow tube section -Copper 2.0 A/sqmmb. Flat section - Copper 1.6 A/sqmm

c. Terminal connectors -Alum. 1.0 A/sqmm

(iii) Post Insulatorsa. The Post insulator shall be with solid core

insulators. Polycone insulators shall not beacceptable. The post insulator should confirmto IS: 2544 latest issue. Each stack two suchinsulators placed one over other with originalcementing.

b. The insulator shall be provided with acompletely galvanised steel base design formounting on the support. The base andmounting arrangement of the insulator shallbe such that the insulator shall be rigid andself-supporting and no guying or cross bracingbetween phases shall be necessary.

c. Insulator shall be made of homogeneous andvitreous porcelain of high mechanical &dielectric strength. It shall have sufficientmechanical strength to sustain electrical andmechanical loading on account of wind load,short circuit stresses etc. Glazing of theporcelain shall be uniform brown or dark browncolour with a smooth surface arrange to shedaway rain water. Porcelain and metal parts shallbe assembled in such a way that any thermaldifferential expansion between the metal andporcelain through the range of temperaturespecified in this specification shall not loosenthe parts or create undue internal stresseswhich may affect the mechanical or electricalstrength or rigidity.

d. Cap of the insulator shall be of high grademalleable steel casting. It shall be machinefaced and hot dip galvanised as per IS 3638, IS2623. The cap shall have four number of tappedholes spaced on a pitch circle of diameter of 76mm. To accommodate the terminal clamps ofBusbar.

78

(e) The insulator unit shall be assembled in asuitable jig to ensure correct positioning of thetop and bottom metal fittings relative to oneanother.

(iv) Operating Mechanisma. Manual operating mechanism gang operated

through hand-operated lever shall be providedfor A B switch.

b. The operating mechanism shall provide quick,simple and effective operation. The design shallbe such that one person shall be able tooperate the A B Switch without undue efforts. AB Switch operating mechanism should be suchthat it should not operate by gravity, wind, shortcircuit, seismic acceleration, vibration, shock,accidental touching.

c. It shall make it possible to effect a smooth andfully controlled movement of the three bladessimultaneously throughout the entire cycle ofoperation. Adjustment step shall be providedat either end and of the mechanism to stop thehandle in the "ON" and "OFF" position. Padlocking arrangement for the handle in the "ON"and "OFF" position should be clearly indicatedon the stand.

(v) Control Cabinet(a)The control cabinet of each operationg

mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG (2.64mm thick) sheet steel. Control cabinet shall beprovided with hinged door along withpadlocking arrangement. 15mm thickneoprene or better type of gaskets shall beprovided to ensure degree of protection at leastIP55 as per IS 13947.

(vi) Gland Plates and GlandsA removable gland plate with double compressiontype brass cable glands shall be provided with eachoperating mechanism for terminating all cables.

(vii) Auxiliary Switcha. Main switch operating mechanism shall be

equipped with reliable auxiliary switch with 4NO & 4 NC contacts exclusively for owner'sinterlocking and protection scheme.

b. The auxiliary switch and auxiliary shall becapable of carrying of 10 Amp currentcontinuously.

c. Quick make and break (QMB) type auxiliaryswitch shall have snap action built in within theswitch.

d. Auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a camor similar arrangement directly mounted on theA B Switch shaft without any intermediate levers,linkages etc to ensure fool proof operation.

(viii) Terminal and WiringA B switch operating mechanism shall be providedwith 1100 volt grade stud type terminal. Auxiliaryswitch shall be wired upto the terminal block. Thereshall be at least 20% extra terminals. All wiringshall be carried out with 1100 V grade PVCinsulated 2.5 sq. mm copper conductor maximumconductor temperature shall be as per IS: 3961.

(ix) Accessoriesi. Position indicator

ii. Name plate (Complete details of the parameter)iii. Padlocking deviceiv. Status of the A B Switch shall not show as closed

till its contacts are not closed properly.v. Status of the A B Switch shall not show as

opened till its contacts are not opened at least80% of the isolating distance.

(x) Earthingi. Flexible copper braid connections shall be

provided between rotating earth blades and theframe which shall have a cross section of atleast 50 sqmm and shall be tinned or suitablytreated against corrosion.

ii. The frame of each A B Switch shall be providedwith two reliable earthing terminals forconnecting to earth mat. The connection shallbe such that it can carry specified short circuitcurrent.

(xi) Design and Constructioni. Contractor shall have to give full details of

design, manufacturing, quality control etc of theequipment offered in respect of the followingitems.1. Contacts material, current density etc.2. Contact support and fixing arrangement on

insulator.3. Bearings, housing of bearings, bushes etc.4. Base plates5. Down pipe, guides joints6. Operating mechanism, aux switch, size and

thickness of box, degree of protection, glandplate, gland etc.

7. Nuts, bolt and fasteners8. Inter locking devices.

Offers without the above information or withincomplete information may be rejected.

ii. All live parts shall be designed to have smoothsurfaces without any sharp points, edges andother corona producing surfaces so as toeliminate corona at specified extinction voltageor at 1.1x Rated voltage if extinction voltage isnot specified.

(xii) FastenersNuts, bolts and washers of 5/8" and higher sizeshall be hot dip galvanised. The bolts used ontapped holes of insulator cap shall be galvanisedby centrifuge process to avoid excess depositionof zinc on threads. Nuts, bolts and washers of lessthan 5/8" size shall be non-magnetic stainlesssteel.

(xiii) ContactsContacts shall be made out of hard drawn rolled/extruded electrolytic grade copper. The contactassembly should be so robustly designed that whilecarrying the rated continuous current thetemperature rise does not increase beyond 650Cover and average ambient temperature of 400Cand peak ambient temperature of 500C. Arcing

79

contacts wherever provided shall close first andopen last. The contacts shall be silver plated (10 to15 microns).

(xiv) Terminal PadIt shall be made out of electrolytic copper heavilysilver plated (15 microns). The terminal pads shallbe suitable for connection to 40x40 mm terminalconnector.

(xv) Mounting of ContactsFixed contacts shall be mounted on 6 mm thick100x50 mm M.S. Galvanised channel welded to10 mm thick M.S. plate with holes for fixing oninsulators. Slots shall be provided for marginaladjustment of height of contacts.

(xvi) Moving BladesContact surface of moving blades shall be heavilysilver plated to 15 microns thick. The surface shallbe wiped during closing and opening operationsto remove any oxide deposition on the contacts.The blades would be made of single length ofrolled/extruded electrolyte grade copper ofadequate size matching with the current carryingcapacity. The blade shall be supported shall besteel angle on MS angle striping of adequatedimensions (40x40x6 mm).

(xvii) Fixed Contact Assembly

The fixed contact element shall be made of rolled/extruded electrolyte grade copper flat and reverseloop type. The contact assembly shall be so robustlydesigned that while carrying the rated continuouscurrent the temperature rise does not increasebeyond 650C over and average ambienttemperature of 400C. The fixed contact assemblyshall be spring-loaded and of high pressure andself aligned type, head guide shall be provided sothat proper rating of contact elements and detailedeven when the blade is out of alignment by ¼ inch.It should be of robust design. The fixed contactassembly shall be designed in such that thepassage of short circuit current for a period onesecond shall not cause any annealing of thecontact. The various part should be finished toensure inter-changeability of similar component.

(xviii) BearingsRotating insulator shall be mounted on a housingwith bearings. Two numbers of bearings with atleast 50 mm ID and 80 mm distance between thebearings shall be provided. The bearings shall beof reputed make and lubricated for lifetime. Otherparts like bushes, joints springs etc shall be sodesigned that no lubrication shall be requiredduring the service.

(xix) Down PipeThe down pipes of A B Switch shall be of at 1.25%I.P.S. G.I. pipe and its length would be such thatwhen the blades of the switch are at height of 20 ft,the operating handle is 3.5 ft from the ground level.Suitable guides shall be provided for intermediatepositions of the down pipe.

(xx) Base

Each base of A B Switch shall be provided with a

rigid base fabricated from steel sections. The baseshal l be suitable for mounting on supportstructures. Fabrication, welding etc shall be doneby suitable jig; templates and devices used forproduction of the base shall be furnished with thecontractor.

(xxi) Supporting Structures / Arcing Horns / PhaseCoupling Bara. The contractor shall quote unit prices for

support structure for the A B Switch offered.These support structures shall be fabricatedout of galvanized steel sections conforming toIS 1239.

b. The support structure shall be suitable formounting operating mechanism and guides. Itshall be designed to withstand short circuitforces, wind pressure, seismic forces etc. alongwith the operating forces, vibrations, shocks etc.at actual site conditions with adequate factor ofsafety.

c. The arcing horn shall be of 8 mm galvanizedsteel rod. One end of each arcing horn shall besoundly wielded to a 25x6 mm steel flat whichin turn shall be fitted to the switch using to 5/16inch dia galvanized bolts and nuts. Arcing hornshall be fitted against one another.

d. The phase coupling bar: The bar required forcoupling the rotation of all the three phase wouldon 1 inc I.P.S. steel pipe in 9 ft length. The fixingarrangement for the phase coupling bar to thecranks and the rotating insulator stacks shallbe such as to permit a smooth movement ofcoupling bar on operation of the switcheswithout and bending/looseness.

(xxii) Terminals & Connectorsa. Terminal: The terminal shall be made of rolled/

extruded electrolytic grade copper flat having across section area equal to that of the blade. Itshall be so constructed that an intimate contactwith the contact element is ensured andprovision is made to bolt with two numbers of3/8 inch dia galvanized bolts and nuts, a castaluminium connector suitable to takeconductors up to the size of ACSR 150 mm2using number 3/8 inch dia bolts and nuts. Theterminal shall be silver coated.

b. Connectors: The cast aluminium connectorsshall be smooth and supplied for the each endof each phase of the switch. The design of theconnector shall be such that at no place itscross sectional area is less than the twice thecross sectional area of the copper blade. Allthe bolts should be galvanized.

(xxiii) Assemblyi. The disconnector shall be fully assembled at

the works of the contractor and all operationsof the fully assembled disconnector shall bechecked at the manufacturers works

(xxiv) Painting, Galvanizing and Climate Proofinga. Al l interiors and exteriors of enclosures,

cabinets and other metal parts shall bethoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales,

80

ANNEXURE-I

List of the relevant standards:a. Indian Standards: 1818, 9921, 2544, 13947, 4691, 325,

4722, 2629, 4759, 2633, 1573, 3033, 2016, 3961,5561, 1554, 5578, 11353,9920

b. IEC: 129, 168,c. Indian Electricity Rules 1956Only the latest versions of all theses standards shall befollowed.

Technical Parameters:S.No. Parameter Unit Requirements1 Rated Freq. Hz. 502 System Neutral Earthing Effectively

earthed3 No. of phase(poles) No. 34 Temp. rise Deg. C As per

standardsIS/IEC

5 Safe duration of overload Minutesa) 150 % of rated currentb) 120 % of rated current

6 Rated voltage KV rms 12

corrosion, grease and other foreign materials.After cleaning two coats of zinc oxide primershall be given by suitable stoving and air dryingetc. Colour of the final paint shall be epoxy lightgray.

b. Paint inside the metallic housing shall be ofanti-condensation type and the paint on outersurfaces shall be suitable for out door condition.

c. Galvanization shall be done after completion ofthe fabrication and should be capable ofpreventing corrosion in view of severe climaticconditions.

d. All ferrous part of the switch shall be hot dipgalvanized as IS: 2629-1969 (as amended upto date). The steel pipe used shall begalvanized in accordance with IS: 4786-1968(as amended up to date)

(xxv) TestsType Tests: The A B Switch shall be type tested asper IS:1818-1972 (as amended up to date) for thefollowing, for which the bidder shall submit the typetest report along with the bid.

a. Impulse voltage dry testb. Temperature rise test of the main contact.c. Measurement of resistance of main contact in

closure position.d. Test to prove the capability of carrying the rated

full load current continuously and short circuit

for some second.e. Mechanical endurance tests.Routine Tests & Acceptance Test:a. All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated

in the relevant standards shall be carried outby the supplier/contractor in presence of ownerrepresentative.

b. Mechanical operation test (Routine test) shallbe conducted on the complete A B switch.

c. Immediately after finalization of the Programmeof type/acceptance/routine testing, the supplier/contractor shall give three weeks advanceintimation to the owner, to enable him to deputehis representative for witnessing the tests.

(xxvi) Inspection

a. The owner may carry out the inspection at anystage of manufacture. The contractor shall grantfree access to owner's representative at areasonable time when the work is in progress.

b. The owner reserves the right to insist forwitnessing the acceptance / routine testing ofthe bought out times.

c. Inspection and acceptance of any equipmentunder this specification by the owner, shall notrelieve the supplier/contractor of his obligationof supplying equipments in accordance withthe specification.

v v v

7 Type of A B Switch (AB) DBCR8 Rated normal current Amps. 4009 Rated short time withstand current KA rms 25

of MS for 3 second10 Rated short circuit make current KA peak 6311 Derating factor unity12 Basic Insulation Level

1) Lightening Impulse withstand voltage KV peaka) Pole to earth & between poles 75b) Across isolating distance 85

2) Rated power freq. withstand voltage KV rmsa) Pole to earth & between poles 28b) Across isolating distance 32

13 Min. creepage distance mm 30014 Special Requirements:

a) A B Switch be required to make or break the line charging currentwhen no significant change in voltage occurs across the isolatingdistance on account of make or break

b) The A B Switch required is not with "Turn and twist mechanism".It must be rotating type.

Material Details:S.No. Description Material Size1 Base Channel MS Galvanized 75x 40 x 6 mm

81

2 Base Support Channel MS Galvanized 75x 40 x 6 mm3 Base for 4th bearing MS Galvanized 75 x 50 x 6 mm4 Tandem pipe GI Pipe 25 NB, class 'B'

3200 mm long5 Down Pipe GI Pipe 50 NB, Class 'B'

1900 mm long6 Earthing Terminal M16, Bolts with Nut7 Support structure MS Galvanized 114 mm OD x

pipe 12 SWGNote: The dimensions/data shown above against materialdetails are for reference of the bidder and indicative only.

LIST OF SPECIFIC STANDARDS:S. No. Name of Test Relevant Standard1 Test on Insulator IS 2544, IEC 1682 Test on terminal connectors IS 55613 Test on Galvanized components IS 26234 Operation tests on operating mechanism IEC 129/IS 9921

& interlocks5 Mechanical Endurance tests on

auxiliary switches

v v v

6.11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR11KV VOLTAGE CLASS SURGE ARRESTORS

6.11.1 SCOPEThe specification covers the design, manufacture,shop & laboratory testing before dispatch, supply,delivery, erection, testing & commissioning of 9kV,static class heavy rating, gapless, metal (zinc) oxidesurge arrestors complete along with clamps,complete fitting and accessories for installation onoutdoor type 11 kV switchgear, transmission lines,transformers etc.

6.11.2 STANDARDS2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of

Surge Arrestors shall comply with IS: 3070 Part-3and other specific requirements stipulated in thespecification. Unless otherwise specified, theequipment, material and processes shall conformto the latest applicable Indian/InternationalStandards as listed hereunder:

IS:2071-1993 : Methods of High Voltage TestingGeneral Definitions & Test

(Part-1) Requirements.IS:2071-1974 : Test Procedures(Part-2)IS:2629-1985 : Recommended Practice for hot

dip galvanizing on Iron & Steel

IS:2633-1986 : Method for Testing uniformity ofcoating of zinc coated Articles.

IS 3070-1993 : Specification for surge arrestorfor alternating current systems.

(Part - 3) Metal-Oxide lightening Arrestorswithout gaps

IS:4759-1996 : Specification for hot dip zinccoating on Structural Steel andOther allied products.

IS:5621-1980 : Hollow Insulators for use inElectrical Equipment.

IS:6209-1982 : Methods of Partial discharge

measurement.IS:6745 : Method for determination of

mass of zinc coating on zinccoated iron and steel articles

ANSI/IEEE-C.62.11 : Metal oxide, Surge Arrestor for(1982) AC Power Circuits.IEE -99-4 : Surge Arrestors

The equipment complying with any otherinternationally accepted standards shall also beconsidered if it ensures performance equivalent toor superior to the Indian Standards.

6.11.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENT(i) The metal oxide gap less Surge Arrestor without

any series or shunt gap shall be suitable forprotection of 11 kV side of DistributionTransformers, associated equipment from voltagesurges resulting from natural disturbance likelightning as well as system disturbances.

(ii) The surge arrestor shall draw negligible currentat operating voltage and at the same time offerleast resistance during the flow of surge current.

(iii) The surge arrestor shall consist of non-linearresistor elements placed in series and housed inelectrical grade porcelain housing / si l iconpolymeric of specified creepage distance.

(iv) The assembly shall be hermetically sealed withsuitable rubber gaskets with effective sealingsystem arrangement to prevent ingress ofmoisture.

(v) The surge arrestor shall be provided with line andearth terminals of suitable size. The ground sideterminal of surge arrestor shall be connectedwith 25x6 mm galvanized strip, one endconnected to the surge arrestor and second endto a separate ground electrode. The contractorshall also recommend the procedure which shallbe followed in providing the earthing/system to the

82

Surge Arrestor.(vi) The surge arrestor shall not operate under power

frequency and temporary over voltage conditionsbut under surge conditions, the surge arrestor shallchange over to the conducting mode.

(vii) The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuitbreaker performing 0-0.3 min-CO-3 min-CO- dutyin the system.

(viii) Surge arrestors shall have a suitable pressure reliefsystem to avoid damage to the porcelain/ siliconpolymeric housing and providing path for flow ofrated fault currents in the event of arrestor failure.

(ix) The reference current of the arrestor shall behigh enough to eliminate the influence of gradingand stray capacitance on the measured referencevoltage.

(x) The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable andthe contractor shall furnish a copy of thermalstability test with the bid.

(xi) The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminalenergy for high surges, external pollution andtransient over voltage and have low losses atoperating voltages.

(xii) The surge arrestor shall be provided with line andearth terminals of suitable size. The line sideterminal shall be suitable for 100 mm2 (code Name:Dog) Aluminimum area, 6/4.72 mm Aluminimum +7/1.75 mm Steel SCA conductor.

6.11.4 ARRESTOR HOUSING(i) The arrestor housing shal l be made up of

porcelain/silicon polymeric housing and shall behomogenous, free from laminations, cavities andother flaws of imperfections that might affect themechanical and dielectric quality. The housingshall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters,burrs and other similar defects.Arrestors shall be complete with insulating bases,fasteners for stacking units together, surgecounters with leakage current meters and terminalconnectors.

(ii) The housing shall be so coordinated that externalflashover shall not occur due to application of anyimpulse or switching surge voltage upto themaximum design value for arrestor. The arrestorsshall not fail due to contamination. The 11kVarrestors housing shall be designed for pressurerelief class as given in Technical Parameters ofthe specification.

(iii) Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurableleakage.

6.11.5 ARRESTOR MOUNTINGThe arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on 4pole/2 pole structure used for pole/plinth mountedtransformer and for incoming and outgoing lines.

6.11.6 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES(i) The surge arrestor shall be complete with

insulating bases, fasteners for stacking unitsalongwith terminal connectors.

(ii) The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosionproof, robust and of adequate size and shall be solocated that incoming and outgoing connectionsare made with minimum possible bends. Thetop metal cap and base of surge arrestor shallbe galvanized. The line terminal shall have a builtin clamping device which can be adjusted for bothhorizontal and vertical take off.

6.11.7 TESTS(i) Test on Surge Arrestors

The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type testedand shall be subjected to routine and acceptancetests in accordance with IS : 3070 (Part-3)-1993.In addition, the suitability of the Surge Arrestorsshall also be established for the following:- Residual voltage test- Reference voltage test- Leakage current at M.C.O.V- P.D. test- Sealing test- Thermal stability test- Aging and Energy capability test- Watt loss testEach metal oxide block shall be tested forguaranteed specific energy capability in additionto routine/acceptance test as per IEC/IS.

(ii) The maximum residual voltages corresponding tonominal discharge current of 5 kA for steep current,impulse residual voltage test, lightning impulseprotection level and switching impulse level shallgenerally conform to Annex-K of IEC-99-4.

(iii) The contractor shall furnish the copies of the typetests and the characteristics curves between theresidual voltage and nominal discharge currentof the offered surge arrestor and powerfrequency voltage v/s time characteristic of thesurge arrestor subsequent to impulse energyconsumption as per clause 6.6 of IS:3070 (Part-3)offered alongwith the bid.

(iv) The surge arrestor housing shall also be typetested and shall be subjected to routine andacceptance tests in accordance with IS :2071.

(v) Galvanization TestAll Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric conditionshall have passed the type tests and be subjectedto routine and acceptance tests in accordancewith IS:2633 & IS 6745.

(vii) Test on Surge Arrestor DisconnectorsThe test shall be performed on surge arrestorswhich are fitted with arrestor disconnector or onthe disconnector assembly alone if its design issuch as to be un-affected by the heating of adjacentparts of the arrestor in its normally installed portionin accordance with IS:3070 (Part-3).

6.11.8 NAME PLATE(i) The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry

83

the following information :- Rated Voltage- Continuous Operation Voltage- Normal discharge current- Pressure relief rated current- Manufacturers Trade Mark- Name of Sub-station- Year of Manufacturer- Name of the manufacture- Name of Scheme: APDRP of MOP, GOI- Name of Client- Purchase Order Number along with date

6.11.9 INSPECTION(i) All tests and inspection shall be made at the

manufacturer's works unless otherwise specificallyagreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaserat the time of placement of purchase order. Themanufacturer shall afford to the inspectorrepresenting the purchaser, all reasonablefacilities, without charge to satisfy him that thematerial being furnished is in accordance withthese specifications. The purchaser reserves theright to get any component/material being used bythe manufacturer of the Surge Arrestor tested fromany recognised test house.

(ii) The inspection by the purchaser or hisauthorised representative shall not relieve thecontractor of his obligation of furnishing equipmentin accordance with the specification.

6.11.10 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALSWithin 15 days of receipt of the order, the successfultenderer shall furnish to the purchaser thefollowing drawings and literature for approval:(i) Outline dimensional drawings of Surge

Arrestor and all accessories.(ii) Assembly drawings and weights of main

component parts.(iii) Drawings of terminal clamps.(iv) Arrangement of earthing lead.(v) Minimum air clearance to be maintained

of line components to ground.(vi) Name plate(vii) Insulating base(viii) Surge monitor(ix) Instructions mannual(x) Drawing showing details of pressure relief

valve(xi) Volt-time characteristics of surge arrestors(xii) Detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain

housing/Silicon polymeric i.e. internaldiameter, external diameter, thickness,height, profile, creepage distance, dry arcingdistance etc.

6.11.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE(i) Quality Assurance Programme

To ensure that the equipment and services underthe scope of this contract, whether manufactured

or performed at contractor's works or at his sub-contractor's permises or at site or at any other placeof work are in accordance with the specification,the contractor shall submit suitable qualityassurance programme with the bid to control suchactivities at all points. Such programmes shall beoutlined by the contractor and shall be finallyaccepted by purchaser after discussions on awardof contract. A quality assurance programmefurnished by the contractor shall generally coverthe following.a) Contractor organisation structure for the

management and Implementation of theproposed quality assurance programme.

b) Documentation control system

c) Qualification data of contractor key personneld) Procedure for purchase of materials, parts,

components and selection of sub-contractorservices including vendor, source inspectionincoming raw material inspection, verificationof material purchased etc.

e) System for shop manufacturing and siteerection controls including process control andfabrication and assembly control.

f) Control of non-conforming items and system/steps for correcting such items.

g) Control of calibration and testing of measuringand testing equipments.

h) Inspection and test procedure both formanufacture and field activities.

i) System for indication and appraisal ofinspection status.

j) System for quality audits

k) System for authorising release of manufacturedproduct to the purchaser

l) System for maintenance of recordsm) System for handling, storage and deliveryn) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality

control procedure adopted for controlling thequality characteristics relevant to each item ofequipment furnished.

(ii) Quality Assurance DocumentThe contractor shall be required to submit thequality assurance documents before despatch ofthe equipment. The authorised representativereserves the carryout Quality Audit and QualitySurveillances of the System and procedures of thecontractor/his vendor's quality management andcontrol activities.

6.11.12 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS(i) The surge arrestors shall conform to the following

standard technical requirements. The Insulationvalues shall be enhanced considering the altitudeof operation & other atmospheric conditions.

System Parametersa. Nominal system voltage 11kVb. Highest system voltage 12 kVc. System earthing Effectively earthed

84

6.12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF AAAC CONDUCTORSEQUIVALENT TO SQUIRREL, WEASEL AND RABBIT CONDUCTORS

systemd. Frequency (Hz) 50

e. Lightning Impulse 75 withstand Voltage (kVP)f. Power frequency 28

withstand Voltage (kV rms)g. Arrestor duty- Connection to system Phase to earth- Type of equipment to be protected kV transformers

& switchgear(ii) Surge Arrestorsa. Type Gapless Metal

oxide outdoor

b. Arrestor rating (kV rms) 9c. Continuous Operating 7.65

voltage (kV rms)d. Nominal Discharge 5

Current Rating (kA)(8x20 micro impulse shape)

e. Long Duration discharge 2

classf. Degree of protection IP 55g. Maximum residual voltage (kV peak)

a) at 5 kA 27b) at 10 kA 30

h. Maximum switching surge 24residual voltage (kVp) at 1kA

i. Partial discharge at 1.05 COV 50

not greater than (PC)

j. Energy capability corresponding to- Arrestor rating (Kj/Kv) 4.5

- COV (Kj/Kv) 4.9k. High current impulse 100

withstand voltage at5 kA (kVp)

(iii) Insulator Housinga. Power frequency withstand 28

test voltage (Wet) (kV rms)b. Lightning impulse withstand/ 75

tests voltage (kVP)c. Creepage distance not less 300

thand. Pressure relief class 40

(iv) Galvanisationa. Fabricated Steel Aticles

a) 5 mm thick cover 610 g/m2

b) Under 5 mm but not less than2 mm thickness 460 g/m2

c) Under 2 mm but not less than

1.2 mm thickness 340 g/m2

b. Castings Grey Iron,malleable iron 610 g/m2

c. Threaded works other thantubes & tube fittingsa) Under 10 mm dia 300 g/m2

b) 10 mm dia & above 270 g/m2

v v v

6.12.1 Details of Conductors The AAAC Conductors shall generally conformto IS: 398 (Part-IV), IEC:104-1987 except whereotherwise specified herein.The details of the AAAC Conductors of various

1. AAAC conductor Equivalent ACSR Squirrelconductora) Code name : AAACb) Stranding and wire : 7/2.00 mm

Al diac) Number of Strands : 7d) Total sectional area : 22 sqmm.e) Overall diameter : 6.00 mm.f) Approximate mass : 60.16 kg/km.h) Calculated D.C. : 1.5410 ohm/

resistance at 20 deg. km.Centigrade maximum

i) Apprx. Calculated : 6.45 kN.breaking load(Minimum UTS)

j) Direction of lay of outer : Right hand.layer

k) Modulus of Elasticity : 0.6x106Kg/cm2

l) Co-efficient of Linear : 23.0x10-6expansion (Per °C)

m) Details of aluminium strand:i) Minimum breaking : 0.97 kN

load of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 0.92 kN

85

load of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 10.653 Ohms/resistance of strand kmat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 8.482 kg/km2. AAAC conductor Equivalent ACSR Weasel

conductora) Code name : AAACb) Stranding and wire : 7/2.50 mm

Al diac) Number of Strands : 7d) Total sectional area : 34.00 sqmm.e) Overall diameter : 7.50 mm.f) Approximate mass : 94 kg/km.h) Calculated D.C. : 0.9900 ohm/

resistance at 20 deg. km.Centigrade maximum

i) Apprx. Calculated : 10.11 kN.breaking load(Minimum UTS)

j) Direction of lay of outer : Right hand. layer

k) Modulus of Elasticity : 0.6x106Kg/cm2

l) Co-efficient of Linear : 23.0x10-6expansion (Per °C)

m) Details of aluminum strand:i) Minimum breaking : 1.52 kN

load of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 1.44 kNload of strand after stranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 6.845 Ohms/resistance of strand kmat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 13.25 kg/km

3. AAAC conductor Equivalent ACSR Rabbitconductor a) Code name : AAACb) Stranding and wire : 7/3.15 mm

Al diac) Number of Strands : 7d) Total sectional area : 55.00 sqmm.e) Overall diameter : 9.45 mm.f) Approximate mass : 149.2 kg/km.g)h) Calculated D.C. : 0.6210 ohm/

resistance at 20 deg. km.Centigrade maximum

i) Apprx. Calculated : 16.03 kN.breaking load(Minimum UTS)

j) Direction of lay of : Right hand.outer layer

k) Modulus of Elasticity : 0.6324x106Kg/cm2

l) Co-efficient of Linear : 23.0x10-6expansion (Per °C)

m) Details of aluminum strand:i) Minimum breaking : 2.41 kN

load of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 2.29 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 4.290 Ohms/resistance of strand kmat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 21.04 kg/km6.12.2 Workmanshipa. All the Al-alloy strands shall be smooth, uniform

and free from all imperfections, such as spills andsplits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, etc., afterdrawing and also after stranding.

b. The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact,uniform and free from all imperfections includingkinks (protrusion of wires), scuff marks, dents,pressmarks, cut marks, wire cross over, over riding,looseness (wire being dislocated by finger/handpressure and/or unusual bangle noise on tapping),material inclusions, white rust, powder formationor black spot (on account of reaction with trappedrain water etc.), dirt, grit etc.

(ii) Joints in Wiresa. There will be no joint in any wire of the conductor,

except those made in the base rod or wire beforefinal drawing.

(iii) Creep in ConductorCreep in a conductor is attributed partly tosettlement of strands and partly due to non-elasticelongation of metal when subjected to load. Themanufacturer of conductor shall furnish the amountof creep, which will take place in 10, 20, 30, 40 and50 years along with the supporting calculations.The calculations should be based on everydaytemperature of 32oC and everyday tension of 25%of UTS of conductor of 11/0.433 kV lines.

(iv) StrandingIn all constructions, the successive layers shall bestranded in opposite directions. The wires in eachlayer shall be evenly and closely stranded roundthe underlying wire or wires. The outer most layerof wires shall have a right hand lay. The lay ratio ofany layer shall not be greater than the lay ratio ofthe layer immediately beneath it.

(v) TolerancesThe manufacturing tolerances to the extent of thefollowing limits only shall be permitted in thediameter of individual strands and lay-ratio of theconductor :

(vii) a) Diameter of Aluminum alloy StrandsStandard Maximum Minimum

86

For AAAC Equivalent to ACSR "SQURIEL" Conductor2.00 mm 1.98 mm 2.02 mm

For AAAC Equivalent to ACSR "WEASEL" Conductor2.50 mm 2.47 mm 2.53 mm

For AAAC Equivalent to ACSR "RABBIT" Conductor3.15 mm 3.12 mm 3.18 mm

b) Lay ratio of ConductorMaximum Minimum

Aluminum Alloy3/6 wire layer 14 10

(viii) Materialsa. Aluminium Alloy

The wire shall be of heat treated aluminum,magnesium silicon alloy having a compositionappropriate to the mechanical & electricalproperties as specified in IS 398(Part-4).The Aluminum Alloy strands drawn from heattreated aluminium alloy redraw rods conformingto Type B as per IEC:104-1987. Following shall bethe chemical composition of redraw rods:

Elements PercentSi 0.50-0.90Mg 0.60-0.90Fe 0.50 maxCu 0.10 maxMn 0.03 maxCr 0.03 maxZn 0.10 max

B 0.06 maxOther Element (Each) 0.03 maxOther Element (Total) 0.10 maxAl Remainder

(ix) Standard Lengtha. The Bidder shall offer the standard length in his

bid. The standard length of the conductor shall be500 meters. Contractor shall indicate the standardlength of the conductor to be offered by them. Atolerance of +/-5% on the standard length offeredby the Bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outsidethis limit of tolerance shall be treated as randomlengths. For evaluation purpose all standard lengthguaranteed by the bidder shall be treated at par.

b. Random lengths will be accepted provided nolength is less than 70% of the standard length andthe total quantity of such random lengths shall notbe more than 10% of the total quantity ordered.

c. Bidder shall also indicate the maximum singlelength, above the standard length, he canmanufacture in the guaranteed technicalparticulars of offer. The Owner reserves the right toplace orders for the above lengths on the sameterms and conditions applicable for the standardlengths during the pendaency of the Contract.

d. Qualifying Requirement of Conductor Manufacturer/SupplierThe manufacturer should have manufactured,tested and supplied at least one thousand (1000)kms. of 7 or above strands AAAC conductor in thelast five (5) years as on the date of bid opening.

6.12.3 TESTS AND STANDARDS(i) Type Tests

The following tests shall be conducted once on asample/samples of conductor (AAAC) for every 750Kms. of production from each manufacturing facility:(a) UTS test on stranded )

conductor ) Annexure-A(b) DC resistance test on )

stranded conductor )(ii) Acceptance Tests

(a) Visual check for joints ) Annexure - Ascratches etc. and length )measurement of conductor )by rewinding )

(c) Dimensional check on )Al-alloy strands )

(d) Check for lay-ratio )(e) Elongation test ) Annexure - A(g) Breaking load/tensile test on )

Aluminum alloy strands )(h) DC resistance test on )

Aluminum alloy strands )Wrap test on ) IEC 104,Aluminum alloy strands ) IEC 1089Visual and dimensional )check on drum ) IS:1778-1980

(iii) Routine Test(a) Check to ensure that there are no joints.(b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the

strands.(c) Check that drums are as per Specification.(d) All acceptance test as mentioned above to be

carried out on each coil.(iv) Tests During Manufacture

(a) Chemical analysis of )Aluminum alloy used for )making strands ) Annexure-A

(v) Testing Expenses

a. The break-up of the testing charges for the typetests specified shall be indicated separately.

b. Contractor shall indicate the laboratories in whichthey propose to conduct the type tests. They shallensure that adequate facilities are available in thelaboratories and the tests can be completed inthese laboratories within the time scheduleguaranteed by them.

c. In case of failure in any type test, the Contractor iseither required to manufacture fresh sample lotand repeat all the tests successfully once or repeatthat particular type test three times successfully onthe sample selected from the alreadymanufactured lot at his own expenses. In case afresh lot is manufactured for testing, then the lotalready manufactured shall be rejected.

d. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance androutine tests and Tests during manufacture

87

specified herein shall be treated as included in thequoted unit price of conductor, except for theexpenses of the inspector/Owner's representative.

e. In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type testsare required to be conducted, then all the expensesfor deputation of Inspector/Owner's representativeshall be deducted from the contract price. Also if onreceipt of the Contractor's notice of testing, theOwner's representative does not find 'PLANT' to beready for testing the expenses incurred by theOwner for re-deputation shall be deducted fromcontract price.

(vi) Additional Testsa. The Owner reserves the right of having at his own

expenses any other test(s) of reasonable naturecarried out at Contractor's premises, at site or inany other place in addition to the aforesaid type,acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself thatthe materials comply with the Specifications.

b. The Owner also reserves the right to conduct allthe tests mentioned in this specification at his ownexpense on the samples drawn from the site atContractor's premises or at any other test centre.In case of evidence of non-compliance, it shall bebinding on the part of Contractor to prove thecompliance of the items to the technicalspecifications by repeat tests, or correction ofdeficiencies, or replacement of defective items allwithout any extra cost to the Owner.

(vii) Sample Batch For Type Testinga. The Contractor shall offer material for selection of

samples for type testing only after getting QualityAssurance Plan approved from Owner's QualityAssurance Deptt. The sample shall bemanufactured strictly in accordance with the QualityAssurance Plan approved by Owner.

b. The Contractor shall offer at least three drums forselection of sample required for conducting all thetype tests.

c. The Contractor is required to carry out all theacceptance tests successfully in presence ofOwner's representative before sample selection.

(viii) Test Reportsa. Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at

least six copies along with one original. One copywill be returned duly certified by the Owner onlyafter which the commercial production of thematerial shall start.

b. Record of routine test reports shall be maintainedby the Supplier at his works for periodic inspectionby the Owner's representative.

c. Test Certificates of tests during manufacture shallbe maintained by the Contractor. These shall beproduced for verification as and when desired bythe Owner.

(ix) Inspectiona. The Owner's representative shall at all times be

entitled to have access to the works and all placesof manufacture, where conductor shall bemanufactured and representative shall have fullfacil it ies for unrestricted inspection of the

Contractor's works, raw materials and process ofmanufacture for conducting necessary tests asdetailed herein.

b. The Contractor shall keep the Owner informed inadvance of the time of starting and of the progressof manufacture of conductor in its various stagesso that arrangements can be made for inspection.

c. No material shall be dispatched from its point ofmanufacture before it has been satisfactorilyinspected and tested, unless the inspection iswaived off by the Owner in writing. In the latter casealso, the conductor shall be dispatched only aftersatisfactory testing for all tests specified herein havebeen completed.

d. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall inno way relieve the Contractor of any of hisresponsibilities for meeting all requirements of theSpecification, and shall not prevent subsequentrejection if such material is later found to bedefective.

(x) Test FacilitiesThe following additional test facilities shall beavailable at the Contractor's works:a) Calibration of various testing and measuring

equipment including tensile testing machine,resistance measurement facilities, burette,thermometer, barometer etc.

b) Standard resistance for calibration ofresistance bridges.

c) Finished conductor shall be checked for lengthverification and surface finish on separaterewinding machine at reduced speed (variablefrom 8 to 16 meters per minute). The rewindingfacilities shall have appropriate clutch systemand free of vibrations, jerks etc. with traverselaying facilities.

(xii) Packinga. The conductor shall be supplied in non-

returnable, strong, wooden drums provided withlagging of adequate strength, constructed toprotect the conductor against any damage anddisplacement during transit, storage andsubsequent handling and stringing operationsin the field. The Contractor shall be responsiblefor any loss or damage during transportationhandling and storage due to improper packing.The drums shall generally conform to IS:1778-1980, except as otherwise specified hereinafter.

b. The drums shall be suitable for wheel mountingand for letting off the conductor under aminimum controlled tension of the order of 5KN.

c. The Contractor should submit their proposeddrum drawings along with the bid.

d. The Contractor may offer more than one lengthof the conductor in a single drum.

e. All wooden components shall be manufacturedout of seasoned soft wood free from defectsthat may materially weaken the component partsof the drums. Preservative treatment shall beapplied to the entire drum with preservatives of

88

a quality, which is not harmful to the conductor.f. The flanges shall be of two ply construction with

a total thickness of 64 mm with each ply at rightangles to the adjacent ply and nailed together.The nails shall be driven from the inside faceflange, punched and then clenched on the outerface. Flange boards shall not be less than thenominal thickness by more than 2mm. Thereshall not be less than 2 nails per board in eachcircle. Where a slot is cut in the flange to receivethe inner end of the conductor the entranceshall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.

g. The wooden battens used for making the barrelof the conductor shall be of segmental type.These shall be nailed to the barrel supportswith at least two nails. The battens shall beclosely butted and shall provide a round barrelwith smooth external surface. The edges of thebattens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoidh. Barrel studs shall be used for theconstruction of drums. The flanges shall beholed and the barrel supports slotted to receivethem. The barrel studs shall be threaded overa length on either end, sufficient toaccommodate washers, spindle plates andnuts for fixing flanges at the required spacing.

i. Normally, the nuts on the studs shall standprotruded of the flanges. All the nails used onthe inner surface of the flanges and the drumbarrel shall be counter sunk. The ends of barrelshall generally be flushed with the top of thenuts.

j. The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrelsurface shall be painted with a bitumen basedpaint.

k. Before reeling, card board or double corrugatedor thick bituminous water-proof bamboo papershall be secured to the drum barrel and insideof flanges of the drum by means of a suitablecommercial adhesive material. The papershould be dried before use. Medium grade Kraftpaper shall be used in between the layers ofthe conductor. After reeling the conductor, theexposed surface of the outer layer of conductorshall be wrapped with water proof thickbituminous bamboo paper to preserve theconductor from dirt, grit and damage duringtransport and handling.

l. A minimum space of 75 mm for conductor shallbe provided between the inner surface of theexternal protective tagging and outer layer ofthe conductor. Outside the protective lagging,there shal l be minimum of two bindersconsisting of hoop iron/ galvanized steel wire.Each protective lagging shall have tworecesses to accommodate the binders.

m. Each batten shall be securely nailed acrossgrains as far as possible to the flange, edgeswith at least 2 nails per end. The length of thenails shall not be less than twice the thicknessof the battens. The nails shall not protrude abovethe general surface and shall not have exposedsharp, edges or allow the battens to be

released due to corrosion.n. The nuts on the barrel studs shall be tack

welded on the one side in order to fully securethem. On the second end, a spring washer shallbe used.

o. A steel collar shall be used to secure all barrelstuds. This collar shall be located between thewashers and the steal drum and secured tothe central steel plate by welding.

p. Outside the protective lagging, there shall beminimum of two binder consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective laggingshall have two recesses to accommodate thebinders.

q. The conductor ends shall be properly sealedand secured with the help of U-nail on the sideof one of the flanges to avoid loosening of theconductor layers during transit and handling.

r. As an alternative to wooden drum Contractormay also supply the conductors in non-returnable painted steel drums. After preparationof steel surface according to IS : 9954, syntheticenamel paint shall be applied after applicationof one coat of primer. Wooden/Steel drum willbe treated at par for evaluation purpose andaccordingly the Contractor should quote in thepackage.

(xii) MarkingEach drum shall have the following informationstenciled on it in indelible ink along with otheressential data :(a) Contract/Award letter number.(b) Name and address of consignee.(c) Manufacturer's name and address.(d) Drum and lot number(e) Size and type of conductor(f) Length of conductor in meters(g) Arrow marking for unwinding(h) Position of the conductor ends(i) Number of turns in the outer most layer.(j) Gross weight of drum after putting lagging.(k) Average weight of the drum without lagging.(l) Net weight of the conductor in the drum.(m)Month and year of manufacture of conductor

The above should be indicated in the packinglist also.

(xiii) Verification of Conductor LengthThe Owner reserves the right to verity the lengthof conductor after unreeling at least ten (10)percent of the drums in a lot offered forinspection.

(xiv) Standardsa. The conductor shall conform to the following

Indian/International Standards, which shallmean latest revisions, with amendments/changes adopted and published, unlessspecifically stated otherwise in theSpecification.

b. In the event of the supply of conductor

89

conforming to standards other than specified,the Bidder shall confirm in his bid that thesestandards are equivalent to those specified. Incase of award, salient features of comparisonbetween the standards proposed by theContractor and those specified in this documentwill be provided by the Contractor to establishtheir equivalence.

Sl. Indian Title InternationalNo. Standard Standards

1. IS:398 (Part-IV) Aluminum Alloy IEC : 208-1966stranded conductor BS-3242-1970

2 IS : 9997-1988 Aluminum Alloy IEC 104-1987Redraw Rods

3 IS : 1778-1980 Reels and Drums BS:1559-1949for Bare Conductors

v v v

ANNEXURE-A

1.0 TESTS ON AAAC CONDUCTORS1.1 UTS Test on Stranded Conductor

Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductorshall be marked at two places on a sample ofconductor of minimum 5 m length between fixingarrangement suitably fixed on a tensile testingmachine. The load shall be increased at a steadyrate upto 50% of minimum specified UTS and heldfor one minute. The circles drawn shall not bedistorted due to relative movement of strands.Thereafter the load shall be increased at steadyrate to minimum UTS and held for one minute. TheConductor sample shall not fail during this period.The applied load shall then be increased until thefailing load is reached and the value recorded.

1.2 D.C. Resistance Test on Stranded ConductorOn a conductor sample of minimum 5m lengthtwo contact-clamps shall be f ixed with apredetermined bolt torque. The resistance shallbe measured by a Kelvin double bridge by placingthe clamps initially zero meter and subsequentlyone meter apart. The test shall be repeated at leastfive times and the average value recorded. Thevalue obtained shall be corrected to the value at20°C as per IS:398-(Part-V)-1982. The resistancecorrected at 20oC shall conform to therequirements of this Specification.

1.3 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium alloy

Samples taken from the Aluminium alloy ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/spectrographicallyanalyzed. The same shall be in conformity to therequirements stated in this Specification.

1.4 Visual and Dimensional Check on DrumsThe drums shall be visually and dimensionallychecked to ensure that they conform to therequirements of this Specification.

1.5 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc.Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presenceof the Owner. The Owner shall visually check forscratches, joints etc. and that the conductorgenerally conforms to the requirements of thisSpecification. Ten percent (10%) drums from eachlot shall be rewound in the presence of the Owner's

representative.1.6 Dimensional Check on Aluminum alloy Strands

The individual strands shall be dimensionallychecked to ensure that they conform to therequirement of this Specification.

1.7 Check for Lay-ratios of Various LayersThe lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked toensure that they conform to the requirements ofthis Specification.

1.8 Torsion and Elongation Tests on Aluminum alloyStrandsThe test procedures shall be as per clause No.10.3 of IEC : 888. In torsion test, the number ofcomplete twists before fracture shall not be lessthan 18 on a length equal to 100 times the standarddiameter of the strand. In case test sample lengthis less or more than 100 times the strandeddiameter of the strand, the minimum number oftwists will be proportioned to the length and ifnumber comes in the fraction then it will be roundedoff to next higher whole number. In elongation test,the elongation of the strand shall not be less than4% for a gauge length of 250 mm.

1.9 Check on Barrel Batten strength of Drums

The details regarding barrel batten strength testwill be discussed and mutually agreed to by theContractor & Owner in the Quality AssuranceProgramme.

2.0 Breaking load test on individual Aluminium alloywiresThe test shall be conducted on Aluminum alloywires. The breaking load of one specimen cut fromeach of the samples taken shall be determined bymeans of suitable tensile testing machine. Theload shall be applied gradually and the rate ofseparation of the jaws of the testing machine shallbe not less than 25 mm/min. and not greater than100 mm./ min. The ultimate breaking load of thespecimens shall be not less than the valuesspecified in the Specification.

2.1 Resistance test on Aluminium alloy wireThe test shall be conducted on aluminium alloywires only, conforming to procedure as per IEC:889. The electrical resistance of one specimen ofaluminium wire cut from each of the samples taken

90

shall be measured at ambient temperature. Themeasured resistance shall be corrected to thevalue corresponding to 20 degree C. by means offollowing formula.

1R20 = RT -------------------

1+alpha x (T-20)Where R20 = Resistance corrected at 20

degrees C.

RT = Resistance measured at Tdegrees C.

alpha = Constant mass temperaturecoefficient of resistance 0.004.

T = Ambient temperature duringmeasurement

This resistance calculated to 20 degrees C. shallbe not more than the maximum value specified inthe specification.

6.13.1 Details of ConductorsThe ACSR Conductors shall generally conformto IEC : 1089 or IS : 398 (Part-II-1996) exceptwhere otherwise specified herein.The details of the ACSR Conductors of varioussizes are given below :

1 ACSR Rabbit conductora) Code name : Rabbit ACSRb) Stranding and wire : 6/3.35 mm Al dia

1/ 3.35 mm steel diac) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 1Aluminium layer : 6

d) Sectional area of : 52.88 sqmm.aluminium

e) Total sectional area : 61.70 sqmm.f) Overall diameter : 10.05 mmg) Approximate mass : 214 kg/kmh) Calculated D.C. : 0.5524 ohm/km

resistance at 20 deg.Centigrade

i) Minimum UTS : 18.25 kNj) Direction of lay of : Right hand

outer layerk) Modulus of Elasticity : 8055 Kg/mm2l) Co-efficient of Linear : 19.1x10-6

expansion (Per °C)m) Details of aluminium strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 1.43 kNload of strandbefore stranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 1.36 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 3.265 Ohms/kmresistance of strandat 20 deg. Centigrade

v v v

6.13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF ACSR CONDUCTORS(RABBIT, RACOON, DOG, WOLF, PANTHER)

iv) Weight : 23.82 kg/kmn) Details of steel strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 11.58 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 11.00 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Weight : 68.75 kg/kmiv) Minimum number of twists:

to be withstood in torsiontest when tested on a guagelength of 100 times diameterof wire

a) Before stranding : 18b) After stranding : 16

2 ACSR RACOON conductora) Code name : RACOON ACSRb) Stranding and wire : 6/4.09mm Al dia

1/ 4.09mm steel diac) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 1Aluminium layer : 6

d) Sectional area of : 78.83 sqmm.aluminium

e) Total sectional area : 91.97 sqmm.f) Overall diameter : 12.27 mmg) Approximate mass : 319 kg/kmh) Calculated D.C. : 0.3712 ohm/km

resistance at20 deg. Centigrade

i) Minimum UTS : 26.91 kNj) Direction of lay of : Right hand

outer layerk) Modulus of Elasticity : 8055 Kg/mm2l) Co-efficient of Linear : 19.1x106

expansion (Per °C)m) Details of aluminium strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 2.08 kNload of strand before

91

strandingii) Minimum breaking : 1.98 kN

load of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 2.208 Ohms/kmresistance of strandat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 35.51 kg/kmn) Details of steel strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 17.27 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 16.41kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Weight : 102.48 kg/kmiv) Minimum number of twists :

to be withstood in torsiontest when tested on aguage length of 100times diameter of wirea) Before stranding : 18b) After stranding : 16

3 ACSR DOG conductora) Code name : DOG ACSRb) Stranding and wire : 6/4.72mm Al dia

7/ 1.57mm steel diac) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 11st Steel layer : 61st Aluminium layer : 6

d) Sectional area of : 105 sqmm.aluminium

e) Total sectional area : 118.5 sqmm.f) Overall diameter : 14.15 mmg) Approximate mass : 394 kg/kmh) Calculated D.C. : 0.2792 ohm/km

resistance at 20 deg.Centigrade

i) Minimum UTS : 32.41 kNj) Direction of lay of : Right hand

outer layerk) Modulus of Elasticity : 8055 Kg/mm2l) Co-efficient of Linear : 19.8 x 106

expansion (Per °C)m) Details of aluminium strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 2.78 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 2.64 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 1.65 Ohms/kmresistance of strandat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 47.30 kg/km

n) Details of steel strand:i) Minimum breaking : 2.7 kN

load of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 2.57 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Weight : 15.10 kg/kmiv) Minimum number of twists :

to be withstood in torsiontest when tested on a guagelength of 100 times diameterof wirea) Before stranding : 18b) After stranding : 16

4 ACSR WOLF conductora) Code name : WOLF ACSRb) Stranding and wire : 30/2.59mm Al dia

7 / 2.59 mm steel diac) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 11st Steel layer : 61st Aluminium layer : 122nd Aluminium layer : 18

d) Sectional area of : 158.1 sqmm.aluminium

e) Total sectional area : 194.9 sqmm.f) Overall diameter : 18.13 mmg) Approximate mass : 726 kg/kmh) Calculated D.C. : 0.1871 ohm/km

resistance at 20 deg.Centigrade

i) Minimum UTS : 67.34 kNj) Direction of lay of : Right hand

outer layerk) Modulus of Elasticity : 8055 Kg/mm2l) Co-efficient of Linear : 17.8 x 106

expansion (Per °C)m) Details of aluminium strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 0.89 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 0.85 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 5.49 Ohms/kmresistance of strandat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 14.24 kg/kmn) Details of steel strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 6.92 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 6.57 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Weight : 41.09 kg/km

92

iv) Minimum number of twists :to be withstood in torsiontest when tested on a guagelength of 100 times diameterof wirea) Before stranding : 18b) After stranding : 16

5 ACSR PANTHER conductora) Code name : PANTHER ACSRb) Stranding and wire : 30/3.00mm Al dia

7/ 3.00mm steel diac) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 11st Steel layer : 61st Aluminium layer : 122nd Aluminium layer : 18

d) Sectional area of : 212.1 sqmm.aluminium

e) Total sectional area : 261.5 sqmm.f) Overall diameter : 21.00 mmg) Approximate mass : 974 kg/kmh) Calculated D.C. : 0.139 ohm/km

resistance at 20 deg.Centigrade

i) Minimum UTS : 89.67 kNj) Direction of lay of : Right hand

outer layerk) Modulus of Elasticity : 8158 Kg/mm2l) Co-efficient of Linear : 17.8 x 106

expansion (Per °C)m) Details of aluminium strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 1.17 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 1.11 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Maximum D.C. : 4.079 Ohms/kmresistance of strandat 20 deg. Centigrade

iv) Weight : 19.11 kg/kmn) Details of steel strand:

i) Minimum breaking : 9.29 kNload of strand beforestranding

ii) Minimum breaking : 8.83 kNload of strand afterstranding

iii) Weight : 55.13 kg/kmiv) Minimum number of twists :

to be withstood in torsiontest when tested on a guagelength of 100 times diameterof wirea) Before stranding : 18b) After stranding : 16

6.13.2 Workmanship

a. All the aluminium and steel strands shall besmooth, uniform and free from all imperfections,such as spills and splits, die marks, scratches,abrasions, etc., after drawing and also afterstranding.

b. The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact,uniform and free from all imperfections includingkinks (protrusion of wires), scuff marks, dents,pressmarks, cutmarks, wire cross over, over riding,looseness (wire being dislocated by finger/handpressure and/or unusual bangle noise on tapping),material inclusions, white rust, powder formationor black spot (on account of reaction with trappedrain water etc.), dirt, grit etc.

c. The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised andshall have a minimum zinc coating of 250 gms/sq.m. after stranding. The zinc coating shall besmooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free fromimperfections and shall withstand minimum twoand half dips in standard Preece test. The steelwire rods shall be of such quality and purity that,when drawn to the size of the strands specifiedand coated with zinc, the finished strands and theindividual wires shall be of uniform quality and havethe same properties and characteristics asrequired in the specification.

d. The steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent spreading of strands inthe event of cutting of composite core wire. Careshall be taken to avoid, damages to galvanisationduring pre-forming and post-forming operation.

6.13.3 Joints in Wires(i) Aluminium Wiresa. During stranding, no aluminium wire welds shall

be made for the purpose of achieving the requiredconductor length.

b. No joints shall be permitted in the outer layer of thefinished conductor. However joints are permittedin the 12 wire and 18 wire inner layer of theconductor unavoidably broken during stranding,provided such breaks are not associated with eitherinherently defective wire or with the use of shortlengths of aluminium wires. Such joints shall notbe more than four (4) per conductor length andshall not be closer than 15 meters from joint in thesame wire or in any other aluminium wire of thecompleted conductor.

c. Joints shall be made by cold pressure butt weldingand shall withstand a stress of not less than thebreaking strength of individual strand guaranteed.

(ii) Steel WiresThere shall be no joint of any kind in the finishedwire entering into the manufacture of the strand.There shall also be no strand joints or strandsplices in any length of the completed strandedsteel core of the conductor.

6.13.4 Creep in ConductorCreep in a conductor is attributed partly tosettlement of strands and partly due to non-elasticelongation of metal when subjected to load. Themanufacturer of conductor shall furnish the amount

93

of creep which will take place in 10, 20, 30, 40 and50 years along with the supporting calculations.The calculations should be based on everydaytemperature of 32oC and everyday tension of 25%of UTS of conductor of 11/33 kV lines.

6.13.5 StrandingIn all constructions, the successive layers shallbe stranded in opposite directions. The wires ineach layer shall be evenly and closely strandedround the underlying wire or wires. The outer mostlayer of wires shall have a right hand lay. The ratioof the different layers shall be within the limits givenin IS: 328 (Part-II).

6.13.6 TolerancesThe manufacturing tolerances to the extent of thefollowing limits only shall be permitted in thediameter of individual aluminium and steel strandsand lay-ratio of the conductor:

(i) For ACSR "RABBIT" Conductora) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands

Standard Maximum MinimumAluminium 3.35 mm 3.38 mm 3.32 mmSteel 3.35 mm 3.42 mm 3.28 mmb) Lay ratio of Conductor

Maximum MinimumAluminium 6 wire layer 14 10

(ii) For ACSR "RACOON" Conductora) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands

Standard Maximum MinimumAluminium 4.09 mm 4.13 mm 4.05 mmSteel 4.09 mm 4.17 mm 4.01 mmb) Lay ratio of Conductor

Maximum MinimumAluminium 6 wire layer 14 10

(iii) For ACSR "DOG" Conductora) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands

Standard Maximum MinimumAluminium 4.72 mm 4.77 mm 4.67 mmSteel 1.57 mm 1.60 mm 1.54 mmb) Lay ratio of Conductor

Maximum MinimumSteel 6 wire layer 28 13Aluminium 6 wire layer 14 10

(iv) For ACSR "WOLF" Conductora) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands

Standard Maximum MinimumAluminium 2.59 mm 2.62 mm 2.56 mmSteel 2.59 mm 2.64 mm 2.54 mmb) Lay ratio of Conductor

Maximum MinimumSteel 6 wire layer 28 13Aluminium 6 wire layer 14 10

18 wire layer 16 10(v) For ACSR "PANTHER" Conductor

a) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel StrandsStandard Maximum Minimum

Aluminium 3.00 mm 3.03 mm 2.97 mmSteel 3.00 mm 3.06 mm 2.94 mm

b) Lay ratio of ConductorMaximum Minimum

Steel 6 wire layer 28 13Aluminium 6 wire layer 14 10

18 wire layer 16 10

6.13.7 Materials(i) Aluminium

The aluminium strands shall be hard drawn fromelectrolytic aluminium rods of EC grade havingpurity not less than 99.5% and a copper contentnot exceeding 0.04%. They shall have the sameproperties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:889-1987.

(ii) SteelThe steel wire strands shall be drawn from highcarbon steel wire rods produced by either the acidor the basic open-hearth process, or the electricfurnace process, or the basic oxygen process andshall conform to the following requirements as tothe chemical composition:Element - % CompositionCarbon - 0.50 to 0.85Manganese - 0.50 to 1.10Phosphorous - Not more than 0.035Sulphur - Not more than 0.045Silicon - 0.10 to 0.35The Steel wire strands shall have the sameproperties and characteristics as prescribed forregular strength steel wire in IEC : 888-1987.

(iii) ZincThe zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolyticHigh Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conformto and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.

1.8 Standard Lengtha. The standard length of the conductor shall be 2000

meters. Contractor shall indicate the standardlength of the conductor to be offered by them. Atolerance of +/-5% on the standard length offeredby the Bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outsidethis limit of tolerance shall be treated as randomlengths.

b. Random lengths will be accepted provided nolength is less than 70% of the standard length andthe total quantity of such random lengths shall notbe more than 10% of the total quantity ordered.

c. Bidder shall also indicate the maximum singlelength, above the standard length, he canmanufacture in the guaranteed technicalparticulars of offer. This is required for specialstretches like river crossing etc. The Ownerreserves the right to place orders for the abovelengths on the same terms and condit ionsapplicable for the standard lengths during thependency of the Contract.

6.13.8TESTS AND STANDARDS(i) Type Tests

The following tests shall be conducted once on asample/samples of conductor for every 750 Kms.

94

of production from each manufacturing facility:(a) UTS test on stranded )

conductor ) Annexure-A(b) DC resistance test on )

stranded conductor )(ii) Acceptance Tests

(a) Visual and dimensional )check on drum )

(b) Visual check for joints ) Annexure - Ascratches etc. and length )measurement of )conductor by rewinding )

(c) Dimensional check on )steel and aluminium strands )

(d) Check for lay-ratio ) Annexure - A(e) Galvanising test on steel )

strands )(f) Torsion and Elongation )

tests on steel strands )(g) Breaking load test on )

steel and Aluminium strands )(h) Wrap test on steel & ) IS : 398

Aluminium strands )(i) DC resistance test on )

Aluminium strands )(j) Procedure qualification )

test on welded joint of ) Annexure-AAluminium strands )

Note : All the above tests except (j) shall be carriedout on aluminium and steel strands after strandingonly.

(iii) Routine Test(a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per

Specification.(b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the

strands.(c) Check that drums are as per Specification.(d) All acceptance test as mentioned above to be

carried out on each coil.(iv) Tests During Manufacture

(a) Chemical analysis of zinc )used for galvanizing )

(b) Chemical analysis of )Aluminium used for )making Aluminium strands ) Annexure-A

(c) Chemical analysis of steel )used for making steel strands )

(v) Testing Expensesa. The break-up of the testing charges for the type

tests specified shall be indicated separately.b. Contractor shall indicate the laboratories in which

they propose to conduct the type tests. They shallensure that adequate facilities are available in thelaboratories and the tests can be completed inthese laboratories within the time scheduleguaranteed by them.

c. In case of failure in any type test, the Contractor iseither required to manufacture fresh sample lotand repeat all the tests successfully once or repeatthat particular type test three times successfully onthe sample selected from the already

manufactured lot at his own expenses. In case afresh lot is manufactured for testing, then the lotalready manufactured shall be rejected.

d. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance androutine tests and Tests during manufacturespecified herein shall be treated as included in thequoted unit price of conductor, except for theexpenses of the inspector/Owner's representative.

e. In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type testsare required to be conducted, then all the expensesfor deputation of Inspector/Owner's representativeshall be deducted from the contract price. Also if onreceipt of the Contractor's notice of testing, theOwner's representative does not find 'PLANT' to beready for testing the expenses incurred by theOwner for re-deputation shall be deducted fromcontract price.

(vi) Additional Testsa. The Owner reserves the right of having at his own

expenses any other test(s) of reasonable naturecarried out at Contractor's premises, at site or inany other place in addition to the aforesaid type,acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself thatthe materials comply with the Specifications.

b. The Owner also reserves the right to conduct allthe tests mentioned in this specification at his ownexpense on the samples drawn from the site atContractor's premises or at any other test centre.In case of evidence of non-compliance, it shall bebinding on the part of Contractor to prove thecompliance of the items to the technicalspecifications by repeat tests, or correction ofdeficiencies, or replacement of defective items allwithout any extra cost to the Owner.

(vii) Sample Batch For Type Testinga. The Contractor shall offer material for selection of

samples for type testing only after getting QualityAssurance Plan approved from Owner's QualityAssurance Deptt. The sample shall bemanufactured strictly in accordance with the QualityAssurance Plan approved by Owner.

b. The Contractor shall offer at least three drums forselection of sample required for conducting all thetype tests.

c. The Contractor is required to carry out all theacceptance tests successfully in presence ofOwner's representative before sample selection.

(viii) Test Reports

a. Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in atleast six copies along with one original. One copywill be returned duly certified by the Owner onlyafter which the commercial production of thematerial shall start.

b. Record of routine test reports shall be maintainedby the Supplier at his works for periodic inspectionby the Owner's representative.

c. Test Certificates of tests during manufacture shallbe maintained by the Contractor. These shall beproduced for verification as and when desired bythe Owner.

(ix) Inspection

95

a. The Owner's representative shall at all times beentitled to have access to the works and all placesof manufacture, where conductor shall bemanufactured and representative shall have fullfacil it ies for unrestricted inspection of theContractor's works, raw materials and process ofmanufacture for conducting necessary tests asdetailed herein.

b. The Contractor shall keep the Owner informed inadvance of the time of starting and of the progressof manufacture of conductor in its various stagesso that arrangements can be made for inspection.

c. No material shall be dispatched from its point ofmanufacture before it has been satisfactorilyinspected and tested, unless the inspection iswaived off by the Owner in writing. In the latter casealso, the conductor shall be dispatched only aftersatisfactory testing for all tests specified herein havebeen completed.

d. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall inno way relieve the Contractor of any of hisresponsibilities for meeting all requirements of theSpecification, and shall not prevent subsequentrejection if such material is later found to bedefective.

(x) Test Facilitiesa. The following additional test facilities shall be

available at the Contractor's works:a) Calibration of various testing and measuring

equipment including tensile testingmachine, resistance measurement facilities,burette, thermometer, barometer etc.

b) Standard resistance for calibration ofresistance bridges.

c) Finished conductor shall be checked forlength verification and surface finish onseparate rewinding machine at reducedspeed (variable from 8 to 16 meters perminute). The rewinding facilities shall haveappropriate clutch system and free ofvibrations, jerks etc. with traverse layingfacilities.

6.13.9 Packinga. The conductor shall be supplied in non-

returnable, strong, wooden drums provided withlagging of adequate strength, constructed toprotect the conductor against any damage anddisplacement during transit, storage andsubsequent handling and stringing operationsin the field. The Contractor shall be responsiblefor any loss or damage during transportationhandling and storage due to improper packing.The drums shall generally conform to IS:1778-1980, except as otherwise specified hereinafter.

b. The drums shall be suitable for wheel mountingand for letting off the conductor under aminimum controlled tension of the order of 5KN.

c. The Contractor should submit their proposeddrum drawings along with the bid.

d. The Contractor may offer more than one length

of the conductor in a single drum.e. All wooden components shall be manufactured

out of seasoned soft wood free from defectsthat may materially weaken the component partsof the drums. Preservative treatment shall beapplied to the entire drum with preservatives ofa quality, which is not harmful to the conductor.

f. The flanges shall be of two ply construction with64 mm thickness with each ply at right anglesto the adjacent ply and nailed together. The nailsshall be driven from the inside face flange,punched and then clenched on the outer face.Flange boards shall not be less than thenominal thickness by more than 2mm. Thereshall not be less than 2 nails per board in eachcircle. Where a slot is cut in the flange to receivethe inner end of the conductor the entranceshall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.

g. The wooden battens used for making the barrelof the conductor shall be of segmental type.These shall be nailed to the barrel supportswith at least two nails. The battens shall beclosely butted and shall provide a round barrelwith smooth external surface. The edges of thebattens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoiddamage to the conductor.

h. Barrel studs shall be used for the constructionof drums. The flanges shall be holed and thebarrel supports slotted to receive them. Thebarrel studs shall be threaded over a length oneither end, sufficient to accommodate washers,spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at therequired spacing.

i. Normally, the nuts on the studs shall standprotruded of the flanges. All the nails used onthe inner surface of the flanges and the drumbarrel shall be counter sunk. The ends of barrelshall generally be flushed with the top of thenuts.

j. The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrelsurface shall be painted with a bitumen basedpaint.

k. Before reeling, card board or double corrugatedor thick bituminised water-proof bamboo papershall be secured to the drum barrel and insideof flanges of the drum by means of a suitablecommercial adhesive material. The papershould be dried before use. Medium grade kraftpaper shall be used in between the layers ofthe conductor. After reeling the conductor, theexposed surface of the outer layer of conductorshall be wrapped with water proof thickbituminized bamboo paper to preserve theconductor from dirt, grit and damage duringtransport and handling.

l. A minimum space of 75 mm for conductor shallbe provided between the inner surface of theexternal protective tagging and outer layer ofthe conductor. Outside the protective lagging,there shal l be minimum of two bindersconsisting of hoop iron/ galvanised steel wire.Each protective lagging shall have tworecesses to accommodate the binders.

96

m. Each batten shall be securely nailed acrossgrains as far as possible to the flange, edgeswith at least 2 nails per end. The length of thenails shall not be less than twice the thicknessof the battens. The nails shall not protrude abovethe general surface and shall not have exposedsharp, edges or allow the battens to bereleased due to corrosion.

n. The nuts on the barrel studs shall be tackwelded on the one side in order to fully securethem. On the second end, a spring washer shallbe used.

o. A steel collar shall be used to secure all barrelstuds. This collar shall be located between thewashers and the steal drum and secured tothe central steel plate by welding.

p. Outside the protective lagging, there shall beminimum of two binder consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective laggingshall have two recesses to accommodate thebinders.

q. The conductor ends shall be properly sealedand secured with the help of U-nail on the sideof one of the flanges to avoid loosening of theconductor layers during transit and handling.

r. As an alternative to wooden drum Contractor mayalso supply the conductors in non-returnablepainted steel drums. After preparation of steelsurface according to IS : 9954, synthetic enamelpaint shall be applied after application of onecoat of primer. Wooden/Steel drum will be treatedat par for evaluation purpose and accordinglythe Contractor should quote in the package.

6.13.10 MarkingEach drum shall have the following informationstenciled on it in indelible ink along with otheressential data:(a) Contract/Award letter number.(b) Name and address of consignee.(c) Manufacturer's name and address.(d) Drum and lot number

(e) Size and type of conductor(f) Length of conductor in meters(g) Arrow marking for unwinding(h) Position of the conductor ends(i) Number of turns in the outer most layer.(j) Gross weight of drum after putting lagging.(k) Average weight of the drum without lagging.(n) Net weight of the conductor in the drum.

(o) Month and year of manufacture of conductorThe above should be indicated in the packing listalso.

(xiii) Verification of Conductor LengthThe Owner reserves the right to verity the length of

conductor after unreeling at least ten (10) percentof the drums in a lot offered for inspection.

6.13.11 Standardsa. The conductor shall conform to the following Indian/

International Standards, which shall mean latestrevisions, with amendments/changes adopted andpublished, unless specifically stated otherwise inthe Specification.

b. In the event of the supply of conductor conformingto standards other than specified, the Bidder shallconfirm in his bid that these standards areequivalent to those specified. In case of award,salient features of comparison between thestandards proposed by the Contractor and thosespecified in this document will be provided by theContractor to establish their equivalence.

Sl. Indian Title InternationalNo. Standard Standards1. IS : 209-1992 Specification for zinc BS:3436-19862. IS : 398-1982 Specification for, IEC:1089-1991

Aluminium Conductors BS:215-1970for Overhead Transmission Purposes

3. IS : 398-1990 Aluminum Conductor BS-215-1970Part-II Galvanised Steel IEC:1089-1991

Reinforced4. IS : 1778-1980 Reels and Drums BS:1559-1949

for Bare Conductors5. IS : 1521-1991 Method of Tensile ISO 6892-1984

Testing of Steel Wire6. IS : 2629-1990 Recommended Practice

for Hot Dip Galva-nising of Iron and Steel

7. IS : 2633-1992 Method of TestingUniformity of Coatingon Zinc Coated Articles

8. IS : 4826-1992 Galvanized Coating IEC : 888-1987on Round Steel Wires BS:443-1969

9. IS : 6745-1990 Methods of Determination BS:433-1969of Weight of Zinc Coating ISO 1460 - 1973of Zinc Coated Iron andSteel Articles.

10. IS : 9997-1988 Aluminium Alloy IEC 104-1987Redraw Rods

11. IS : 1841-1978 EC Grade Aluminium Rodsproduced by rolling

12. IS : 5484-1978 EC Grade Aluminium Rodsproduced by continuouscasting and rolling

13. Zinc Coated steel wires IEC : 888-1987for stranded Conductors

14. Hard drawn aluminium IEC : 889-1987wire for overhead lineconductors

15. IS:398 (Part-IV) Aluminium Alloy IEC : 208-1966stranded conductor BS-3242-1970

v v v

97

ANNEXURE-A

1.0 TESTS ON ACSR CONDUCTORS1.1 UTS Test on Stranded Conductor

Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductorshall be marked at two places on a sample ofconductor of minimum 5 m length between fixingarrangement suitably fixed on a tensile testingmachine. The load shall be increased at a steadyrate upto 50% of minimum specified UTS and heldfor one minute. The circles drawn shall not bedistorted due to relative movement of strands.Thereafter the load shall be increased at steadyrate to minimum UTS and held for one minute. TheConductor sample shall not fail during this period.The applied load shall then be increased until thefailing load is reached and the value recorded.

1.2 D.C. Resistance Test on Stranded ConductorOn a conductor sample of minimum 5m lengthtwo contact-clamps shall be f ixed with apredetermined bolt torque. The resistance shallbe measured by a Kelvin double bridge by placingthe clamps initially zero metre and subsequentlyone metre apart. The test shall be repeated at leastfive times and the average value recorded. Thevalue obtained shall be corrected to the value at20°C as per IS:398-(Part-V)-1982. The resistancecorrected at 20°C shall conform to therequirements of this Specification.

1.3 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and SteelSamples taken from the Aluminium and steelingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/spectrographically analysed. The same shall bein conformity to the requirements stated in thisSpecification.

1.4 Visual and Dimensional Check on Drums

The drums shall be visually and dimensionallychecked to ensure that they conform to therequirements of this Specification.

1.5 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc.Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presenceof the Owner. The Owner shall visually check forscratches, joints etc. and that the conductorgenerally conforms to the requirements of thisSpecification. Ten percent (10%) drums from eachlot shall be rewound in the presence of the Owner'srepresentative.

1.6 Dimensional Check on Steel and AluminiumStrandsThe individual strands shall be dimensionallychecked to ensure that they conform to therequirement of this Specification.

1.7 Check for Lay-ratios of Various LayersThe lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked toensure that they conform to the requirements ofthis Specification.

1.8 Procedure Qualification test on weldedAluminium strands.Two Aluminium wire shall be welded as per theapproved quality

plan and shall be subjected to tensile load. Thebreaking strength of the welded joint of the wireshall not be less than the guaranteed breakingstrength of individual strands.

1.9 Chemical Analysis of ZincSamples taken from the zinc ingots shall bechemically/ spectrographically analyzed. The sameshall be in conformity to the requirements stated inthe Specification.

1.10 Galvanizing TestThe test procedure shall be as specified in IEC :888. The material shall conform to the requirementsof this Specification. The adherence of zinc shallbe checked by wrapping around a mandrel fourtimes the diameter of steel wire.

1.11 Torsion and Elongation Tests on Steel StrandsThe test procedures shall be as per clause No.10.3 of IEC: 888. In torsion test, the number ofcomplete twists before fracture shall not be lessthan 18 on a length equal to 100 times the standarddiameter of the strand. In case test sample lengthis less or more than 100 times the strandeddiameter of the strand, the minimum number oftwists will be proportioned to the length and ifnumber comes in the fraction then it will be roundedoff to next higher whole number. In elongation test,the elongation of the strand shall not be less than4% for a gauge length of 250 mm.

1.12 Check on Barrel Batten strength of DrumsThe details regarding barrel batten strength test will be

discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor& Owner in the Quality Assurance Programme.

1.13 Breaking load test on individual Aluminium andGalvanized steel wiresThe test shall be conducted on both Aluminiumand Galvanized steel wires. The breaking load ofone specimen cut from each of the samples takenshall be determined by means of suitable tensiletesting machine. The load shall be appliedgradually and the rate of separation of the jaws ofthe testing machine shall be not less than 25 mm/min. and not greater than 100 mm./ min. Theultimate breaking load of the specimens shall benot less than the values specif ied in theSpecification.

1.14 Resistance test on Aluminium wire

The test shall be conducted on aluminium wiresonly, conforming to procedure as per IEC: 889.The electrical resistance of one specimen ofaluminium wire cut from each of the samples takenshall be measured at ambient temperature. Themeasured resistance shall be corrected to thevalue corresponding to 20 degree C. by means offollowing formula.

1

R20 = RT ------------------- 1+alpha x (T-20)

WhereR20 = Resistance corrected at 20

degrees C.

98

6.14 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FORAERIAL BUNCHED CABLES FOR OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION

RT = Resistance measured at Tdegrees C.

alpha = Constant mass temperaturecoefficient of resistance 0.004.

T = Ambient temperature duringmeasurement

This resistance calculated to 20 degrees C. shallbe not more than the maximum value specified inthe specification.

v v v

6.14.1 INTRODUCTIONAerial Bunched Cable (ABC) is a very novel concept forOver Head power distribution. When compared to theconventional bare conductor over head distribution system,ABC provides higher safety and reliability, lower powerlosses and ultimate system economy by reducinginstallation, maintenance and operative cost. This systemis ideal for rural distribution and specially attractive forinstallation in difficult terrains such as hilly areas, forestareas, coastal areas etc.ABC is also considered to be the best choice for powerdistribution congested urban areas with narrow lanes andby-lanes. In developing urban complex, ABC is the betterchoice because of flexibility for rerouting as demanded bychanges in urban development plan.

6.14.2 CONSTRUCTION OF ABCXLPE/HDPE insulated power conductors of Aluminum(Neutral conductor and, street lighting conductors if andwhen necessary) are laid together (twisted) around a hightensile stranded and galvanized steel (Aluminum Alloy maybe used) insulated or bare messenger wire to form theAerial Bunched Cable. This assembly is directly strungon to distribution pole/towers by means of standard hardwares available in the market but care shall be taken torender the messenger wire completely insulated fromearthing at any point of distribution in case of HT ABC.The XLPE (Cross-linked Polyethylene) insulation is blackin colour and is stabilized against deterioration caused byexposure to direct sunlight and ultraviolet radiation. XLPEis cross-linkable low density polyethylene which is madethermoset by special formation from base polymer ofthermoplastic low density polyethylene. XLPE combinesthe best electrical properties of LDPE and superior thermomechanical properties.

6.14.3 MATERIALS(i) Aluminium conductors conform to IS:8130 (Class-II)(ii) Stranded high tensile galvanized steel messenger wire

conforms to IS:398 (Part-2). Alternatively AluminiumAlloy messenger wire conforms to IS:398 (Part-IV)

(iii) XLPE and HDPE insulation of power conductorsconform to IS: 7098 (Part I & II) and IS: 6474 respectively.

Since, the tension -from the current carrying conductor istotally removed by introduction of messenger. wire theoperating temperature of the conductor is 90° C as against75°C of the bare conductor under tension thereby allowing

ABC to carry current equivalent to that of bare conductor ofthe same size.

6.14.4 STRINGINGNo difficulty is envisaged during stringing of ABC in theconventional method but care shall be taken that insulatedconductors do not get damaged during installation.Dragging the ABC on the ground is to be avoided. Tensionto be applied during stringing shall be 25% of the breakingload of the messenger wires. This will allow line to havesag within specified limit of 1.5% of the span at the lowestambient temperature.

6.14.5 JOINTINGWhile mid-span jointing permissible for L T ABC systemby conventional technique, our recommendation will be todraw the line in such a way as to bring the joints at thesupports. Mid-span jointing is not at all recommended inthe case of HT lines our recommendation is for outdoortype HV terminations only. Under unavoidablecircumstances, line tapping at the support points may beallowed through suitably designed clamp connectors/PGclamps. The semi-conducting screen continuity shall bemaintained at all joints as far as possible to avoidfluctuations during system disturbances. The 3-phasescreens may be shorted and earthed through suitablenon-linear surge arrestor. Attempting to make a tap offfrom power conductors in the region where catenary isunder tension is not recommended.

6.14.6 RELIABILITY, SAFETY AND FLEXIBILITY:ABC Cables are highly reliable and insulation has beendeveloped to withstand heat, cold and intense sunlight.Disturbance and faults occur five to ten times more oftenin open wire lines than in ABC lines. There is no risk intouching the live cable and the insulation reduces thenumber of short circuits and over-voltages in overheadcables during thunder-stones. Few hardware accessoriesare needed as each one can be used with many differentsizes of cable. This makes installation and storage easier.Streets can easily be get lit at little extra cost by using theABC cables that have an extra conductor for lighting. Thecable can be supplied with one or two insulated conductorsfor street lighting.

The hardware and accessories for AB cables are madeby various reputed manufacturer and is easily available inIndia. They are similar to the standard hardware availablefor Bare conductor overhead distribution lines.

99

6.14.7 APPROVAL & CERTIFICATION(i) BIS License for 1S-694-1990 for 1l00V Wires & Cables.(ii) BIS License for IS-1554.(iii)BIS License for I_ 7098 PART 1 & II(iv) BIS License for Overhead Aluminium Conductor (18-

398) and Copper Conductor (1S-282) and 18-8130 for

other Conductors.(v) Quality System Certification upgradation from ISO

- 9002 to' ISO 9001 by Underwriters Laboratories, infinal stage.

(vi) Safety Certification for various conductors as perBASEC are under finalization.

6.14.8 TECHNICAL PARTICULARSLT Aerial Bunched Cable 1100 Volts (4 crore) Reference standard: Generally to IS:7098(1)88

100

QUALITY SETUP

Conductors are generally the only means to transport current or signals withrequired safety norms. Therefore the material of its construction, purity andother important aspects of metallurgy are the critical factors to source the wirerods. We have latest 3-D profile die checking and refurbishment system. Thesourcing of wire drawing, lubricant is from company like Houghton Italy andintensive inspection testing Conductor to ensure quality.

TESTINGEach consignment of conductor & wires isexhaustively tested before dispatch clearance, byhighly qualified, Experienced and dedicated testingteam.

The testing setup is broadly classified as follows1) RM. Testing Labs.2) Routine Testing for Conductor, LT wires & Cables3) Type Testing Labs include FR/FS/FRLS testingAll the laboratories are equipped with the moderntesting Instruments. All the instruments are understrict Calibration and environment control.

QA ONLINEThe company has onlinecomputerised control systemon all its critical processes anda team of on l ine test ingengineers to ensure theconsistency in quality

QA IN RAW MATERIALSThe raw materials are procuredfrom the best sources from thedomestic and global marketThese sources are selected onthe based on the company'sstringent quality vendorevaluation/ continuousassessment and testing.

QA IN PLANNINGCustomer requirements,alongwith the orders are takeninto qualityplanning with due care fordesigning, manufacturing,testing and performanceaspects

6 . 1 4 . 9

101

6.14.10 TECHNICAL PARTICULARSLT Aerial Bunched Cable 1100 Volts (3 1/2 crore) Reference standard: Generally to IS:71098(1)88

v v v

102

Prior to despatch cable is subjected to rigorous testing.Test procedures followed at our works are according tovarious national & International specifications and arecovered in this paper.Following tests are performed on Aerial Bunched Cables:

1. Test on Phase/Street lighting conductor

TESTS METHOD OF

TESTING

a) Tensile test IS: 10810 pt -2b) Wrapping test IS: 10810 pt -3c) Conductor Resistant Test IS: 10810 pt - 5d) Test for thickness of insulation IS: 10810 pt -6e) Physical test for polyethylene

insulation(i) Tensile strength & Elong Test IS: 10810 pt -7(ii) Melt flow index IS: 10810 pt -23(iii) Vicat softening Point IS: 10810 pt - 22(iv) Carbon Black Content & IS: 10810 pt - 32

dispersion

6.14.11 FINISHED AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE TESTING(v) Colour factness IS: 10810 pt - 18(vi) Environmental stress cracking IS: 10810 pt - 29(vii) Bleeding & Blooming IS: 10810 pt -19(viii) Volume Resistivity test IS: 10810 pt -43

(f) High Voltage test including water IS : 1596immersion test.

2. Test for messenger conductora) Breaking load test IS:398 (pt - IV)b) Elongation test IS: 398 ( pt - IV)c) Resistance test IS: 398 (pt - IV)

3. Dimensional test as per the parameters specified inthe technical particulars

4. Bending test on completed cable shall also asperformed. The diameter of mandrel shall be 10 (D+d)

Where D = Overall diameter of the cable d = Dia over conductor

v v v

103

S.No Description 3 x 16

+ 1 x 25

3 x 25 +

1 x 25

3 x 35 +

1 x 25

3 x 50 +

1 x 35

1.

1.1

1.2

Power/ Neutral Core: Conductors a) Nom.cross sectional area (i) Power cores (mm2) (ii) Neutral conductor (mm2) b) Max D C resistance conductor at 20°c (i) Phase conductor (Ohm/Km) (ii) Neutral Conductor (Ohm/Km) c) Approx. diameter of Conductor (Compacted) (i) Phase conductor (mm) (ii) Neutral conductor (mm) Insulation: Minimum thickness (i) Phase conductor (mm)

16 25

1.91 1.38

4.4 5.8

1.0

25 25

1.20 1 38

5.5 5.8

1.0

35 25

0.868 1.38

6.8 5.8

1.0

50 35

0.641 0.968

7.9 6.8

1.2

2. Messenger Wire (Bare): (i) Nom. Cross sectional area (Sq mm) (ii) Approx Tensile Strength (KN)

25 7.4

25 7.4

25 7.4

35

10.3 3 Current ratings:

Continuous current carrying capacity of cable in Air at Ambient temp. 40°c (AMP)

60

76

92

110 4 Approx weight (Kg/Km) 250 330 430 580 5 Number of cores:

(i) Power cores (ii) Neutral Messenger Core

(No.) : 3 (No.) : 1

6 Derating factor: Derating factors for variation In air Temp Air Temp (°C) Rating factor

30 35 40 45 50 55 1.12 1.06 1.0 0.94 0.88 0.83

7 (i) Identification of Power core: (ii)Laying:

By providing ridges on the insulation Three power cores and one neutral core shall be suitably twisted around bare AAAC Messenger.

8 Details of the Power/Neutral core: (i) Conductor

(a)Material (b)Flexibility class as per IS:8130/84 (c)Form of conductor

(ii) Insulation (a) Material (b) Colour of Insulation

Aluminium to IS: 8130/84 Class – 2 Compacted circular High Density Polyethylene to IS: 6474 - 1971 Black

9 Details of the Messenger wire (Bare) (a) Material

(b) Form of conductor

All alloy aluminium Conductor to IS:398 (IV) Stranded compacted circular

6.14.12 TECHNICAL PARTICULARSLT Aerial Bunched Cable 1100 Volts (4 crore) Reference standard: Generally to IS:6474 - 71

v v v

104

S.No Description

3 x 16 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 25

3 x 25 +

x 16 +

1 x 25

3 x 35 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 25

3 x 50 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 35

3 x 70 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 50

3 x 95 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 70

3 x 120 +

1 x 16 +

1 x 70

1. 1.1 1.2

Power/ Neutral Core: Conductors

a) Nom.cross sectional area (i) Phase Conductor (mm2) (ii) Street Lighting conductor (mm2) b) Max D C resistance conductor at 20 °c (i) Phase conductors (Ohm/Km) (ii) Street Lighting (Ohm/Km) c) Approx. diameter of Conductor (i) Phase conductor (m m) (ii) Street Lighting conductor (mm) Insulation: Minimum thickness (i) Phase conductor (mm) (ii) Street Lighting Conductor (mm)

16 16

1.91 1.91

4.4 4.4

1.0 1.0

25 16

1.20 1.91

5.5 4.4

1.0 1.0

35 16

0.868 1.910

6.8 4.4

1.0 1.0

50 16

0.641 1.910

7.9 4.4

1.2 1.0

70 16

0.443 1.910

9.6 4.4

1.4 1.0

95 16

0.320 1.910

11.3 4.4

1.4 1.0

120 16

0.253 1.910

12.7 4.4

1.6 1.0

2. Messenger Wire (Bare): (i) Nom. Cross sectional area (Sq mm) (ii) Approx breaking load (KN)

25 7.4

25 7.4

25 7.4

35 10.3

50 14.7

70 20.6

70 20.6

3 Current ratings: Continuous current carrying capacity of cable in Air at Ambient temp. 40°c (AMP)

51

70

86

105

130

155

180

4 Approx weight (Kg/Km) 310 390 490 640 890 1180 1430 5 Number of cores:

(i) Power cores (ii) Neutral Core (iii) Bare Messenger

(No.) : 3 (No.) : 1 (No.) : 1

6 Derating factor:

Derating factors for variation In air Temp Air Temp (°C) Rating factor

30 35 40 45 50 55 1.12 1.06 1.0 0.94 0.88 0.83

7 (i) Identification of Power core: (ii) Laying:

By providing ridges on the insulation Three power cores and one neutral core shall be suitably twisted around bare AAAC Messenger.

8 Details of the Power/Neutral core: (i) Conductor

(a) Material (b) Flexibility class as per IS:8130/84 (c) Form of conductor

(ii) Insulation (a) Material (b) Colour of Insulation

Aluminium to IS: 8130/84 Class – 2 Compacted circular High Density Polyehylene to IS: 6474 - 1971 Black

9 Details of the Messenger wire (Bare) (c) Material

(ii) Form of conductor

All alloy aluminium Conductor to IS:398 (IV) Stranded compacted circular

6.14.13 TECHNICAL PARTICULARSLT Aerial Bunched Cable 1100 Volts (5 Crore) with Street Lighting Conductor -

Reference Standard: Generally to IS:6474-71

v v v

105

(I) SCOPEThis specif ication covers design, engineering,manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection andtesting before supply and delivery at site of HIGH DENSITYPOLYETHYLENE Insulated (HDPE) Aluminum Cablestwisted over central bare aluminum messenger' wire. Thesizes are lx16+25 sq.mm and 2x16+25 Sqmm.

(II) STANDARDSThe materials shall conform in all respects to the relevantIndian Standard Specifications with latest amendmentsthereto.Indian Title International &Standard Internationally

ecognised standard

IS - 8130/1984 Aluminium conductors forInsulated electric cables

IS - 6474/1984 Polyethylene Insulation forcables for voltage uptoand including 1000 V

IS-398/Part-IV/ All Aluminium Alloy IEC - 228/19781994 Conductors (AAAC) for

overhead Transmissionpurposes Conductorsof Insulated Cables

IS 10418/1982 Drums for electric cablesIS - 656/1988 Specification for logs for BS148/ASTMD

plywood 1275, D1533,D 1934, IECPUB 296 - 1969

Material conforming to other internationally acceptedstandards, which ensure equal or higher quality than thestandards mentioned above would also be acceptable. Incase the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming tothe other standards, salient points of difference betweenthe standards adopted and the specific standards shallbe clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies ofsuch standards with authentic English Translations shallbe furnished along With the offer.

(III) TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTSa. General: The insulated phase conductor shall be

twisted round bare aluminium alloy messengerwire, which shall take all the mechanical stress.The messenger shall also serve as the earth-cum-neutral. The typical arrangement of the phaseconductors and messenger wire shall be as perrelevant standards. The typical arrangements ofcables straight run, Angle and Dead end shall be

as per relevant standards.

(IV) PHASE CONDUCTOR• The 16 sq.mm. phase conductor shall be of

aluminium solid round; outer diameter shallbe within the limits.

• The phase conductor shall be insulated withblack weather resistant high-densitypolyethylene (HDPE) suitable to 1100 Vinsulation. The insulated conductors shallgenerally conform to the relevant standards.

• Conductors: The properties of the aluminiumwires before stranding shall be:

• Tensile strength not less than 90 N/Sq.mm.• Resistivity at 20 Deg. C not exceeding 0.02845

ohm / Sq.mm / m

(V) INSULATIONa. Material: The insulation shall be black weather-

resistant special high-density polyethylene.b. Messenger (Neutral conductor): The messenger

shall be an All Aluminium Alloy Conductorcomposed of 7 wires each of 2.34 mm. Dia. drawnfrom rod, which is manufactured in a continuouscasting and rolling procedure. The properties forthe individual wires before stranding shall be:• Tensile strength not less than 294 N / sq.mm.• Elongation at 250 mm gauge length not less

than 4%.• Density at 20 Deg. C not exceeding 0.0328 ohm

/sq.mm./m .• Density at 20 De"g. C 2.7 Kg./Cubic-dmNo joints are allowed in the messenger exceptthose made on the base rod or wire before finaldrawing within the standard length of 2 km. Themessenger shal l be round, stranded andcompacted to have smooth round surface.The messenger takes all the mechanical stressand also serves as a neutral conductor.

• Neutral conductor over all dia (max.)6.5 mm• DC resistance at 20 ego C(Max) 1.38 ohm / km• Minimum breaking load 7.4 kN.

c. Design: The cable consists of one black weatherresistant special high-density polyethylene (HDPE)insulated Aluminium phase conductor, strandedaround a bare All Aluminium Alloy messenger, whichis also the neutral conductor. The construction data

6.14.14 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FORLV AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES

106

is specified below:

No. of cross

sectional area of

conductor (sq.mm)

Phase Conductor Messenger Complete cable

No and cross sectional area (sq.mm)

Diameter of un-insulated cond uctor Max (mm)

Insulation thickness (mm)

Overall dia of conductor (mm)

Diameter of uninsulated conductor Max (mm)

Tensile strength (approx) Min (Kg)

Overall diameter (approx) (mm)

Total mass (approx) (Kg/Km)

1 x 16 + 25 1 x 16 4.5 1.0 6.5 6.0 7.4 13 130

Nominal Cross sectional area of conductor (sq.mm) No. of strands DC Resistance at 20 °°C Ohm/Km

(Max)

Insulation thickness average in

(mm) Phase

conductor Neutral conductor

16 Aluminium 1 1.910 - 1.0 25 Aluminium alloy 7 - 1.38 Bare

d. The resistance of the phase conductor and the messenger are determined with direct current the same arecorrected to 20 Deg. C using the formula and co-efficients given in clause 5 of standard IEC228. The valuesobtained shall not exceed the resistance, given below:

e. Polyethylene Insulation: The polyethylene insulationshall generally conform to relevant Standards.The.following properties shall be guaranteed bythe supplier. For methods of testing IS-I086(relevant parts) may be referred.

Density of HDPE (ST4) 0.95 to 0.96 g/cu.cmMelt flow index max 3.0Tensile strength Not less than 10 N/sq.mmPercentage elongation Not less than 300Carbon black contents Between 2 and 3%

Vicat softening point Not less than 85 Deg. CAt 70 Deg 1 x 1013 Ohm cm (min)Environmental stress cracking No cracks shall be visibleto the naked eye

(VI) TESTINGa. Type Tests: The material offered shall be fully type

tested by the Bidder or his collaborator as per therelevant standards. The bidder shall furnish foursets of type test reports along with bid. The bidsreceived without type test reports shall be treatedas non-responsive.• Tests for phase conductor• Tensile test (IS:8130)• Wrapping test (IS:8130)• Conductor resistance test• Test for thickness of insulation• Tensile strength and elongation at break of

insulation• Physical tests for polyethylene insulation

• Ageing in air oven• Shrinkage test• Hot deformation• Loss of mass in air oven• Heat shock test• Thermal stability• Test for bleeding and blooming of pigment

(IS:6474) + Insulation resistance test• High voltage test including water immersion

test (IS: 1596)• High voltage test at room temperature• Flammability test

b. Test for messenger• Breaking load test (to be made on the finished

conductors (IS 398/Part IV)• Elongation test (IS-398/part IV). Resistance test

(IS-398/part-IV)c. Acceptance and Routine Tests: All the acceptance

and routine tests shall be conducted as per therelevant standards in the presence of purchaser'srepresentative. The values shall conform toguaranteed values. Immediately after finalizationof the Programme of acceptance/routine testing,the manufacturer shall give 15 days advanceintimation to the purchaser, to enable him to deputehis representative for witnessing the tests.

d. Bending test on the complete cable: The test shallbe performed on a sample of complete: cable. Thesample shall be bent around a test mandrel atroom temperature for at least one complete turn. It

Note:

• The average value of thickness of the insulation shall not be less than the specified average value'• The thickness at any place may be less than the specified average value, provided that the difference not exceed

0.1 mm.• For thickness of insulation six measurements are made readily on a piece of insulation as far as possible equally

spaced around the circumference but not on the ridges.

107

shall then be unwound and the process shall berepeated after turning the sample around its axis180 Deg. The cycle of these operations shall thenbe repeated twice more. The diameter of themandrel shall be 10 (D+d), where D-= Actualdiameter of the cable (i.e. minimum circumscribingcircle diameter in mm) d= actual diameter of theconductor in mm. No cracks visible to the nakedeye should take place.

(VII) PACKING & FORWARDING:a. The AB Cable shall be wound on non-returnable

wooden drums conforming to IS-I 0418/ 1982 withlatest amendments thereof. The ends of the cableshall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopicsealing material. The drum shall be marked withthe following.• Manufacturers name• Trademark, if any• Drum number or identification number• Size of conductors• Size of messenger• Voltage grade• Number and lengths of pieces of cable in each

drum• Gross mass including packing• ISI mark if any• Direction of rotation of the drum by marking an

arrowb. The drums shall be of such construction as to

assure delivery of cable in the field free fromdisplacement and damage and should be able towithstand all stresses due to handling and thestringing operation so that cable surface is notdented, scratched or damaged in any way duringtransport and erection. The cable shall be properlylagged on the drums.

c. The cable drum should be suitable for wheelmounting

d. The mass of finished cable in a drum (withoutmass of drum) of various designation shall notexceed by more than 10% of the following values.

Designation Gross masslxI6+25 Sq. mm 800 Kg2xl6 + 25 Sq. mm 1000 Kg

e. The minimum length of each cable shall be 2km.While longer lengths shall be acceptable, shorter-lengths not less than 1 kilometers shall beacceptable to the extent of 10% of the orderedquantity only.

(VIII) MARKING OF CABLES: -All the cable shall have the following markingembossed on the insulated phase conductor foridentification UPCL in intervals of not more than 1meter.

a. The packing shall be done as per themanufacturers standard practice. However, heshould ensure the packing is such that the materialshould not get damaged during transit by Rai1/Road.

b. The marking on each package shall be as per therelevant IS

(IX) GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARSThe Contractor shall furnish the guaranteedtechnical particulars and submit the same alongwith his tender.

1. It shall be a quick make and break device.2. The main MCCB which shall be connected at

the LT side of DT, shall have shunt releasefacility so that other than overload, other DTprotections can also trip the main MCCB.

3. Closing of MCCB shall be manual.4. Breaking capacity shall be as per IS: 139475. Fault clearing time shall be less than 10 ms.6. Power factor for short circuit current (Max) 0.4

lag

7. Utilization Category of the MCCB shall be 'A'8. MCCB shall be capable of accepting one size

higher cable size (Corresponding to ratedcurrent)

v v v

9. Temperature rise at rated load current andmaximum ambient temperature shall not bemore than 50 °C.

10.MCCB shall be able to perform the followingtest sequence.u Open-3 minutes-Close open-3 minutes-

Close open.11. All plastic material shall comply to glow wire

tests.12.MCCB shall be able to accept the cable one

size higher, corresponding to rated currentcross section.

13.All current carrying parts shall be silver coated.14.All other procedure shall be as per applicable IS.

6.15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FORSPECIFICATION FOR MCCB

v v v

108

6.16.1 TYPE OF PANELS1.1 Simplex Panel

Simplex panel shall consist of a vertical front panelwith equipment mounted thereon and having wiringaccess from rear for control panels & either front orrear for relay panels. In case of panel having widthmore than 800mm, double leaf-doors shall beprovided. Doors shall have handles with either built-in locking facility or will be provided with pad-lock.

6.16.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES(i) Control and Relay Board shall be of panels of simplex

type design as indicated in bill of quantity. It is theresponsibility of the Contractor to ensure that theequipment specified and such unspecifiedcomplementary equipment required forcompleteness of the protective/control schemes beproperly accommodated in the panels withoutcongestion and if necessary, provide panels withlarger dimensions. No price increase at a later dateon this account shall be allowed. However, the widthof panels that are being offered to be placed in existingswitchyard control rooms, should be in conformitywith the space availability in the control room.

(ii) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed andshall be dust, moisture and vermin proof. Theenclosure shall provide a degree of protection notless than IP-31 in accordance with IS: 2147.

(iii) Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting typeand shall comprise structural frames completelyenclosed with specially selected smooth finished,cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 3mm for weight bearing members of the panelssuch as base frame, front sheet and door frames,and 2.0mm for sides, door, top and bottom portions.There shall be sufficient reinforcement to providelevel transportation and installation.

(iv) All doors, removable covers and panels shall begasketed all around with neoprene gaskets.Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screensand filters. The screens shall be made of eitherbrass or GI wire mesh.

(v) Design, materials selection and workmanshipshall be such as to result in neat appearance,inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt headapparent from outside, with all exterior surfacestune and smooth.

(vi) Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearingsurface, which shall be fixed on the embeddedfoundation channels/insert plates. Anti vibrationstrips made of shock absorbing materials that shallbe supplied by the contractor, shall be placedbetween panel & base frame.

(vii) Cable entries to the panels shall be from thebottom. Cable gland plate fitted on the bottom ofthe panel shall be connected to earthing of thepanel/station through a flexible braided copperconductor rigidly.

6.16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL & RELAY PANEL

6.16.3 MOUNTING(i) All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted

and completely wired to the terminal blocks readyfor external connections. The equipment on frontof panel shall be mounted flush. No equipmentshall be mounted on the doors.

(ii) Equipment shall be mounted such that removaland replacement can be accomplished individuallywithout interruption of service to adjacent devicesand are readily accessible without use of specialtools. Terminal marking on the equipment shallbe clearly visible.

(iii) Contractor shall carry out cut out, mounting andwiring of the free issue items supplied by otherswhich are to be mounted in his panel in accordancewith the corresponding equipment manufacturer'sdrawings. Cut outs if any, provided for futuremounting of equipment shall be properly blankedoff with blanking plate.

(iv) The center lines of switches, push buttons andindicating lamps shall be not less than 750mmfrom the bottom of the panel. The center lines ofrelays, meters and recorders shall be not less than450mm from the bottom of the panel

(v) The center lines of switches, push buttons andindicating lamps shall be matched to give a neat anduniform appearance. Like wise the top lines of allmeters, relays and recorders etc. shall be matched.

(vi) No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.(vii) At existing station, panels shall be matched with

other panels in the control room in respect ofdimensions, colour, appearance and arrangementof equipment (center lines of switches, push buttonsand other equipment) on the front of the panel.

6.16.4 PANEL INTERNAL WIRING(i) Panels shal l be supplied complete with

interconnecting wiring provided between allelectrical devices mounted and wired in the panelsand between the devices and terminal blocks forthe devices to be connected to equipment outsidethe panels. When panels are arranged to belocated adjacent to each other all inter panel wiringand connections between the panels shall befurnished and the wiring shall be carried outinternally

(ii) All wiring shall be carried out with 650V grade,single core, stranded copper conductor wires withPVC insulation. The minimum size of the multi-stranded copper conductor used for internal wiringshall be as follows:• All circuits except current transformer circuits

and voltage transfer circuits meant for energymetering - one 1.5mm sq. per lead.

• All current transformer circuits one 2.5 sqmmlead.

• Voltage transformer circuit (for energy meters):Two 2.5 sqmm .per lead.

109

(iii) All internal wiring shall be securely supported,neatly arranged, readily accessible and connectedto equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiringgutters & troughs shall be used for this purpose.

(iv) Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltagetransformer circuits, annunciation circuits and othercommon services shall be provided near the top ofthe panels running throughout the entire length ofthe panels.

(v) Wire termination shall be made with solderlesscrimping type and tinned copper lugs , which firmlygrip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall beprovided at all the wire terminations. Engravedcore identification plastic ferrules marked tocorrespond with panel wiring diagram shall be fittedat both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightlyon the wire and shall not fall off when the wire isdisconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directlyconnected to trip circuit breaker or device shall bedistinguished by the addition of red colouredunlettered ferrule.

(vi) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the fulllength of the panel shall be preferred for inter panelwiring. Inter-connections to adjacent panel shallbe brought out to a separate set of terminal blockslocated near the slots of holes meant for taking theinter-connecting wires.

(vii) Contractor shall be solely responsible for thecompleteness and correctness of the internalwiring and for the proper functioning of theconnected equipments

6.16.5 TERMINAL BLOCKS(i) All internal wiring to be connected to external

equipment shall terminate on 'Elmex' type CAT-M4or equivalent type terminal blocks. Terminal blocksshall be 650 V grade and have 10 Amps continuousrating, moulded piece, complete with insulatedbarriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts andlock nuts. Markings on the terminal blocks shallcorrespond to wire number and terminal numberson the wiring diagrams. All terminal blocks shallhave shrouding with transparent unbreakablematerial.

(ii) Disconnecting type terminal blocks for currenttransformer and voltage transformer secondaryleads shall be provided. Also current transformersecondary leads shall be provided with shortcircuiting and earthing facilities.

(iii) At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided oneach panel and these spare terminals shall beuniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.

(iv) Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shallbe suitable for connecting the following conductorsof external cable on each side• All CT & PT circuits: minimum of two of 2.5mm

Sq. copper.

• AC/DC Power Supply Circuits : One of 6mmSq. Aluminum.

• All other circuits: minimum of one of 2.5mmSq. Copper.

(v) There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mmbetween the first row of terminal blocks and theassociated cable gland plate or panel side wall.Also the clearance between two rows of terminalblocks edges shall be minimum of 150mm.

(vi) Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies andthe wiring channel within the enclosure shallbe such that a row of terminal blocks is run inparallel and close proximity along each side of thewiring-duct to provide for convenient attachment ofinternal panel wiring. The side of the terminal blockopposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for theOwner's external cable connections. All adjacentterminal blocks shall also share this field wiringcorridor. All wiring shall be provided with adequatesupport inside the panels to hold them firmly andto enable free and flexible termination withoutcausing strain on terminals.

(vii) The number and sizes of the Owner's multicoreincoming external cables will be furnished to theContractor after placement of the order. Allnecessary cable terminating accessories such asgland plates, supporting clamps & brackets, wiringtroughs and gutters etc. (except glands & lugs) forexternal cables shall be included the scope ofsupply.

6.16.6 PAINTING(i) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in

accordance with the IS:6005 "Code of practice forphosphating iron and steel".

(ii) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughlyremoved by emulsion cleaning.

(iii) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling withdilute acid followed by washing with running waterrinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

(iv) After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall becarried out with clean water followed by final rinsingwith dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

(v) The phosphate coating shall be sealed withapplication of two coats of ready mixed, stoved typezinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flashdried" while the second coat shall be stoved.

(vi) After application of the primer, two coats of finishingsynthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coatfollowed by stoving. The second finishing coat shallbe applied after inspection of first coat of painting.The exterior colour of paint shall be of a slightlydifferent shade to enable inspection of the painting.

(vii) A small quantity of finished paint shall be suppliedfor minor touching up required at site afterinstallation of the panels.

(viii) In case the bidder proposes to follow any otherestablished painting procedure like electrostaticpainting, the procedure shall be submitted forPOWERGRID's review and approval.

6.16.7 MIMIC DIAGRAM(i) Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing

the exact representation of the system shall beprovided in the front of control panels.

110

(ii) Mimic diagram shall be made preferably ofanodised aluminum or plastic of approved fastcolour material, which shall be screwed on to thepanel and can be easily cleaned. Painted overlaidmimic is also acceptable. The mimic bus shall be2mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be10mm for bus bars and 7mm for other connections.

(iii) Mimic bus colour wil l be decided by thePOWERGRID and shall be furnished to thesuccessful Bidder during Engineering.

(iv) When semaphore indicators are used forequipment position they shall be so mounted inthe mimic that the equipment close position shallcomplete the continuity of mimic.

(v) Indicating lamp, one for each phase, for each busshall be provided on the mimic to indicate buscharged condition

6.16.8 NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS(i) All equipment mounted on front and rear side as

well as equipment mounted inside the panels shallbe provided with individual name plates withequipment designation engraved. Also on the topof each panel on front as well as rear side, largeand bold name plates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.

(ii) All front mounted equipment shall also be providedat the rear with individual name plates engravedwith tag numbers corresponding to the one shownin the panel internal wiring to facilitate easy tracingof the wiring.

(iii) Each instrument and meter shall be prominentlymarked with the quantity measured e.g. KV, A, MW,etc. All relays and other devices shall be clearlymarked with manufacturer's name, manufacturer'stype, serial number and electrical rating data.

(iv) Name Plates shall be made of non-rusting metalor 3 ply lamicoid. Name plates shall be black withwhite engraving lettering.

(v) All the panels shall be provided with name platemounted inside the panel bearing LOA No & Date, Name of the Substation & feeder and referencedrawing number.

6.16.9 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES(i) Plug Point:

240V, Single phase 50Hz, AC socket with switchsuitable to accept 5 Amps and 15 Amps pin roundstandard Indian plug, shall be provided in theinterior of each cubicle with ON-OFF switch.

(ii) Interior Lighting:Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescentlighting fixture rated for 240 Volts, single phase, 50Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panelcontrolled by the respective panel door switch.Adequate lighting shall also be provided for thecorridor in Duplex panels.

(iii) Switches and Fuses:Each panel shall be provided with necessaryarrangements for receiving, distributing and

isolating of DC and AC supplies for various control,signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. Theincoming and sub-circuits shall be separatelyprovided with miniature circuit breakers (MCB).Selection of the main and sub-circuit MCB ratingshall be such as to ensure selective clearance ofsub-circuit faults. MCBs shall confirm to IS :13947. Each MCB shall be provided with one potentialfree contact and the same shall be wired forannunciation purpose. However voltagetransformer circuits for relaying and metering shallbe protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRCcartridge type conforming to IS:13703 mounted onplug-in type fuse bases. . Fuse carrier base aswell as MCBs shall have imprints of the fuse 'rating'and 'voltage'.

(iv) Space Heater:

Each panel shall be provided with a space heaterrated for 240V , single phase, 50 Hz Ac supply forthe internal heating of the panel to preventcondensation of moisture. The fittings shall becomplete with switch unit .

6.16.10 EARTHING(i) All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus

securely fixed. Location of earth bus shall ensureno radiation interference for earth systems undervarious switching conditions of isolators andbreakers. The material and the sizes of the busbar shall be at least 25 X 6 sq.mm perforatedcopper with threaded holes at a gap of 50mm witha provision of bolts and nuts for connection withcable armours and mounted equipment etc foreffective earthing. When several panels aremounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shallbe made continuous and necessary connectorsand clamps for this purpose shall be included inthe scope of supply of Contractor. Provision shallbe made for extending the earth bus bars to futureadjoining panels on either side.

(ii) All metallic cases of relays, instruments and otherpanel mounted equipment including gland plate,shall be connected to the earth bus by copper wiresof size not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The color code ofearthing wires shall be green.

(iii) Looping of earth connections which would resultin loss of earth connection to other devices whenthe loop is broken, shall not be permitted. However,looping of earth connections between equipmentto provide alternative paths to earth bus shall beprovided.

(iv) VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shallbe earthed at one place only at the terminal blockswhere they enter the panel. Such earthing shall bemade through links so that earthing may beremoved from one group without disturbingcontinuity of earthing system for other groups.

6.16.11 INDICATING INSTRUMENTSAll instruments, meters, recorders andtransducers shall be enclosed in dust proof,moisture resistant, black finished cases and

111

shall be suitable for tropical use. All Watt /Var,Bus Voltage and Line current indicatinginstruments shall of Moving Iron (MI) type andthese shall be calibrated to read directly theprimary quantities. They shall be accuratelyadjusted and calibrated at works and shall havemeans of calibration check and adjustment atsite. The supplier shall submit calibrationcertificates at the time of delivery. However noseparate transducers are envisaged for digitalbus voltmeters and digital frequency metersand the indicating meters provided in thesynchronising equipment.

(i) Indicating Instrumentsa. Unless otherwise specif ied, al l

electricalindicating instruments shall havecircular scale and with a dial of 96mm x 96mm.They shall be suitable for flush mounting.

b. Instruments dial shall be with white circularscale and black pointer and with blacknumerals and lettering. The dial shall be freefrom warping, fading, and discoloring. The dialshall also be free from parallax error.

c. Instruments shall conform to IS:1248 and shallhave accuracy class of 5 or better. The designof the scales shall be such as to have resolutionsuitable for the application. The marking ofcentre zero Watt /Var meters shall be IMPORT(on left) and EXPORT (on right) to indicate thedirection of active/reactive power flow towardsor away from the substation bus barsrespectively.

(ii) Energy Metering Instruments(a) Watt and Varhour meters shall be of static

trivector type as per details given else.

(b) Energy Meter shall be provided on all 33and 11 kV feeders.

(iii) Annunciation Systema. Alarm annunciation system shall be provided

in the control board by means of visual andaudible alarm in order to draw the attention ofthe operator to the abnormal operatingconditions or the operation of some protectivedevices. The annunciation equipment shall besuitable for operation on the voltages specifiedin this specification.

b. The visual annunciation shall be provided byannunciation facia, mounted flush on the top ofthe control panels.

c. The annunciator facia shall be provided withtranslucent plastic window for alarm point withapproximate size of 35mm x 50mm. The faciaplates shall be engraved in black lettering withrespective inscriptions. Alarm inscriptions shallbe engraved on each window in not more thanthree lines and size of the lettering shall not beless than 5 mm.

d. Each annunciation window shall be providedwith two white lamps in parallel to provide safety

against lamp failure. Long life lamps shall beused. The transparency of cover plates andwattage of the lamps provided in the faciawindows shall be adequate to ensure clearvisibility of the inscriptions in the control roomhaving high illumination intensity (350 Lux), fromthe location of the operator's desk.

e. All Trip facia shall have red colour and all Non-trip facia shall have white colour.

f. The audible alarm shall be provided by Buzzer/Hooter /Bell having different sounds and shallbe used as follows.Hooter Alarm AnnunciationBell Annunciation DC failureBuzzer AC supply failure

g. Sequence of operation of the annunciator shallbe as follows:

Sl Alarm Fault Visual AudibleNo condition contact Annunciation Annunciation

(by Hooter)1 Normal Open OFF OFF2 Abnormal Close Flashing ON3 Accept Close Steady on OFF

Push buttonpressed Open Steady on OFF

4 Reset push Close On OFFbutton ispressed Open Off OFF

5 Lamp test Open Steady On OFFpush buttonpressed

h. Audible annunciation for the failure of DC supplyto the annunciation system shall be providedand this annunciation shall operate on 240Volts AC supply. On failure of the DC to theannunciation system for more than 2 or 3seconds. (adjustable setting), a bell shallsound. A separate push button shall beprovided for the cancellation of this audiblealarm alone but the facia window shall remainsteadily lighted till the supply to annunciationsystem is restored.

i. A separate voltage check relay shall be providedto monitor the failure of supply (240V AC) to thescheme mentioned in Clause above. If thefailure of supply exists for more than 2 to 3seconds. this relay shall initiate visual andaudible annunciation. Visual and audibleannunciation for the failure of AC supply to theannunciation system shall be provided and thisannunciation shall operate on Annunciation DCand buzzer shall sound.

(iv) SWITCHESa. Control and instrument switches shall be rotary

operated type with escutcheon plates clearlymarked to show operating position and circuitdesignation plates and suitable for flushmounting with only switch front plate andoperating handle projecting out.

b. The selection of operating handles for thedifferent types of switches shall be as

112

follows:Breaker, Isolator : Pistol grip, black

control switchesSynchronising : Oval, Black, Keyed

handle switches (onecommon removablehandle for a group ofsynchronisingswitches or lockingfacility havingcommon key).

Selector switches : Oval or knob, blackInstrument switches : Round, knurled,

blackProtection Transfer : Pistol grip, lockable

and switch black.c. The control switch of breaker and isolator shall

be of spring return to neutral type. The switchshall have spring return from close and trippositions to "after close" and "after trip"positions respectively.

d. Instrument selection switches shall be ofmaintained contact (stay put) type. Ammeterselection switches shall have make-before-break type contacts so as to prevent opencircuiting of CT secondary when changing theposition of the switch. Voltmeter transferswitches for AC shall be suitable for reading allline- to-line and line-to-neutral voltages for noneffectively earthed systems and for reading allline to line voltages for effectively earthedsystems.

e. The contacts of all switches shall preferablyopen and close with snap action to minimizearcing. Contacts of switches shall be springassisted and contact faces shall be with rivetsof pure silver or silver alloy. Springs shall notbe used as current carrying parts

f. The contact combination and their operationshall be such as to give completeness to theinterlock and function of the scheme.

g. The contact rating of the switches shall beas follows :Description Contact rating in Amps24V DC 10

continuouslyMake and carry 30Break for :Resistive load 20

(v) INDICATING LAMPSa. Indicating lamps shall be of multiple LED panel

mounting type with rear terminal connections.Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers todiffuse lights coloured red, green, amber, clearwhite or blue as specified. The lamp cover shallbe preferably of screwed type, unbreakable andmoulded from heat resisting material.

b. The wattage of the lamps shall be 5 to 10 watts forDC voltage of 24 Volt as well as 220 V AC.

c. Lamps and its parts shall be interchangeable andeasily replaceable from the front of the panel. Tools,if required for replacing the bulbs and lenses shallalso be included in the scope of supply.

d. The indicating lamps shall withstand 120% of ratedvoltage on a continuous basis.

(vi) Position Indicatorsa. Position indicators of "SEMAPHORE" type shall be

provided when specified as part of the mimicdiagrams on panels for indicating the position ofcircuit breakers, isolating/earthing switches etc.The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flushmounting with only the front disc projecting out andwith terminal connection from the rear. Their stripsshall be of the same colour as the associatedmimic.

b. Position indicator shall be suitable for DC Voltageas specified. When the supervised object is in theclosed position, the pointer of the indicator shalltake up a position in line with the mimic busbars,and at right angles to them when the object is inthe open position. When the supply failure to theindicator occurs, the pointer shall take up anintermediate position to indicate the supply failure.

c. The rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.d. The position indicators shall withstand 120% of

rated voltage on a continuous basis.

6.16.12 Relays(i) All relays shall conform to the requirements of

IS:3231/IEC-60255 or other applicable standards.Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flushmounting on the front with connections from the rear.

(ii) All protective relays shall be of Static or Numericaltype housed in draw out or plug-in type/modularcases with proper testing facilities. Necessary testplugs/test handles shall be supplied loose andshall be included in contractor's scope of supply.

(iii) All AC operated relays shall be suitable foroperation at 50 Hz. AC Voltage operated relays shallbe suitable for 110 Volts VT secondary and currentoperated relays for 5 amp CT secondary. All DCoperated relays and timers shall be designed forthe DC voltage specified, and shall operatesatisfactorily between 80% and 110% of ratedvoltage. Voltage operated relays shall haveadequate thermal capacity for continuousoperation.

(iv) The protective relays shall be suitable for efficientand reliable operation of the protection schemedescribed in the specification. Numerical relays, ifprovided, shall be provided with RS 485 port andbe compatible for 'MODBUS' protocol. Necessarysoftware for data down loading and analysis ofstored data in Numerical relay shall be suppliedon 'CD'. Software to be compatible to Windows XPor higher 'OS'.

(v) Necessary auxiliary relays and timers required forinterlocking schemes for multiplying of contactssuiting contact duties of protective relays and

113

monitoring of control supplies and circuits, lockoutrelay monitoring circuits etc. also required for thecomplete protection schemes described in thespecification shall be provided. All protective relaysshall be provided with at least two pairs of potentialfree isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays andtimers shall have pairs of contacts as required tocomplete the scheme, contacts shall be silverfaced with spring action. Relay case shall haveadequate number of terminals for making potentialfree external connections to the relay coils andcontacts, including spare contacts.

(vi) All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timersexcept the lock-out relays and interlocking relaysspecified shall be provided with self-reset typecontacts.

(vii) No control relay, which shall trip the power circuitbreaker when the relay is de-energized shall beemployed in the circuits.

(viii) Provision shall be made for easy isolation of tripcircuits of each relay for the purpose of testing andmaintenance.

(ix) Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protectiverelays shall preferably be of shunt reinforcementtype. If series relays are used the following shallbe strictly ensured :

(a) The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shallbe sufficiently shorter than that of the trip coil or triprelay in series with which it operates to ensuredefinite operation of the flag indicator of the relay.

(b) Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current foroperation when one or more relays operatesimultaneously.

(c) Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be smallenough to permit satisfactory operation of the tripcoil on trip relays when the D.C. Supply Voltage isminimum.

(x) All protective relays and alarm relays shall beprovided with one extra isolated pair of contactswired to terminals exclusively for future use.

(xi) The setting ranges of the relays offered, if differentfrom the ones specified shall also be acceptable ifthey meet the functional requirements.

(xii) Any alternative/additional protections or relaysconsidered necessary for providing completeeffective and reliable protection shall also beoffered separately. The acceptance of thisalternative/ additional equipment shall lie with thePOWERGRID.

(xiii) The bidder shall include in his bid a list of installationswhere the relays quoted have been in satisfactoryoperation.All relays and their drawings shall have phaseindications as R-Red, Y-yellow, B-blue

PROTECTION:(a) Over current relay (two number) shall

• have directional IDMT characteristic with adefinite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10times setting and have a variable settingrange of 50-200% of rated current

• have low transient, over reach high setinstantaneous unit of continuously variablesetting range 500-2000 % of rated current

• have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degreelead

• include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs.(b) Earth fault relay shall

• have directional IDMT characteristic with adefinite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10times setting and have a variable settingrange of 20-80% of rated current

• have low transient, over reach high setinstantaneous unit of continuously variablesetting range 200-800 % of rated current

• have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degreelag

• include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs• include necessary separate interposing

voltage transformers or have internalfeature in the relay for open delta voltage tothe relay

(xiv) Tripping RelayHigh Speed Tripping Relay shall(a) be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed

10 milli-seconds).(b) reset within 20 milli seconds(c) be D.C. operated(d) have adequate contacts to meet the requirement

of scheme, other functions like auto-recloserelay, LBB relay as well as cater to associatedequipment like event logger, Disturbancerecorder, fault Locator, etc.

(e) be provided with operation indicators for eachelement/coil.

(xv) Flag RelaysThese shall have(a) hand reset flag indication(b) have minimum two contacts (NO or NC or

combination as required) for each relay

(xvi) Trip Circuit Supervision Relay(a) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the

healthiness of each 'phase' trip-coil and associatedcircuit of circuit breaker during 'ON' and 'OFF'conditions.

(b) The relay shall have adequate contacts forproviding connection to alarm and event logger.

(c) The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of notless than 200 milli seconds and be provided withoperation indications for each phase.

(xvii) Dc Supply Superivision Relay(a) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the

failure of D.C. supply to which, it is connected.(b) It shall have adequate potential free contacts to

meet the scheme requirement.(c) The relay shall have a 'time delay on drop-off' of

not less than 100 milli seconds and be providedwith operation indicator/flag.

114

(xviii) RELAY TEST KITOne relay test kit shall comprise of the followingequipment as detailed here under1 set Relay tools kits.2 nos. Test plugs1 no. Special type test plugs for using with modulartype cases (if applicable)

6.16.13 COMMON INDICATION & ANUNCIATION PANEL(HT SWITCHGEAR DC SUPPLY SYSTEM )A separate panel shall be provided for duplicationof annunciation from 33kV indoor switchgear room.These annunciation shall be suitably wired up andproperly integrated into the common annunciationsystem of the substation. All the annunciationsconsidered important for remote monitoring fromC&R room (by operating staff ) shall be provided inthe panel.i) Protection trip (feeder wise)ii) DC supply failureiii) LT AC supply Failureiv) Healthiness of 33KV BUS

This panel shall also have indication lamps fori) 33 kV Breaker status (On/Off)

Further this panel shall also have followingannunciation facility for monitoring 110/50 V DCsystem

i) Earth Fault in 110V DC-I/IIii) Charger trouble 110/50V-I/II

6.16.14 TYPE TESTS(i) The following type tests shall be conducted on the

Protective relays, Fault locator and, Disturbancerecorder.a) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC

60255-4 (Appendix -E) -Class III (not applicablefor electromechanical relays)

c) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III(not applicable for electromechanical relays)

d) Relay characteristics, performance andaccuracy test as per IEC 60255• Steady state Characteristics and operating

time• Dynamic Characteristics and operating time

for distance protection relays and currentdifferential protection relays

e) Tests for thermal and mechanical requirementsas per IEC 60255-6

f) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6g) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-

20 (not applicable for Event logger, Distance tofault locator and Disturbance recorder)

(ii) Steady state & Dynamic characteristics tests onthe relays (distance protection relays and currentdifferential protection relays), as type test, shall becarried out based on general guide lines specifiedin CIGRE Committee 34 report on simulator/network analyser/PTL.

6.16.15 CONFIGURATION OF C&R PANELSThe following is the general criteria for the selection

of the equipments to be provided in each type ofpanel. The details such as type of panels (Simplex/Duplex), quantity of each type panels, number ofbays for each voltage level for the purpose of busbar protection, number of bays to beaccommodated in each control panel etc shall bespecified elsewhere ( i.e in " BILL OFQUANTITIES").

(i) CONTROL PANELVarious types of control panels shall consist of the followinga Ammeter 1 set for each bayb Wattmeter 1 set for each line, transformerc Varmeter 1 set for each bay, transformer,d CB control switch 1no for each bay breakere Isolator Control switch 1 no. for each isolatorf Semaphore 1 no. for each earth switchg Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breakerh Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolatori Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breakerj Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolatork White indicating lamp 2 nos. for each feeder

(DC healthy lamp)m Annunciation windows 10 nos. for each feeder

with associatedannunciation relays

n Push button for alarm 3 nos. for each control panelAccept/reset/lamp test

o Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panelsp Voltmeter with selector 1 no for each line, transformer

Switchq Cut out, mounting and Lot for transformers

wiring for RWTI andselector switch

Note:1 For transformer feeders, all equipments of control

panel shall be provided separately for HV and LV sides.2 The above list of equipments mentioned for control

panel is generally applicable unless it is definedelsewhere and in case of bay extension in existingsubstations, necessary equipments for matching theexisting control panel shall be supplied

3. Common synchronizing switch is also acceptable inSynchronizing trolley for new Substations. In this case,individual synchronizing selector switch is not requiredfor each Circuit Breaker in control panel

4. Each l ine /HV side of transformer/LV side oftransformer/TBC shall be considered as one feederfor above purpose.

(ii) BREAKER RELAY PANELThe breaker relay panel shall comprise of the followingWith A/RDC supply Supervision relay 2 no.Trip circuit supervision relays 6 nos.Flag relays, aux.relays, timers, triprelays etc as perscheme requirements Lot5 Bus frequency meter (Analog) 1 no. for each main bus

with transducer6 Bus voltmeter(Digital) 1 no. for each main bus7 Bus frequency meter (Digital) 1 no. for each main bus8 Bus healthy indication lamps 3 nos. for each bus

115

Sl. No

Name of circle

Substation MVA Capacity

No. of 33 kV bays

No. of 33 kV spare bay

No. of 11 kV Bays

No. of 11 kV spare bay

No. of bus Sectionalizer each at 33 & 11 kV buses

Station transformer,

100kVA, 11/0.4 kV per s/s

1 PESU (W) Sahitya Sammelan 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1

Digha 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1 2 Rohtas S P Jain College 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1

Sheo Sagar 2x5 1 1 3 3 2 1

Bhabhua 2x5 2 0 4 2 2 1

Dalmianagar 2x5 1 1 3 3 2 1

Dinara 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1

3 Gaya Medical College 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1

Ramsheela Pahari 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1

Area Board campus 2x3.15 1 1 2 4 2 1

Industrial Area Bodh Gaya 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1

Bhusunda(Manpur) 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1

Nawada PSS No. –II 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1

Aurangabad PSS No. -II 2x3.15 1 1 4 2 2 1 Tower Chowk 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1

Central Store 2x3.15 1 1 3 3 2 1 4 Darbhanga Darbhanga Town 2x5 1 1 4 2 2 1

Ahilya Sthan(Kamtaul) 2x5 1 1 2 4 2 1

Basopatti 2x5 1 1 2 4 2 1

Khajauli 2x5 2 0 2 4 2 1

Laukhi 2x5 2 0 2 4 2 1

Table-1.0

7.01 CONSTRUCTION OF NEW 33/11 KV SUBSTATIONSAND R&M OF EXISTING SUBSTATIONS.

7.01.1 GENERALThe material / equipment covered in thisspecification shall be used for Sub-Transmissionand Distribution Improvement Project. The projectis to be executed under Accelerated PowerDevelopment & Reform Programme (APDRP)launched under the aegis of Ministry of Power,Government of India.

7.01.2 33/11 KV SUBSTATIONS(i) Scope of 33/11 kV Substations

For Construction of 33/11 kV new substations, 33kV &11kV equipments shall be out door type exceptwhere 11 KV switchgears shall be indoor (in thecontrol room). 33 kV bus shall be the strung bususing ACSR Panther conductor or 33kV & 11kVbuses shall be on 2" & 1.5" IPS Aluminium tube.However, in case of R&M existing scheme/layoutwill not be altered.The substations are proposed to be constructedat the following places, however exact locationsshall be intimated after award:

(ii) The responsibility of the Contractor shallinclude the following:

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for theoverall co-ordination with internal/externalagencies, project management, training ofowner's manpower, loading, unloading,insurance (storage and transit), handling,moving the required equipment and materialsto final destination for successful erection,testing and commissioning of the substation.

b. Design & engineering of substation and itsassociated electrical & mechanical auxiliarysystems includes preparation of single line

diagrams and physical & electrical layouts,erection key diagrams, electrical and physicalclearance diagrams, design calculations forearth mat and Direct Stroke Lighting Protection(DSLP). Bus Bar, control and protectionschematics, wiring and termination schedules,civil designs and drawings, fire fighting, indoorand outdoor lighting/illumination, ventilation,road, drain, boundary wall, fencing and otherrelevant drawings & documents required for allfacilities within the boundary wall of substationto be provided under this contract, are coveredunder the scope of the Contractor.

116

c. Energy meter, Automatic Data LoggingSystem(ADLS), ACDB, DCDB including supply& erection of 30 volts battery, battery chargerand accessories shall be supplied, erected andcommissioned by the Contractor. Rating/sizingof these distribution boards shall be such soas to take care of the load requirements of theentire substation and are given in the BPS/Specification.

d. Land selection shall be done by Owner.Contractor shall be responsible to develop theland including its filling keeping HFL (highestflood level) in view, levelling and construction ofdrainage, fencing and boundary wall.

e. Contractor shall arrange the construction powerand water required during construction at site.

f. The bidder shall offer type tested equipmentfor the project. The type test shall cover theentire type test specified. Test reports shall notbe older than 5 years as on the date of bidopening. The contractor shall submit type testreports for the equipments offered in the bid forapproval of the owner. In case, any equipmentis not type tested or partially type tested, as perTS in the laboratories acceptable to the owner,the bidder shall carry out type tests at his owncost. If Owner asked Bidder to carry out typetesting as per TS for Transformers, Cables &Battery Charger will be paid extra. Bidder hasto furnish the item rate for the same in the bid.

(iii) The detailed scope of work is brought out in thefollowing clauses.

a. Design, engineering, manufacture, testing,supply on FOR destinat ion si te basis,transportation, storage, erection, insurance,testing and commissioning of following itemsat each of the 33/11 kV substation as per table1.0 and as per typical layout. This shall includefollowing:

b. Developing layout for the substation and submitthe same for the approval of the Owner.

c. Supply and erection of the 33/11 kV Powertransformers, 33 kV and 11 kV Circuit breakers,isolators, current transformers, voltagetransformers, surge arresters etc. To carry outall civil works including equipment and gantrystructure foundations, supply & erection ofequipment structures are in contractor's scope.The transformer shall be procured from amanufacturer who must have designed,manufactured, type tested, commissionedpower transformers of 33/11 kV rating and mustbe in satisfactory operation for at least two yearson the date of bid opening.

d. Surge arrestors of suitable rating shall besupplied and erected on the receiving end ofthe 33 kV line and 33kV Bus Bar/powertransformer. The necessary coordinationbetween all these arrestors shall be ensuredby the contractor and detailed report for choosingdifferent rating arrestors shall be submitted toOwner for comments and approval.

e. Complete Indication, control, relay andprotection system bay wise for the sub station.

f. LT switchgear (AC/DC Distribution boards).g. 11 kV grade XLPE single core 300 mm2 shall

be used for connecting 11 kV side of the powertransformer to the 11 kV bus. 11 kV grade threecore XLPE cable shall be used to connectrespective module of 11 kV to the gantrystructure. This shall be supplied erected andcommissioned as per specification.

h. 33kV XLPE cable shall be supplied erected andcommissioned as per specification no.

i. Fire fighting system consisting of portable fireextinguishers (DCP and CO2 type).

j. Batteries & Battery Chargers shall be suppliederected and commissioned as perspecification.

k. 1.1 kV grade PVC, Power & Control cablesalong with complete accessories and laying.Control cables shall have screen. Supply of thepower and control cables shall be as perspecification.

l. Supply and erection of the galvanized Latticestructures (if required) and rail pole structure(For 33 kV & 11kV, Contractor has to design,supply and erect the same)

m. Insulator strings and hardware, clamps &connectors, bus bar, jumpers, droppers andearthing materials, Bay marshalling box, cablesupporting angles/channels, Trench cover, sagcompensating springs(if required), Junctionbox, cable trenches etc.

n. Designing, supply and erection of the lightningprotection of the complete substation.

o. Contractor shall install the fluorescent industrialtube lights each having tube light 40Watts withreflectors and other accessories as per detailsgiven in the relevant chapter.

• Control room : 350 lux• Switchyard : 50 lux on main equipment

at first level (equipmentconnection level) 20 lux onbalance switchyard & roadetc.

The bidder shall submit the calculation toachieve the requisite lux levels for approval.

p. Terminal connectors of all types & rating for allthe equipments (including terminal connectorsfor 33/11 KV and 11/0.433 kV auxiliarytransformer).

q. All items including safety equipment, testinginstruments, tools & plants, relays & panelmeters as per BPS.

r. Receipt, Unloading, Storage, handling,insurance, Erection, testing andcommissioning of 33/11kV transformers (to besupplied by the contractor).

s. The supply of 11 kV XLPE cables from 11 kVswitchgear to respective take off structure forindoor 11kV system shall be in the scope of the

117

contractor. This shall include the supply anderection of suitable termination kits andtermination to the take off gantry shall form partof this contract. All incoming and outgoingcontrol & protection panels shall be in thescope of supply, erection and commissioning.

t. Design. Engineering, system study, supply ofhardware and software installation, testing andcommissioning of energy meter and ADLS asspecified.

u Civil works - Refer document no: CIVIL SPEC.The following shall form the scope:Leveling of the sites shall be in the scope of thecontractor.

v Before proceeding with the construction workof the new substation, the Contractor shall fullyfamiliarize himself with the site conditions andgeneral arrangements, scheme etc. Though theowner shall endeavor to provide theinformation, it shall not be binding for the ownerto provide the same. The contractors areadvised to visit the substation site necessarilyand acquaint themselves with the topography,site land contour and profile, HFL, infrastructurerequired & available and also the designphilosophy before submitting the offer. Thecontractor shall be fully responsible forarranging all equipments, materials, systemand services specified or otherwise, which arerequired to complete the construction andsuccessful commissioning, operat ion &maintenance of the substation in all respects.All concrete grades shall be M-20.

w. Contractor shall carry out measurements of theearth resistivity and then design the earth matsuch that earth resistance, in no case, exceeds2 ohm. Contractor shall also design andconstruct earth pits for the transformer and LAsneutral. Resistance of the pipe type earthingshall be less than 4 ohms. The supply andlaying of earth mat shall be paid as per theprovisions of the BPS.

x. Contractor shall be responsible for designingthe earth mat of the switchyard. The spacing ofbetween GS flats shall be decided by thecontractor in such a way that the specified valueof the ground resistance (as per IS/IEEE) isachieved. Contractor shall be responsible formeeting step and touch potentials as specifiedin relevant IS.

y. The contractor shall be designing the electrode(pipe) earthing of the neutal of LAs & PTs,Power transformer keeping in view the specifiedvalue of the electrode earth resistance.Contractor shall also be responsible to connectthe electrode earth pits with the switchyard earthmat including supply of the required materialfor the same.

z. R&M of Existing SubstationR&M of following no of substations are includedin the scope of the work of the respective

packages.Sl. No Circle No of substation1 PESU(W) 252 Rotas 93 Gaya 134 Darbhanga 23

2.1 All handling, insurance and transportation ofexisting 33/11kV transformer, in case ofAugmentation, shall be carried out by thecontractor. A schedule of the transformer to beshifted is given at table-2.

2.2 Contractor shall visit the existing substationsites before bidding.

2.3 Wherever, the transformer earthing (neutral) isnot proper, contractor shall have to erect newearthing.

2.4 Wherever shutdown of the running system isrequired, contractor shall submit writtenrequest for the same to Owner at least 7 daysin advance.

2.5 Contractor shall have to supply and erect allclamps, connectors, hardware etc includingjumpers etc for carrying out the R&M works.Necessary T&P required during the work shallbe arranged by the contractor.

2.6 Contractor shall have to use existing approachroad for transporting its goods and material tosubstation site and he shall include the jobs ofroad strengthening, repair etc. in his scope.

2.7 Necessary construction water and power shallbe arranged by the contractor however, Ownershall extend all possible help to the contractor,if available.

2.8 In case of bay extension: the scope shall includethe following:

2.9 Erection and commissioning of the bayincluding supply of all equipments, necessaryhardware and conductor. In this case controlsupply will be 110 volt DC.

2.10 The land shall be handed over to the contractorby the Owner.

1.11 Contractor shall be responsible to supply theequipments as per their respectivespecif ications, being enclosed with thisspecification.

2.12 Necessary foundation drawings shall besubmitted to Owner for comments andapproval.

2.13 Earthing (new / strengthening) of all theequipments shall be in the scope of thecontractor.

2.14 Supply shall include 33 kV VCB including itscontrol and protection panel.

2.15 Contractor shall submit detailed layout and GAof the bay for comments and approval.

2.16 Civil works like equipment foundation, cabletrenches, drains, developing the bay area,laying earth mat shall be the responsibility ofthe contractor.

118

2.17 Contractor shall supply & erect all power andcontrol cables necessary for safe O&M of thebay.

2.18 Contractor shall include the bus extension ifneeded and termination of the 33 kV line to thegantry on one side and 33/11 kV powertransformer toward yard end.

2.19 11.10.11 Extension of the auxiliary supply AC /DC from the existing ACDB/DCDB shall bearranged by the contractor. Supply, erection andcommissiong including all accessories andhardware, power and control cables etc shallbe as per specification.

2.20 Complete Indication, control, relay andprotection system bay wise for the sub station.

2.21 LT switchgear (AC/DC Distribution boards).2.22 Batteries & Battery Chargers shall be supplied

erected and commissioned as perspecification.

2.23 1.1 kV grade PVC, Power & Control cablesalong with complete accessories and laying.Control cables shall have screen. Supply of thepower and control cables shall be as perspecification.

2.24 Supply and erection of the galvanized Latticestructures (if required) and rail pole structure(For 33 kV & 11kV, Contractor has to design,supply and erect the same).

2.25 Insulator strings and hardware, clamps &connectors, bus bar, jumpers, droppers andearthing materials, Bay marshalling box, cablesupporting angles/channels, Trench cover, sagcompensating springs(if required), Junctionbox, cable trenches etc.

2.26 Contractor shall install the fluorescent industrialtube lights each having tube light 40 Watts withreflectors and other accessories as per detailsgiven in the relevant chapter. Substation lightingwill be governed as per provision of BPS.

2.27 All items including safety equipment, testinginstruments, tools & plants, relays & panelmeters as per BPS.

2.28 Receipt, Unloading, Storage, handling,insurance, Erection, testing andcommissioning of 33/11kV transformers (to besupplied by the contractor).

2.29 In R&M of existing substation matching earthmat & gravel filling/brick soling has to beprovided by the bidder. This will be decided inthe detailed engineering.

(iv) LIGHTNING PROTECTIONa. Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall

be designed, supplied & installed in theswitchyard by shield wires. The drawing shallbe submitted by the bidder for owner's approval.The final arrangement shall be decided afterapproval of the DSLP calculation by Owner.

b. The lightning protection shall not be in directcontact with underground metallic service ducts

and cable.c. Conductor of the lightning protection system

shall not be connected with the conductor ofthe safety earthing system above ground level.

d. Lightning conductor shall not pass through &run inside GI conduit.

(v) MISCELLANEOUS ITEMSThe following items shall also be covered underthis specification:

a. Construction of boundary wall with barbed wirefencing along substation property line.

b. Barbed wire security fencing for the switchyardarea.

c. Any other items not specifically mentioned inthis specification but required for erection,testing and commissioning and satisfactoryoperation of the substation are deemed to beincluded in contractor's scope unlessspecifically excluded.

7.01.3 PHYSICAL AND OTHER DATA(i) Location of the Substations - The places where

the substations shall be located are given inTable-1.0.

(ii) Meteorological-Data -The meteorological dataof the substations shal l be provided tosuccessful bidder after award. However fordesign purposes, ambient temperature shouldbe considered as 50 deg. C and relativeHumidity as 100 %, height above mean sealevel shall be taken as < 1000 meter.

(iii) Soil Data -The contractor shall be responsiblefor carrying out the required tests and shouldfully satisfy himself about the nature of soilexpected to be encountered prior to thesubmission of bid. Any variation of soil dataduring detailed engineering or constructionstage shall not constitute a valid reason inaffecting the terms and conditions of the bid.

7.01.4 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES(i) The bill of quantity of equipments/items/works

which are payable on unit rate is indicated inthe Bid Proposal Sheets.

(ii) In some places, small civil work like controlroom extension, repair of boundary wall etc. maycome - up during execution (For R&M of existingsubstation only). For such works payment willbe made on the basis of DSR.

7.01.5 SYSTEM PARAMETERSSl. Description of the 33 kV 11 kVNo. parameter System System1. System operating Voltage 33 kV 11kV2. Maximum operating 36 kV 12 kV

voltage of the system (rms)3. Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz

119

4. No. of phases 3 35. Rated Insulation levels

(i) Full wave impulse 170 kVp 75 kVpwithstand voltage(1.2/50 micro sec.)

(ii) One minute power 80 kV 28 kVfrequency dry and wetwithstand volt - age (rms)

6. Min. creepage distance 25 mm/kV 25 mm/ kV

(900 mm) (300 mm)7. Min. clearances

(i) Phase to earth 320 mm 140 mm(ii) Phase to phase 640 mm 280 mm(iii) Sectional clearances 3000 mm

8. Rated short circuit 25 kA 25 kAcurrent for 3 sec. for 3 sec

9. System neutral Solidly Solidly

earthing earthed earthedNote: The insulation and RIV levels of the equipment shallbe as per values given in the respective chapter of theequipments.

7.01.6 DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF 33 kV EQUIPMENTSThe equipments of 33 kV class in general shallmeet the requirements as per relevant section ofspecifications of individual equipments except forthe following details:

(i) 33 kV Circuit Breaker- For details, refer specificationof VCB

(ii) 33 kV Isolators -For details refer specification ofISOLATOR

(iii) 33 kV Class Surge Arrester -For details, referspecification of LA

(iv) 33 kV Current & Potential Transformer -33 kV voltagetransformers shall be Electromagnetic type VT. Fordetails, refer specification of PT

(v) POWER TRANSFORMER- 3-Phase, 33/11 kV, 3.15& 5 MVA transformers. For details refer specificationof POWER_TRF

7.01.7 11 KV EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS(i) 11 kV VCB & Switchboard - For details, refer

specification of IND_PNL.

(ii) Station Transformer -This specification is intendedto cover outdoor type (supply, erection &commissioning) oil filled 11/0.433 kV, 100 KVAtransformers. Foundation, hardware, conductor fordropper/jumper shall be in the contractor's scope.The detailed specification shall be governed byspecification of STN_TRF. The station transformershall be mounted on the plinth. The design &construction of the plinth/ foundation of thetransformer shall be in the scope of the contractor.

(iii) LIGHTING SYSTEM - For details, refer specificationof LIGHTING

(iv) DISC INSULATOR, STRING INSULATOR -The

parameters of 33 kV disc insulators and 33 kVinsulator string are as follows

a Disc Insulators for 33 kVa1)Type of insulators : Suitable for

m o d e r a t e l yp o l l u t e datmosphere.

b2)Electro mechanical : 70 KNstrength

c3) Creepage distance of : 25 mm/kVIndividual Insulator units(minimum and asrequired to meet totalCreepage distance)

d4)Markings : Markings onporcelain shallbe printed andapplied beforefiring

e5)Power frequency puncture : 1.3 times theWithstand voltage actual wet

f l a s h o v e rvoltage.

b. Insulator String for 33 kVa1)Power frequency withstand : 75 kV rms

voltage of the completestring with Corona Controlring (wet)

b2)Lightning impulse withstand : ±170 kVpVoltage of string with coronacontrol rings (dry)

c3) Total Creepage distance : 900 mmd4)Total no. of discs per string : 3

7.01.8 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM:Mainly the protection against the fire hazard shallbe achieved using portable fire extinguisher namelyDry powder chemical and CO2 type. They are to beplaced at strategic locations. For details of portablefire extinguisher refer specification ofMiscellaneous items.

7.01.9 PROTECTIONS(i) Lines & Transformer

The following protections shall be provided for33 kV lines and 33/11 kV power transformers.All these protection functions shall givecommand to a master trip relay, which can bemanually set & reset. Each transformer shallhave circuit breaker on both sides.

a. For power transformer:a1 Three over current and one earth fault protection

for Transformer on HT side.a2 Three over current and one earth fault protection

on secondary side.a3 Restricted earth fault protection on Secondary

sidea4 Winding temperature Alarm/Tripa5 Buchholz Relay Alarm/tripa6 Pressure Relief Device protection for main tanka7 Pressure trip relay for the main tank.

120

(ii) Control and Relay PanelsConfiguration of C&R panels for 33 kV & 11 kVlines shall be of simplex type. These shall havethe following equipments:

a Control & Instrumentation to be provided inC&R Paneli) 33 kV C&R Panel shall be as per CR_PNLii) 11 kV C&R panel has been included with 11

kV VCB as described in IND_PNL

iii) The detailed description of the control andrelay panel equipment (for 33 kV) shall beas per the specification of CR_PNL.

Note: Common synchronizing switch is alsoacceptable in Synchronizing trolley for newSubstations where two 33 kV systems areplanned to be run in parallel. In this caseindividual synchronizing selector switch is notrequired for each Circuit Breaker in controlpanel.

7.01.10 BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGSThe reference drawings, consisting of a typicalindicative Single Line Diagram (SLD) & elevationdrawings are enclosed with the bid document,which forms a part of the specification. The list ofdrawing enclosed with this specification is givenin the section drawing. These drawings are onlyindicative and are to be used only for tender purposeonly. The contractor shall develop a new layout inline with the specification and take the approval ofthe Owner. The contractor shall maintain the overalldimensions of the substation, buildings, bay length,bay width, phase to earth clearance, phase tophase clearance and sectional clearances,clearances between buses, bus heights but mayalter the locations of equipment to obtain thestatutory electrical clearances as required for thesubstation.

The enclosed drawings give the basic scheme. Incase of any discrepancy between the drawings andtext of specification, the requirements of text shallprevail in general. However, the Contractor isadvised to get these clarified from Owner.

7.01.11 STANDARDS(i) The codes and/or standards referred to in the

specifications shall govern, in all cases whereversuch references are made. In case of a conflictbetween such codes and/or standards and thespecifications, latter shall govern. Such codes and/or standards, referred to shall mean the latestrevisions, amendments/changes adopted andpublished by the relevant agencies unlessotherwise indicated. Other internationally acceptedstandards which ensure equal or betterperformance than those specified shall also beaccepted, subject to prior approval by thePurchaser. In case no reference is given for anyitem in these specif ications, latest RECspecification & Construction Standards shall bereferred to.

(ii) The manufacturing, fabrication, galvanising,testing, erection procedure and materials used formanufacture and erection of poles shall conformto the following Indian Standards (IS)/InternationalStandards which shall mean latest revisions, withamendments/changes adopted and published,unless specif ical ly stated otherwise in thespecification. In the event of supply of materialconforming to Standards other than specified, theBidder shall confirm in his bid that these Standardsare equivalent to those specified. In case of award,salient features of comparison between theStandards proposed by the Bidder and thosespecified in this document will be provided by theContractor to establish their equivalence.

(iii) The material and services covered under thesespecifications shall be performed as perrequirements of the relevant standard codepreferred hereinafter against each set of equipmentand services. Other Internationally acceptablestandards which ensure equal or higherperformance than those specified shall also beaccepted.

(iv) The equipment for which technical specification isnot enclosed that will be as per IS/IEC and otherrelevant standards.

7.01.12 Ambient ConditionThe Equipment supplied against this specificationshall be suitable for satisfactory continuousoperation under the following tropical conditions:Max. ambient temp. (deg C) : 50Relative Humidity : 10-100 %Max. Annual Rainfall (mm) : 1450Max. Wind Pressure (Kg/Sq. Mt.) : 150Max. Altitude above MSL(Mtr.) : 1000Isoceraunic Level(dyas/year) : 50Seismic Level (Horizontal acceleration) : 0.3 gms

In general the climate shall be moderately hot &humid tropical climate conducive to rust & fungusgrowth

7.01.13 Quality Assurance PlanTo ensure that the equipment and services underthe scope of this contract, whether manufacturedor performed at contractor's works or at his sub-contractor's premises or at site or at any other placeof work are in accordance with the specification,the contractor shall submit suitable qualityassurance programme with the bid to control suchactivities at all points. Such programmes shall beoutlined by the contractor and shall be finallyaccepted by purchaser after discussions on awardof contract. A quality assurance programmefurnished by the bidder shall generally cover thefollowing.a) Contractor organisation structure for the

management and Implementation of theproposed quality assurance programme.

b) Documentation control systemc) Qualification data of contractor key personneld) Procedure for purchase of materials, parts,

components and selection of sub-contractor

121

services including vendor, source inspectionincoming raw material inspection, verificationof material purchased etc.

e) System for shop manufacturing and siteerection controls including process control andfabrication and assembly control.

f) Control of non-conforming items and system/steps for correcting such items.

g) Control of calibration and testing of measuringand testing equipments.

h) Inspection and test procedure both formanufacture and field activities.

i) System for indication and appraisal ofinspection status.

j) System for quality auditsk) System for authorising release of manufactured

product to the purchaserl) System for maintenance of recordsm) System for handling, storage and deliveryn) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality

control procedure adopted for controlling the

quality characteristics relevant to each item ofequipment furnished.

Table: 2 - Transportation of Transformer CircleSl. Substation Rating No of DestinationNo. (MVA) Transformer Darbhanga1 DMCH 1x3.15 1 Nirmali2 Bela 1x3.15 1 Donar

3 Gangwara 1x3.15 1 Sonhapurdih4 Anar 1x1.6 1 Central Store5 Pandaul 1x1.6 1 Manigachhi6 Jainagar 2x3.15 2 Benipatt & Anar7 Benipatti 1x1.6 1 Raiyyam8 Rajnagar 2x1.6 2 Babubarhi &

Biraul9 Manigachhi 1x1.6 1 Central Store

10 Jhanjharpur 2x1.6 2 Tulapatganj &Madhepur

11 Phulparas 1x1.6 1 Nirmali12 Nirmali 1x1.6(Burnt) 1 Central Strore

v v v

7.02 SUBSTATION CIVIL WORKS

7.02.1 GENERALThe intent of specification covers the following:Design, engineering, and construction of all civilworks at sub-station. All civil works shall also satisfythe general technical requirements specified inother Section is of this Specification and as detailedbelow. They shall be designed to the requiredservice conditions/loads as specified elsewherein this Specification or implied as per National/International Standards.All civil works shall be carried out as per applicableIndian Laws, Standards and Codes. All materialsshall be of best quality conforming to relevant IndianStandards and Codes.The Contractor shall furnish all design, drawings,labour, tools, equipment, materials, temporaryworks, constructional plant and machinery, fuelsupply, transportation and all other incidental itemsnot shown or specified but as may be required forcomplete performance of the Works in accordancewith approved drawings, specifications anddirection of Employer.The work shall be carried out according to thedesign/drawings to be developed by the Contractorand approved by the owner based on TenderDrawings Supplied to the Contractor by the Owner.For all buildings, structures, foundations, etc.,necessary layout and details shall be developedby the Contractor keeping in view the functional

requirement of the substation facilities andproviding enough space and access for operation,use and maintenance based on the input providedby the Owner. Certain minimum requirements areindicated in this specification for guidancepurposes only. However, the Contractor shall quoteaccording to the complete requirements.

7.02.2 GEO-TECHNICAL INVESTIGATION(i) The Contractor shall perform a detailed soil

investigation to arrive at sufficiently accurate,general as well as specific information about thesoil profile and the necessary soil parameters ofthe Site in order that the foundation of the variousstructures can be designed and constructed safelyand rationally.A report to the effect will be submitted by thecontractor for Owner's specific approval givingdetails regarding data proposed to be utilized forcivil structures design.

(ii) The Contractor may visit the site to ascertain thesoil parameters. The topography is uneven steeply-sloping at few places requiring cutting and fillingoperations including slope stability and protectionmeasures (if slopes encountered). Any variationin soil data shall not constitute a valid reason forany additional cost and shall not affect the termsand conditions of the Contract. Tests must beconducted under all the critical locations, i.e.,

122

Control Room Building, Tower locations,transformer, etc.

(iii) SCOPE OF WORKThis specification covers all the work required fordetailed soil investigation and preparation of adetailed report. The work shall include mobilizationof necessary equipment, providing necessaryengineering supervision and technical personnel,skilled and unskilled labour, etc., as required tocarry out field investigation as well as, laboratoryinvestigation, analysis and interpretation of dataand results, preparation of detailed Geo-Technicalreport including specific recommendations for thetype of foundations and the allowable safe bearingcapacity for different sizes of foundations at differentfounding strata for the various structures of thesubstation. The Contractor shall make his ownarrangement for locating the co-ordinates andvarious test positions in field as per the informationsupplied to him and also for determining thereduced level of these locations with respect to thebenchmark indicated by the Owner.All the work shall be carried out as per latest editionof the corresponding Indian Standard Codes.

a. Bore HolesDrilling of bore holes of 150 mm dia, in accordancewith the provisions of IS:1982 at the rate of minimumtwo number of bore holes per bay to 15 m depth orto refusal which ever occur earlier. (By refusal itshall mean that a standard penetration blow count(N) of 100 is recorded for 30 cm penetration).However, in case deep pile foundations areenvisaged the depths have to be regulated as percodel provisions. In cases where rock isencountered, coring in one borehole per bay shallbe carried out to 3 M in bedrock and continuouscore recovery is achieved.Performing Standard Penetration Tests atapproximately 1.5 m interval in the borehole startingfrom 1.5 m below ground level onwards and atevery change of stratum. The disturbed samplesfrom the standard penetrometer shall also becollected for necessary tests.Collecting undistributed samples of 100/75 mmdiameter 450 mm long from the boreholes atintervals of 2.5 m and every change of stratumstarting from 1.0 m below ground level onwards inclayey strata.The depth of Water Table shall be recorded in eachborehole.All samples, both disturbed and undisturbed, shallbe identified properly with the borehole numberand depth from which they have been taken.The sample shall be sealed at both ends of thesampling tubes with wax immediately after thesampling and shall be packed properly andtransported to the Contractor's laboratory withoutany damage or loss.The logging of the boreholes shall be compiled

immediately after the boring is completed and acopy of the bolero shall be handed over to theEngineer-in-Charge.

b. Dynamic Cone Penetration TestDynamic cone penetration tests of two numbersshall be carried out with the circulation of bentoniteslurry at specified locations and a continuousrecord of penetration resistance (NG) upto 15.00meter from natural ground level or the refusal shallbe maintained by the Contractor IS: 4968 (Part-2)shall be followed for carrying out the test andreporting results.The location for tests shall be as directed by theOwner. On completion of the test, the results shallbe presented as a continuous record as thenumbers of blows required for every 300 mmpenetration of the cone into the soil.

c. Trial PitsTrial pits shall be carried at specified one locationsof per bay as directed by the Owner. The trial pitsshall be 2m x 2m in size extending to 4 m depths,or as specified by the Owner. Undisturbed samplesshall be taken from the trial pits as per the directionof the Owner.

d. Electrical Receptivity TestThis test shall be conducted to determine theElectrical receptivity of soil required for designingsafe grounding system for the entire station area.The specifications for the equipments and otheraccessories required for performing electricalreceptivity test, the test procedure, and reporting offield observations shall confirm to IS: 3043. Thetest shall be conducted using Wagner's fourelectrode method as specif ied in IS: 1892,Appendix-B2. Unless otherwise specified at eachtest location, the test shall be conduced along twoperpendicular lines parallel to the co-ordinate axis.On each line a minimum of 8 to 10 readings shallbe taken by changing the spacing of the electrodesfrom an initial small value of 0.5 m upto a distanceof 10.0 m.

e. Plate Load TestPlate load test shall be conducted to determinethe bearing capacity, modulus of sub-gradereaction and load/settlement characteristics of soilat shallow depths by loading a plane and level steelplate kept at the desired depth and measuring thesettlement under different loads, until a desiredsettlement takes place or failure occurs. Thespecification for the equipment and accessoriesrequired for conducting the test, the test procedure,field observations and reporting of results shallconform to IS: 1888. Modulus of sub-grade reactionshall be conducted as per IS: 9214. The locationand depth of the test shall be as given below:1) One at Control Building location at the

proposed foundation depth below finishedground level for bearing capacity.

2) One test at Transformer foundation location atproposed foundation depth below FGL.Undisturbed tube samples shall be collected

123

at 1.0 m and 2.5 m depths from natural groundlevel for carrying out laboratory tests.The size of the pit in plate load test shall not beless than five times the plate size and shall betaken upto the specified depth. All provisionsregarding excavation and visual examinationof pit shall apply here.

Unless otherwise specif ied the reactionmethod of loading shal l be adopted.Settlement shall be recorded from dial gaugesplaced at four diametrically opposite ends ofthe test plate.The load shall be increased in stages. Undereach loading stage, record of t ime Vs.Settlement shall be kept as specified in IS: 1888.Backfilling of the pit shall be carried out as perthe directions of the Owner. Unless otherwisespecified the excavated soil shall be used forthis purpose. In cases of gravel-boulder or rockystrata, respective relevant codes shall befollowed for tests.

f. Water Sample

Representative samples of ground water shall betaken when ground water is first encountered beforethe addition of water to aid drilling of boreholes.The samples shall be of sufficient quantity forchemical analysis to be carried out and shall bestored in airtight containers.

g. Back Filling Bore HolesOn completion of each hole, the Contractor shallbackfill all boreholes as directed by the Owner. Thebackfill material can be the excavated material.

h. Laboratory Test1. The laboratory tests shall be carried out

progressively during the field work after sufficientnumber of samples have reached the laboratoryin order that the test results of the initialboreholes can be made use of in planning thelater stages of the field investigation andquantum of laboratory tests.in draft form and after the draft report isapproved, the final report in four (4) copies shallbe submitted. The test data shall bear thesignatures of the Investigation Agency, Vendorand also site representative of POWERGRID.

i. The report showing the locations of the explorationwork i.e., bore holes, dynamic cone penetrationtests, trial pits. Plate load test, etc.a) A plan showing the locations of the exploration

work i.e., bore holes, dynamic cone penetrationtests, trial pits. Plate load test, etc.

b) Bore Logs: Bore logs of each bore holes clearlyidentifying the stratification and the type of soilstratum with depth. The values of StandardPenetration Test (SPT) at the depths where thetests were conducted on the samples collectedat various depths shall be clearly shown againstthat particular stratum.

Test results of field and laboratory tests shallbe summarized strata wise as well in combinedtabular form. All relevant graphs, charts tables,

diagrams and photographs, if any, shall besubmitted along with report. Sample illustrativereference calculations for settlement, bearingcapacity, pile capacity shall be enclosed.

j RecommendationsThe report should contain specif icrecommendations for the type of foundation for thevarious structures envisaged at site. The Contractorshall acquaint himself about the type of structuresand their functions from the Owner. Theobservations and recommendations shall includebut not limited to the following:1. Geological formation of the area, past

observations or historical data, if available, forthe area and for the structures in the nearbyarea, fluctuations of water table, etc. slopestability characteristics and landslide history ofthe area shall be specifically highlighted.Remedial measures to be adopted shall alsobe given.

2. recommended type of foundations for variousstructures. If piles are recommended the type,size and capacity of pile and groups of pilesshall be given after comparing different typesand sizes of piles and pile groups.

3. Allowable bearing pressure on the soil atvarious depths for different sizes of thefoundations based on shear strength andsettlement characteristics of soil withsupporting calculations. Minimum factor ofsafety for calculating net safe bearing capacityshall be taken as 3.0 (three). Recommendationof liquifaction characteristics of soil shall beprovided.

4. Recommendations regarding slope ofexcavations and dewatering schemes, ifrequired. Required protection measures forslope stabil i ty for cut and fi l l slopes ofswitchyard and approach road with stonepitching/retaining walls shall be clearly speltout. Calculation shall also be provided forstability adequacy.

5. Comments on the Chemical nature of soil andground water with due regard to deleteriouseffect of the same on concrete and steel andrecommendations for protective measures.

6. If expensive soil is met with, recommendationon removal or retainment of the same underthe structure, road, drains, etc., shall be given.In the later case detailed specification of anyspecial treatment required includingspecif ication or materials to be used,construction method, equipments to bedeployed, etc., shall be furnished. Illustrativediagram of a symbolic foundation showingdetails shall be furnished.

7. Recommendations for additional investigationsbeyond the scope of the present wo0rk, ifconsidered such investigation as necessary.

(iv) SITE PREPARATION

The Contractor shall be responsible for proper

124

leveling of switchyard site as per layout and levelsof switchyard finalised during detailed engineeringstage. The Contractor at his own cost shall makethe layout and levels of all structure, etc., from thegeneral grids of the plot and benchmarks set bythe Contractor and approved by the Owner. TheContractor shall give all help in instruments,materials and personal to the Owner for checkingthe detailed layout and shall be solely responsiblefor the correctness of the layout and levels. Siteleveling shall be in the scope of the contractor.Bidder may decide the level of the sites. However,the level shall be such that it is 300 mm higherthan the highest flood level (HFL) of the site.

(v) SCOPE OF WORKSThis clause covers the design and execution of thework for site preparation, such as clearing of thesite, the supply and compaction of fill material,slope protection by stone pitching/retaining wallsdepending on the site location/ condition,excavation and compaction of backfill for foundation,road construction, drainage, trenches and finaltopping by stone (broken hard stone).

a. General1) The Contractor shall develop the site area to

meet the requirement of the intended purpose.The site preparation shall conform to therequirements of relevant sections of thisspecification or as per stipulations of standardspecifications. Necessary protection of slopeof switchyard area and approach road shallalso be carried out by contractor.

2) If fill material is required, the fill material shallbe suitable for the above requirement. The fillshall be such a material and the site sodesigned as to prevent the erosion by wind andwater of material from its final compactedposition or the in-site position of undisturbedsoil.

3) When embankments are to be constructed onslopes of 15% or greater, benches or stepswith horizontal and vertical faces shall be cut inthe original slope prior to placement ofembankment material. Vertical faces shallmeasure not more than 1 m in height.

4) Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts,retaining walls and similar structures shall beconstructed by compacting the material insuccessive uniform horizontal layers notexceeding 15 cm in thickness. (Of loosematerial before compaction). Each layer shallbe compacted as required by means ofmechanical tampers approved by the Owner.Rocks larger than 10 cm in any direction shallnot be placed in embankment adjacent tostructures.

5) Earth embankments of roadways and siteareas adjacent to buildings shall be placed insuccessive uniform horizontal layers notexceeding 20 cm in thickness in loose stagemeasurement and compacted to the full widthspecified. The upper surface of the

embankment shall be shaped so as to providecomplete drainage of surface water at all times.

6) The pitching shall be designed and provided forslope protection as per approved drawings.The stone used shall be sound, hard, durableand fairly regular in shape. Stones subjectedto marked deterioration by water or weathershall not be used. Suitable measures shall beprovided to prevent erosion by seepage of water.Largest stone procurable shall be used asapproved by owner for the work. Random rubblemasonry (1:6) retaining walls shall be providedwherever required as per site condition.

b. Compaction1. The density to which fill materials shall be

compacted shall be as per relevant IS and asper direction of Owner. All compacted sandfilling shall be confined as far as practicable.Backfi l led earth shall be compacted tominimum 95% of the Standard Proctor's densityat OMC. The sub-grade for the roads andembankment filling shall be compacted to 70%relative density (minimum).

2. At all times unfinished construction shall haveadequate drainage. Upon completion of theroad's surface course, adjacent shoulders shallbe given a final shaping, true alignment andgrade.

3. Each layer of earth embankment whencompacted shall be as close to optimummoisture content as practicable. Embankmentmaterial, which does not contain sufficientmoisture to obtain proper compaction, shall bewetted. If the material contains any excessmoisture then it shall be allowed to dry beforerolling. The rolling shall begin at the edgesoverlapping half the width of the roller each timeand progress to the center of the road ortowards the building as applicable. Rolling willalso be required on rock fills. No compactionshall be carried out in rainy weather.

c. Requirement for fill material under foundationThe thickness of fill material under the foundationsshall be such that the maximum pressure from thefooting, transferred through the fill material anddistributed onto the original undisturbed soil willnot exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure ofthe original undisturbed soil. For expansive soilsthe fill materials and other protections, etc., to beused under the foundation is to be got approved bythe Owner.

(vi) ANTI-WEED TREATMENT AND STONE SPREADING

a. Scope of WorksThe Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipmentand materials required for complete performanceof the work in accordance with the drawingsspecification and direction of the Owner.Stone spreading shall be done in the areas of theswitchyard wherever equipments and or structuresare to be provided under present scope of work.The stone spreading in future areas shall also be

125

provided in case potential without stone layer isnot well within safer limits.

(vii) GENERAL REQUIREMENTa The material required for site surfacing/stone filling

shall be free from all types of organic materialsand shall be of standard quality, and as approvedby the Owner.The material to be used for stone filling/sitesurfacing shall be uncrushed/ crushed/brokenstone of 20 mm nominal size (upgraded singlesize) conforming to Table 2 of IS:383-1970.Hardness, Flakiness shall be as required forwearing courses are given below:

1. Sieve Analysis Limits (Gradation)(IS: 383 -Tabel-2)Sieve Size% passing by weight40 mm 10020 mm 85 - 10010 mm 0 - 204.75 mm 0 - 5

2. HardnessAbrasion value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than40%Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than30% and frequency shall be one test per 500cum with a minimum of one test per source.

3. Flakiness IndexOne test shall be conducted per 500 cum ofaggregate as per IS: 2386 Part-I and maximumvalue is 25%.

b. After all the structures/equipments are erected andanti-weed treatment is complete, the surface of theswitchyard area shall be maintained, rolled/compacted to the lines and grades as decided byEngineer-in-Charge. De-weeding includingremoval of roots shall be done before rolling iscommenced. Engineer-in-Charge shall decidefinal formation level so as to ensure that the siteappears uniform devoid of undulations. The finalformation level shall however be very close to theformation level indicated in the drawing using halfton roller with suitable water sprinkling arrangementto form a smooth and compact surface.

c. A base layer of uncrushed/crushed/broken stoneof 20 mm nominal size (ungraded single size) shallbe spread and rolled/compacted by using half tonroller with 4 to 5 passes and water sprinkling toform a minimum 50 mm layer on the finishedground level of the specified switchyard areaexcluding roads, drains, cable trench and towerand equipment foundations as indicated in thedrawing.

d. Over the base layer of site surfacing material, afinal surface course of minimum 50 mm thicknessof 20 mm nominal size (single size ungraded)broken stone as specified above shall be spreadand compacted by light roller using half tones steelroller (width 30" and 24" diameter) with watersprinkling as directed by he Engineer-in-Charge.

The water shall be sprinkled in such a way thatbulking does not take place.

e. In areas that are considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be too congested with foundations andstructures for proper rolling of the site surfacingmaterial by normal rolling equipments, the materialshall be compacted by hand, if necessary. Duecare shall be exercised so as not to damage anyfoundation structures or equipment during rollingcompaction.

f. Before taking up stone filling, anti-weed treatmentshall be applied in the switchyard area wherevergravel filling is to be done, and the area shall bethoroughly de-weeded including removal of roots.The recommendation of local agriculture orhorticulture department shall be sought whereverfeasible while choosing the type of chemical to beused. Nevertheless the effectiveness of thechemical shall be demonstrated by the Contractorin a test area of 10M x 10M (approx.) and monitoredover a period of two to three weeks by the Engineer-in-Charge. The final approval shall be given byEngineer-in-Charge and final approval given basedon the results.

g. The anti-weed chemical shall be procured fromreputed manufacturers.The dosage and application of chemical shall bestrictly followed as per manufacturer'srecommendation. The contractor shall be requiredto maintain the area free of weeds for a period of 1year from the date of application of 1st dose of anti-weed chemicals.

h. SITE DRAINAGE1. Adequate site drainage system shall be provided

by the Contractor.

2. The drainage scheme and associated drawingsshall be got approved.

3. All internal site drainage system, including the finalconnection/disposal to owner acceptance pointsshall be at of Supplier's scope including all requiredcivil work, mechanical and electrical systems. TheContractor shall connect his drain(s) at one or morepoints to outfall points as feasible at site.

i. ROADS AND CULVERTS

1. The main approach road including modificationof existing road to meet the site conditions,roads for access to equipment and buildingwithin substation are in the scope of bidder.Layout of the roads shall be based on Generaldetai l and Arrangement drawing for thesubstation.

2. All substation roads be constructed so as topermit transportation of all heavy equipment.The roads shall have min.3.75 black topping.Moorum shoulder shall be provided on eitherside of the road. The width of the shouldershall be as per approved drawing dependingupon the site conditions.

3. Road construct ion shal l be as per IRC

126

standards.4. Adequate provision shall be made for road

drainage. Protection of cut and embankmentslopes of roads as per s lope stabi l i tyrequirement shall be made.

5. All the culverts and its allied structure (requiredfor road/rail, drain trench crossings, etc.) shallbe designed for Class-AA loading as per IRCstandard/IS code and should be checked forloading.

6. All roads shall be designed for Class-`E' oftraffic as per IRC-37 Guidelines for the designof flexible pavements.

j. TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONThe Contractor shall provide a road systemintegrated with the transformer foundation to enableinstallation and the replacement of any failed unitby the spare unit located at the site. This systemshall enable the removal of any failed unit from itsfoundation to the nearest road. If trench/draincrossings are required then suitable R.C.C.culverts shall be provided in accordance with I.R.C.Code/relevant IS.

k. DESCRIPTION OF OIL RECOVERY SYSTEMThe oil recovery system shall be provided for alltransformers (containing insulating oil or anyinflammable or polluting liquid) in order to avoidspread of fire by the oil, and for environmentalprotection.Each transformer including oil conservator tank andcooler banks, etc., shall be placed in a self-sufficient pit surrounded by retaining wall s(Pitwalls). The clear distance of the retaining wall fromthe transformer shall be 20% of the transformerheight or 0.8 m whichever is more. The oilcollection pit thus formed shall have a void volumeequal to 200% volume of total oil in the transformer.The MS grating placed at the formation level shallbe covered with 10 mm thick layer of broken/crushed/non-crushed stone 40mm nominal sizewhich acts as an extinguisher for flaming oil.

Each oil collection pit shall be drained towards asump pit within the collection whose role is to drainwater and oil due to leakage within the collectionpit so that collection pit remains dry and clean.

1. MaterialsThe retaining walls which make up the oil collectionpit shall be made of fire resistant material such asreinforced cement concrete, fire brick etc., and shallbe impervious to oil.The minimum height of the retaining walls shallbe 15 cm above the finished level of the ground toavoid outside water pouring inside.The bottom of the pit shall have an uniform slopetowards the sump pit.

2. DrainageA device showing level of sump pit shall be providedby Contractor fitted along with the automatic/manual

pumping system, which shall have sufficientcapacity to evacuate the rain water from the sumppit. The Contractor may propose other betterscheme, if agreed by owner.If the heights of the retaining walls, which form theoil collection pit, exceed 60 cm, steps shall beprovided to facilitate access to the oil collection pit.

When designing the oil collection pit, the movementof the transformer must be taken into account.

3. The cost of constructing oil recovery system is tobe included in the transformer foundation cost.

l. FIRE PROTECTION WALLS1. General

Fire protection walls shall be provided inaccordance with Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC)recommendations.

2. Application CriteriaA fire wall shall be erected between the transformerto protect each one from the effects of fire on anotheras per TAC guidelines.Also, if the free distance between the transformer,and auxiliary services transformer is less.

3. Fire resistanceThe firewall shall have a minimum fire resistanceof 4 hours. The partitions, which are made to reducethe noise level, shall have the same fire resistancewhere the partitions are also used as firewalls.The walls of the building, which are used asfirewalls, shall also have a minimum fire resistanceof 4 hours.The firewall shall be designed in order to protectagainst the effect of radiant heat and flying debrisfrom an adjacent fire.

4. Mechanical resistanceThe firewall shall have the mechanical resistanceto withstand local atmospheric conditions. If thiswall shall serve as a support for equipment suchas insulators, etc., its mechanical rigidity must beincreased. Connecting the walls by steel or otherstructures, which may produce a reversing torqueif overheated, shall be avoided.

5. DimensionsThe firewall shall extend at least 2 m on each sideof the transformer and at least 1 m above theconservator tank or safety vent.These dimensions might be reduced in specialcases, and if TAC permits so, where there is lackof space. A minimum of 2 meter clearance shallbe provided between the equipments e.g.,transformer and firewalls.The building walls, which act as firewalls, shallextend at least 1 m above the roof in order to protectit.

6. MaterialsThe firewall may be made of reinforced concrete(M-20 grade), as per the system requirements.Materials used must conform to the standards ofthe National Fire Prevention Association and TAC

127

norms.7. The cost of constructing fire protection wall

including supply of all material shall be included inthe transformer foundation cost.

m. CABLE AND PIPE TRENCHES1. The cable trenches and precast removable

RCC cover (with lifting arrangement)2. The cable trench wall shall be designed for the

following loads.i) Dead load of 155 kg/m length of cable

support + 75 Kg on one tier at the end.ii) Triangular earth pressure + uniform

surcharge pressure of 2 T/m2.3. Cable trench covers shall be designed for self-

weight of top slab + UDL of 2000 Kg/m2 +concentrated load of 200 Kg at centre of spanon each panel.

4. Cable trench crossing the road/rails shall bedesigned for class AA. Loading of IRC/relevantIS Code and should be checked for transformerloading.

5. Trenches shall be drained. Necessary sumpsbe constructed and sump pumps if necessaryshall be supplied. Cable trenches shall not beused as storm water drains.

6. The top of trenches shall be kept at least 100mm above the finished ground level. The top ofcable trench shall be such that the surfacerainwater does not enter the trench.

7. All metal parts inside the trench shall beconnected to the earthing system.

8. Cables from trench to equipments shall run inhard conduit pipes.

9. Trench wall shall not foul with the foundation.Suitable clear gap shall be provided.

10.The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/500along the run and 1/250 perpendicular to therun.

11. All the construction joints of cable trenches i.e.,between base slab to base slab and the junctionof vertical wall to base slab as well as fromvertical wall to wall and all the expansion jointsshall be provided with approved quality PVCwater stops of approx. 230 x 5 mm size for thosesections where the ground water table isexpected to rise above the junction of base slaband vertical wall of cable trenches.

12.Cable trenches shall be blocked at the ends ifrequired with brick masonry in cement sandmortar 1:6 and plaster with 12 mm thick 1:6cement sand mortar.

n. FOUNDATION / RCC CONSTRUCTION

(i) General1. Work covered under this Clause of the

Specification comprises the design andconstruction of foundations and other RCCconstructions for switchyard structures,

equipment supports, trenches, drains, jackingpad, control cubicles, bus supports,transformer, marshalling kiosks, auxiliaryequipments and systems, buildings, tanks,boundary wall or for any other equipment orservice and any other foundation required tocomplete the work. This clause is as wellapplicable to the other ECC constructions.

2. Concrete shall conform to the requirementsmentioned in IS: 456 and all the tests shall beconducted as per relevant Indian StandardCodes as mentioned in Standard field qualityplan appended with the specification.A minimum grade of M20 concrete (1:1.5:3 mix)shall be used for all structural/load bearingmembers as per latest IS 456.

3. If the site is sloppy, the foundation height willbe adjusted to maintain the exact level of thetop of structures to compensate such slopes.

4. The switchyard foundation's plinths andbuilding plinths shall be minimum 300 mm and500 mm above f inished ground levelrespectively.

5. Minimum 75 mm thick lean concrete (1:4:8)shall be provided below all undergroundstructures, foundations, trenches, etc., toprovide a base for construction.

6. Concrete made with Portland slag cement shallbe carefully cured and special importance shallbe given during the placing of concrete andremoval of shuttering.

7. The design and detailing of foundations shallbe done based on the approved soil data andsub-soil conditions as well as for all possiblecritical loads and the combinations thereof. TheSpread footings foundation or pile foundationas may be required based on soil/sub-soilconditions and superimposed loads shall beprovided.

8. If pile foundations are adopted, the same shallbe case-in-situ driven/bored or precast orunderreamed type as per relevant parts of ISCode 2911. Only RCC piles shall be provided.Suitability of the adopted pile foundations shallbe justified by way of full design calculations.Detailed design calculations shall be submittedby the bidder showing complete details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used. Necessaryinitial load test shall also be carried out by thebidder at their cost to establish the piles designcapacity. Only after the design capacity of pileshas been established, the Contractor shall takeup the job of piling. Routine tests fro the pilesshall also be conducted. All the work (design &testing) shall be planned in such a way thatthese shall not cause any delay in projectcompletion.

(ii) Design1. All foundation shall be of reinforced cement

concrete. The design and construction of RCCstructures shall be carried out as per IS: 456and minimum grade of concrete shall be M-20.

128

Higher grade of concrete than specified abovemay be used at the discretion of Contractorwithout any additional financial implication tothe Owner.

2. Limit state method of design shall be adoptedunless specified otherwise in the specification.

3. For detailing of reinforcement IS: 2502 and SP:34 shall be followed. Cold twisted deformedbars (Fe=415 N/mm2) conforming to IS: 1786shall be used as reinforcement. However, inspecific areas, mild steel (Grade-I) conformingto IS: 432 can also be used. Two layers ofreinforcement (on inner and outer face) shallbe provided for wall and slab sections havingthickness of 150 mm and above. Clear coverto reinforcement towards the earth face shallbe minimum 40 mm.

4. RCC water retaining structures like storagetanks, etc., shall be designed as uncrackedsection in accordance with IS: 3370 (Part I to IV)by working stress method. However, waterchannels shall be designed as cracked sectionwith limited steel stresses as per IS: 3370 (PartI to IV) by working stress method.

5. The procedure used for the design of thefoundations shall be the most critical loadingcombination of the steel structure and orequipment and or superstructure and otherconditions, which produces the maximumstresses in the foundation or the foundationcomponent and as per the relevant IS Codes offoundation design. Detai led designcalculations shall be submitted by the biddershowing complete details of piles/pile groupsproposed to be used.

6. Design shall consider any sub-soil waterpressure that may be encountered followingrelevant standard strictly.

7. Necessary protection to the foundation work, ifrequired shall be provided to take care of anyspecial requirements for aggressive alkalinesoil, black cotton soil or any other type of soilwhich is detrimental/harmful to the concretefoundations.

8. RCC columns shall be provided with rigidconnection at the base.

9. All sub-structures shall be checked for slidingand overturning stability during bothconstruction and operating conditions forvarious combinations of loads. Factors of safetyfor these cases shall be taken as mentioned inrelevant IS Codes or as stipulated elsewherein the Specifications. For checking againstoverturning, weight of soil vertically above footingshall be taken and inverted frustum of pyramidof earth on the foundation should not beconsidered.

10.Earth pressure for all underground structuresshall be calculated using co-efficient of earthpressure at rest, co-efficient of active or passiveearth pressure (whichever is applicable).However, for the design of sub-structures of any

underground enclosures, earth pressure atrest shall be considered.

11.In addition to earth pressure and ground waterpressure etc., a surcharge load of 2T/Sq.mshall also be considered for the design of allunderground structures including channels,sumps, tanks, trenches, sub-structure of anyunderground hollow enclosure, etc., for thevehicular traffic in the vicinity of the structure.

12.Following conditions shall be considered forthe design of water tank in pumps house,channels, sumps, trenches and otherunderground structures:a) Full water pressure from inside and no earth

pressure and ground water pressure andsurcharge pressure from outside(application only to structures, which areliable to be filled up with water or any otherliquid).

b) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure andground water pressure from outside andno water pressure from inside.

c) Design shall also be checked againstbuoyancy due to the ground water duringconstruction and maintenance stages.Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 againstbuoyancy shall be ensured ignoring thesuperimposed loadings.

13.The foundations shall be proportioned so thatthe estimated total and differential movementsof the foundations are not greater than themovements that the structure or equipment isdesigned to accommodate.

14.The foundations of transformer and circuitbreaker shall be of block type foundation.Minimum reinforcement shall be governed byIS: 2974 and IS: 456.

15.The tower and equipment foundations shall bechecked for a factor of safety of 2.2 for normalcondition and 1.65 for short circuit conditionagainst sliding, overturning and pullout. Thesame factors shall be used as partial safetyfactor overloads in limit state design also.

(iii) Admixtures & Additives1. Only approved admixtures shall be used in the

concrete for the Works. When more than oneadmixture is to be used, each admixture shallbe batched in its own batch and added to themixing water separately before discharging intothe mixer. Admixtures shall be delivered insuitably labeled containers to enableidentification.

2. Admixtures in concrete shall conform to IS:9103. The water proofing cement additivesshall conform to IS: 2645. Owner shall approveconcrete Admixtures/Additives.

3. The Contractor may propose and the Ownermay approve the use of a water-reducing set-retarding admixture in some of the concrete.The use of such an admixture will not be

129

approved to overcome problems associatedwith inadequate concrete plant capacity orimproperly planned placing operations andshall only be approved as an aid to overcomingunusual circumstances and placing conditions.

4. The water reducing set-retarding admixtureshall be an approved brand of Ligno-sulphonate type admixture.

5. The water proofing cement additives shall beused as required/advised by the owner.

o. GATES AND BOUNDARY WALL1. The Gate frame shall be made of medium duty

MS pipe conforming to relevant IS with weldedjoints.

2. The gates shall be fabricated with welded jointsto achieve rigid connections. The gate framesshall be painted with one coat of approved steelprimmer and two coats of synthetic enamelpaint.

3. Gates shall be fitted with approved quality ironhinges, latch and latch catch. Latch and latchcatch shall be suitable for attachment andoperation of pad lock from either side of gates.Hinges shall permit gates to swing through 180degree back against fence.

Gates shall be fitted with galvanized chain hookor gate hold back to hold gates open. Doublegates shall be fitted with centre rest and dropbolt to secure gates in closed position.Gates shall be installed in locations shown ondrawings. Next to the main gate, a men gate(1.25 m wide, single leaf) shall also be provided.

6. Bottom of gates shall be set approximately 40mm above ground surface and necessaryguiding mechanism shall be fitted.

7. The Contractor shall design and constructboundary wall around substation area as perrequirements. The boundary wall shall be ofheight 1.7M and shall be made of RCC frameconstruction with RCC column and plinth beamarrangement and panels filled with one brickthick wall in cement sand mortar 1:6. Theboundary wall shall be plastered on bothexternal and internal faces with cement andsand plaster 1:6 of thickness 18 mm and 12mm respectively. An additional barbed Y-shaped arm of MS angle 50x50x6 with 3-rows(6 nos) barbed wire A-4 IS:278. Expansion jointsshall be provided as per codal requirements.MS grating shall be provided at requiredlocations for drainage purposes. The boundarywall shall be painted with minimum two coatsof color wash over a base coat of white washwith lime. The front portion of boundary wallshall however be with a RC jail and 12 mmsquare MS bar top above brick work and pebbledash plaster finish with colour pigment. Thesteel work shall be given two coats of syntheticenamel paint of approved make over one coatof primer. A tentative drawing is enclosed for

guidance purpose.8. A Security room shall be provided at the entrance

of switchyard. The minimum dimension of theroom shall be 3.0 m length and 3.0 m width.The roof shall be at RCC and aestheticallypleasing.

p. BUILDINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1. General

The scope include the design, engineering andconstruction including anti-termite treatment, plinthprotection, DPC of Building including sanitary, watersupply, electrification, false ceiling etc., of controlroom building, and DG set building. The buildingsshall be of RCC framed structure of concrete ofM20 grade (Min.)

2. Control Room BuildingMinimum floor area requirements shall be 9x9 Sq.Meter which may be increased at the time ofdetailed engineering to suit project requirements.The layout of the control room shall be finalised asper detailed engineering to suit projectrequirements.An open space of 1 m minimum shall be providedon the periphery of the rows of panel and equipmentgenerally in order to allow easy operator movementand access as well as maintenance.

Any future possibility of annexe building shall betaken care of while finalizing the layout of the controlroom building.Minimum head room of 3 M below soffit of beams/false ceiling shall be considered for rooms. Theroof shall have four side sloping roof or flat roof asfinalised during detailed engineering.

2.1 Designa) The buildings shall be designed:

1. To the requirements of the National BuildingCode of India, and the standards quotedtherein.

2. For the specified climatic and loadingconditions

3. To adequately suit the requirements of theequipment and apparatus contained in thebuildings and in al l respects to becompatible with the intended use andoccupancy

4. With a functional and economical spacearrangement

5. For a life expectancy of structure, systemsand components not less than that of theequipment, which is contained in thebuilding, provided regular maintenance iscarried out

6. Be aesthetically pleasing. Differentbuildings shall show a uniformity andconsistency in architectural design.

7. To allow for easy access to equipment andmaintenance of the equipment.

130

8. With, wherever required, fire retardingmaterials for walls, ceilings and doors,which would prevent supporting orspreading of fire.

9. With materials preventing dustaccumulation.

b) Suitable expansion joints shall be provided inthe longitudinal direction wherever necessarywith provision of twin columns.

c) Individual members of the buildings frame shallbe designed for the worst combination of forcessuch as bending moment, axial force, shearforce, torsion, etc.

d) Permissible stresses for dif ferent loadcombinations shall be taken as per relevant ISCodes.

e) All cable vaults shall be located above groundlevels i.e., cable vaults shall not be provided asbasements in the buildings.

f) The building lighting shall be designed inaccordance with the requirements.

g) One emergency exit shall be provided in controlroom building.

2.2 Design loadsBuilding structures shall be designed for the mostcritical combinations of dead loads, super-imposed loads, equipment loads, crane load, windloads, seismic loads, and temperature loads.Dead loads shall include the weight of structurescomplete with finishes, fixtures and partitions andshould be taken as per IS: 1911.Super-imposed loads in different areas shallinclude live loads, minor equipment loads, cabletrays, small pipe racks/hangers and erection,operation and maintenance loads. Equipmentloads shall constitute, if applicable, all load ofequipments to be supported on the building frame.For crane loads an impact factor of 30% and lateralcrane surge of 10% (lifted weight + trolley) shall beconsidered in the analysis of frame according toprovisions of IS: 875. the horizontal surge shall be5% of the static wheel load.

The wind loads shall be computed as per IS 875,Seismic Coefficient method shall be used for theseismic analysis as per IS 1893 with importancefactor 1.5.For temperature loading, the total temperaturevariation shall be considered as 2/3 of the averagemaximum annual variation in temperature. Theaverage maximum annual variation in temperaturefor the purpose shall be taken as the differencebetween the mean of the daily minimumtemperature during the coldest month of the yearand mean of daily maximum temperature duringthe hottest month of the year. The structure shallbe designed to withstand stresses due to 50% ofthe total temperature variation.Wind and Seismic forces shall not be consideredshall not be considered to act simultaneously.

Floors/slabs shall be designed to carry loads

imposed by equipment, cables piping travel ofmaintenance trucks and equipment and otherloads associated with building. Floors shall bedesigned for live loads as per relevant IS. Cableand piping loads shall also be consideredadditionally for floors where these loads areexpected.In addition, beams shall be designed for anyincidental point loads to be applied at any pointalong the beams. The floor loads shall be subjectto Owner's approval.For consideration of loads on structures, IS: 875,the following minimum superimposed live loadsshall, however, be considered for the design.

a. Roof 1.5 KN/M 2 For accessible roofs

0.75 KN/M2 For in-accessible roofs

b) RCC-Floor

i) 5 KN/M2

For offices

ii) 10 KN/M2

(minimum)

For equipment floors or actual requirement, if higher than 10 kN/M2, based on equipment component weight and layout plans.

c. Toiler Room

2 KN/M2

d. Chequered plate floor

4 KN/M2

e. Walkways 3 KN/M2

Any additional load coming in the structure shall becalculated as per IS: 875.

.2.3 SubmissionThe following information shall be submitted forreview and approval to the Owner:a. Design criteria shall comprise the codes and

standards used, applicable climatic dataincluding wind loads, earthquake factorsmaximum and minimum temperaturesapplicable to the bui lding locations,assumptions of dead and live loads, includingequipment loads, impact factors, safety factorsand other relevant information.

b. Structural design calculations and drawing(including constructions / fabrication) for allreinforced concrete and structural steelstructures.

c. Fully, dimensioned concept plan including floorplans, cross-sections, longitudinal sections,elevations and perspective view of eachbuilding. These drawings shall be drawn at ascale not smaller than 1:50 and shall identifythe major building components.

d. Fully dimensioned drawings showing detailsand sections drawn to scales of sufficient sizeto clearly show sizes and configuration of thebuilding components and the relationshipbetween them.

131

Product information of building componentsand materials, including walls partitions flooringceiling, roofing, door and windows and buildingfinishes.

e. A detailed schedule of building f inishesincluding colour schemes.

f. A door and window schedule showing doortypes and locations, door lock sets and latchand other door hardware.Approval of the above information shall beobtained before ordering materials or startingfabrication or construction as applicable.

2.4 Finish ScheduleThe finishing schedule is given in subsequentclauses.

2.5 FlooringFlooring in various rooms of control room buildingshall be as for detailed schedules given in Table-1.

2.6 WallsContro l room bui ldings shal l be of f ramedsuperstructure. All walls shall be non-load bearingwalls. Min. thickness of external walls shall be230 mm (one brick) with 1:6 cement sand mortar.

2.7 PlasteringAll internal walls shall have minimum 15 mm thick1:6 cement sand plaster. The ceiling shall have6mm thick 1:4 cement sand plaster.

2.8 FinishingAll external surfaces shall have 18 mm cementplaster in two coats, under layer 12 mm thickcement plaster 1:5 and finished with a top layer 6mm thick cement plaster 1:6 (DSR (13.19) withwater proofing compound. The paint shall be anti-fungal quality of reputed brand suitable for masonrysurfaces for high rainfall zone. White cement primershall be used as per manufacturer'srecommendation.

INTERNAL FINISH SCHEDULE IS GIVEN TABLE – 1

Sl No.

Location Flooring & Skirting 150 mm High Wall Internal Ceiling Doors, Windows

Ventilators

1. Control Room & Relay room

Homogeneous PVC tiles 2 mm thick over 25 mm thick 1:2:4 under bed neat cement finished flooring

Normal 1:6 cement plaster 15 mm thick

Normal 1:4 cement plaster 6 mm thick

Anodised aluminium indal or equivalent extruded sections as per IS 733 & 1285 Glazing Flat (DSR 97-11.64.2 drawn sheet & 11.4.1) glass (Min 5.5 mm thick) double glazing with 12 mm gap hermetic cally sealed. (DSR097, 24.1, 24.3, 24.4

2. Sub-Station in-charge, officers, corridor, staff, rooms

Terrazzo tiles with white cement (DSR-97) (11.29 A.1)

Oil bound washable distemper on smooth surface applied with POP putty

-do- Teak wood frame flush doors shutter (DSR 97 9.1.3 & 9.4 A.2.2) Windows, Ventilators Aluminium as at 1.

Sl No.

Location Flooring & Skirting 150 mm High Wall Internal Ceiling Doors, Windows

Ventilators

(DSR-97) (11.48.1)

Smooth surface applied with POP putty.

For entrance with glazing

3. Battery room Acid Resistant Tiles 25 mm thick (DSR 97 11.36 C 12)

DADO acid resistant title 2.1 M high Acid resistant paint above 2.1 M high acid resistant paint above 2.1 m upto ceiling (DSR 97.11.36 C 2.2) & 13.96.1)

Acid resistant paint (DSR 97 13 72.1)

Steel door 45 mm thick double sheet 18 G steel suitably reinforced and filled with mineral wool. Hot rolled steel framed glazed window and ventilators.

132

Sl

No. Location Flooring & Skirting

150 mm High Wall Internal Ceiling Doors, Windows Ventilators

4. Cable vault double sheet (if required)

IPS flooring (DSR 97 11.4.3)

White wash (DSR 97 13.72.1)

White wash Steel door double sheet as above. Ventilators as at 5.

5. Toilet Terrazzo tiles with White cement (DSR 97, 11.29 a.1)

DADO glazed tile 2.1 M high for toilet for pantry above working platform upto 750 mm (DSR 97 11.36 B)

White wash Teak wood frame flush door shutter with anodized Aluminium fixtures best quality (DSR 97 9.1.3 & 9.4 a 2) Windows, ventilators aluminium as at 1.

6. Other areas not specified

Terrazo tiles with white cement (DSR 97 29 A.1)

Dry distemper (DSR 97.13.75)

White wash

Note : DSR item references to be read with CPWD specifications are only for material and workmanship guidance of theContractor.

2.9 RoofRoof of the C.R. Building shall consist of Cast-in-situ RCC slab treated with a water proofing systemwhich shall be an integral cement based treatmentconforming to CPWD specification (item No.25.8of DSR 1997), the water proofing treatment shallbe of following operations.a) Applying and grouting a slurry coat of neat

cement using 2.75 kg/m2 of cement admixedwith proprietary water proofing compoundsconforming to IS:2645 over the RCC slabincluding cleaning the surface before treatment.

b) Laying cement concrete using broken bricks/bricks brick bats 25 mm to 100 mm size with505 of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarsesand) admixed with proprietary water proofingcompound conforming to IS: 2645 over 20 mmthick layer of cement mortar of min 1:5 (Cement:5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645 torequired slope and treating similarly theadjoining walls upto 300 mm height includingrounding of junctions of walls and slabs.

c) After two days of proper curing applying asecond coat of cement slurry admixed withproprietary water proofing compoundconforming to IS:2645.

d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4course sand) admixed with proprietary waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645 andfinally finishing the surface with trowel with neatcement slurry and making of 300 x 300 mmsquare.

e) The whole terrace so finished shall be floodedwith water for a minimum period of two weeksfor curing and for final test. All above operationsto be done in order and as directed andspecified by the Engineering-in-charge.With average thickness of 120 mm and

minimum thickness at khurra at 65 mm.2.10 Glazing

Minimum thickness of glazing shall be 5.5 mmas per IS:2835.

2.11 Doors and Windows

The details of doors and windows of the controlroom building shall be as per finish scheduleTable-1 and tender drawing with the relevantIS, code. Rolling steel shutters and rolling steelgrills shall be provided as per layout andrequirement of buildings. Paints used in thework shall be of best quality specified in CPWDspecification.

2.12 Plumbing & Sanitation

All plumbing and sanitation shall be executedto comply with the requirements of theappropriate bye-laws, rules an regulations ofthe Local Authority having jurisdiction over suchmatters. The Contractor shall arrange for allnecessary formalities to be met in regard toinspection, testing, obtaining approval andgiving notices etc.

i) PVC syntax or equivalent make Roof watertank of adequate capacity depending on thenumber of users for 24 hours storage shallbe provided. Minimum 2 Nos 500 litrescapacity shall be provided.

ii) Galvanized MS pipe of medium classconforming to IS:1239 shall be used forinternal & external piping work for potablewater supply.

iii) Sand CI pipes with lead joints conformingto IS:1729 shall be used for sanitary worksabove ground level.

iv) Each toilet shall have the following minimumfittings.

a) WC (Western type) 390 mm high with toiletpaper roll holder and all fittings or WC (IndianType) Orissa Pattern (580 x 440 mm) with

133

all fittings. (Both types of WCs shall beprovided at alternate locations)

b) Urinal (430 x 260 x 350 mm size) with allfittings.

c) Wash basin (550 x 400 mm size) with allfittings.

d) Bathroom mirror (600 x 450 x 6 mm thick)hard board backing.

e) CP brass towel rail (600 x 20 mm) with CPbrass brackets.

f) Soap holder and liquid soap dispenser.v) Water cooler for drinking water with

adequate water storage facility shall beprovided and located near control roominstead of near toilet block.

vi) An Eye & face fountain conforming toIS:1052 shall be provided for battery room.

vii) 1 No. stainless steel kitchen sink with Drainboard (510 x 1040 x 178 mm bowl depth)for pantry shall be provided.

viii)All f itt ings, fastener, grating shall bechromium plated.

ix) All sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be ofapproved quality and type manufactured bywell known manufacturers. All items broughtto site must bear identification marks of thetype of the manufacturer.

x) Soil, waste and drain pipes, for undergroundworks shall be stone ware for areas notsubject to traffic load. Heavy-duty cast ironpipes shall be used otherwise.

q. MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1. Dense concrete with controlled water cement ratio

as per IS-code shall be used for all undergroundconcrete structures such as pump-house, tanks,water retaining structures, cable and pipe trenchesetc. for achieving water-tightness.

2. All joints including construction and expansionjoints for the water retaining structures shall bemade water tight by using PVC ribbed water stopswith central bulb. However, kicker type (externallyplaced) PVC water stops shall be used for the baseslab and in other areas where it is required tofacilitate concreting. The minimum thickness ofPVC water stops shall be 5 mm and minimumwidth shall be 230 mm.

3. All steel sections and fabricated structures whichare required to be transported on sea shall beprovided with anti corrosive paint to take care ofsea worthiness.

4. All mild steel parts used in the water retainingstructures shall be hot-double dip galvanized. Theminimum coating of the zinc shall be 750 gm/sq.m. for galvanized structures and shall comply withIS:2629 and IS:2633. galvanizing shall be checkedand tested in accordance with IS:2633. thegalvanizing shall be followed by the application ofan etching primer and dipping in black bitumen inaccordance with BS:3416.

5. A screed concrete layer not less than 100 mm thick

and of grade not weaker than M10 conforming toIS:456-1978 shall be provided below all waterretaining structures. A sliding layer of bitumen paperor craft paper shall be provided over the screedlayer to destroy the bond between the screed andthe base slab concrete of the water retainingstructures.

6. Bricks having minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressivestrength can only be used for masonry work.Contractor shall ascertain himself at site regardingthe availability of bricks of minimum 75 kg/cm2compressive strength before submitting his offer.

7. Doors and windows on external walls of thebuildings (other than areas provided, with insulatedmetal claddings) shall be provided with RCC sun-shade over the openings with 300 mm projectionon either side of the openings. Projection ofsunshade from the wall shall be minimum 450mm over window openings and 750 mm over dooropenings.

8. All stairs, if specified, shall have maximum riserheight of 150 mm and a minimum tread width of300 mm. Minimum width of stairs shall be 1500mm. Service ladder shall be provided for accessto all roofs. RCC fire escape staircase shall beprovided in control buildings.

9. Angles 50 x 50 x 6 mm (minimum) with lugs shallbe provided for edge protection all round cut outs/openings in floor slab, edges of drains supportinggrating covers, edges of RCC cable/pipe trenchessupporting covers, edges of manholes supportingcovers, supporting edges of manhole precast coverand any other place where breakage of corners ofconcrete is expected.

10. Anti termite chemical treatment shall be given tocolumn pits, wall trenches, foundations ofbuildings, filling below the floors etc. as per IS:6313and other relevant Indian Standards.

11. If stair is specified, Hand-railing minimum 900 mmhigh shall be provided around all f loor/roofopenings, projections/balconies, walk ways,platforms, steel stairs etc. All handrails and ladderpipes shall be 32 mm nominal bore MS pipes(medium class) and shall be galvanized (medium-class as per IS:277). All rungs for ladder shall alsobe galvanized as per IS:277 medium classes.For RCC stairs, hand railing with 20 mm squareMS bars, balustrades with suitable MS flats shallbe provided with black PVC sheathing.For all civil works covered under this specification,nominal mix by volume batching as per CPWDspecification is intended. The relationship of gradeof concrete and ratio of ingredients shall be asbelow:

S. Mix Cement Sand Coarse Aggregate ofNo. 20 mm Down Grade

as per IS 3831. M 10 1 3 62. M 15 1 2 43. M 20 1 1.5 3

The material specification, workmanship andacceptance criteria shall be as per relevant clauses

134

of CPWD specification and approved standardField Quality Plan.17.13The details given in tender drawings shallbe considered along with details available in thissection of the specification while deciding variouscomponents of the building.17.14Items/components of buildings not explicitlycovered in the specification but required forcompletion of the project shall be deemed to beincluded in the scope.

r. INTERFACINGThe proper coordination & execution of allinterfacing civil works activities like fixing of conduitsin roofs/walls/floors, fixing of foundation bolts, fixingof lighting fixtures, fixing of supports/embedment,provision of cutouts etc. shall be the soleresponsibility of the Contractor. He shall plan allsuch activities in advance and execute in such amanner that interfacing activities do not becomebottlenecks and dismantling, breakage etc. isreduced to minimum.

s. WATER SUPPLYi) Contractor shall make its own arrangement for

construction water.ii) The contractor shall carry out all the plumbing/

erection works required for supply of water incontrol room building.

iii) The details of tanks, pipes, fittings, fixtures etcfor water supply are given elsewhere in thespecification under respective sections.

iv) A scheme shall be prepared by the contractorindicating the layout and details of water supplywhich shall be got approved by the Owner beforeactual start of work including all other incidentalitems not shown or specified but as may berequired for complete performance of theworks.

v) Bore wells and pumps for water supply are inthe scope of contractor meeting the day to dayrequirement of the water supply.

t. SEWAREAGE SYSTEM

i) Sewerage system shall be provided for controlroom building.

ii) The contractor shall construct septic tank andsoak pit suitable for 20 users.

iii) The system shall be designed as per relevantIS Codes.

u. STATUTORY RULES1. Contactor shall comply with all the applicable statutory

rules pertaining to factories act (as applicable for theState). Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee.Water Act for pollution control etc.

2. Provisions for fire proof doors, no. of staircases,fire separation wall, plastering on structuralmembers (in fire prone areas) etc. shall be madeaccording to the recommendations of Tariff AdvisoryCommittee.

3. Statutory clearance and norms of State PollutionControl Board shall be followed as per Water Actfor effluent quality from plant.

4. Requirement of sulphate resistant cement (SRC)for sub-structural works shall be decided inaccordance with the Indian Standards based onthe findings of the detailed soil investigation to becarried out by the Bidder.

5. Foundation system adopted by Bidder shall ensurethat relative settlement and other criteria shall beas per provision in IS:1904 and other IndianStandard.

6. all water retaining structures designed as un-cracked section shall also be tested for watertightness at full water level in accordance withclause No. 10 of IS:3370 (part-I).

7. Construction joints shall be as per IS:456.8. All underground concrete structures like

basements, pumps houses, water retainingstructures etc. shall have plasticizer cum waterproofing cement additive conforming to IS:9103.In addition, limit on permeability as given in IS:2645shall also be met with. The concrete surface ofthese structures in contact with earth shall also beprovided with two coat of bituminous painting forwater/damp proofing. In case of water leakage inthe above structures, Injection Method shall beapplied for requiring the leakage.

v v v

The situation of power distribution in India is notencouraging, as it is badly affected with high level oftechnical and commercial losses, coupled with unreliableand bad quality of supply. The subject has alreadyprovoked debates on various platforms in the past. Seriousefforts are being made to contain the level of losses withan aim to gradually improve the situation therebyenhancing the reliability and quality of power supply tothe consumers. Accelerated Power Development andReforms Programme (APDRP) conceived by Ministry ofPower, Govt. of India could be considered as concretestep towards distribution reform undertaken in the country.Substantial amount of financial resources totaling to Rs.40,000 Cr. has been earmarked by the Government, ofwhich Rs. 20,000 Cr. has been allotted towards investmentfor physical augmentation of the existing distributionnetwork. Balance Rs. 20,000 Cr. has been kept forproviding cash incentive to various States achieving actualcash loss reduction. The financial assistance of Rs. 20,000Cr. towards augmentation of distribution schemes consistgrant and loan of equal proportion. In case of specialcategory States, however, 90% of such assistance hasbeen allowed as grant, keeping in view the serious financialconstraints faced by these States.At present distribution losses are of the order of 40-50%of total power transfer to the consumer which isconsiderably at higher level in comparison with developedcountries. Reduction of such losses assumes criticalimportance particularly from the consideration that savingsin this area can be considered minimizing additional powercapacity addition programme to that extent, in thebackground of saving precious financial resources allottedto the power sector in India.

Implementation of APDRP programme was taken up since2002-03 in all the States covered under theseprogrammes. The progress, however, has so far beenslow, for various reasons, including non-availability ofuniform approach on the part of State Utilities and absenceof exclusive organizational support to undertake suchprogramme at their end. In view of this, Ministry of Powerdecided to establish the Task Force consisting of membersfrom consultants like NTPC, POWERGRID, CPRI andCEA, from IEEMA representing different products groupsand also from utilities like various SEBs, DISCOMS etc.The members of the Committee had deliberations/discussions on number of occasions and came out withthe enclosed Report having recommendations on thefollowing areas:* Standard layouts for 33/11 KV Station including

Bill of quantities* Standard construction practices for installation of

Pole mounted transformers etc including Bill of

quantities* Standard Specification of Major equipment* Standard Contractual terms and conditionThe "Turnkey Mode" of procurement for implementationof APDRP schemes was preferred to ensure coordinatedand time bound implementation of such programme onthe part of State utilities. A large number of the SEBs,however, today procure various items such asTransformer, Cables, Conductors, Poles etc. on a bulksupply basis and issue it to the local erection Contractoras per their erection programme. As the value of sucherection jobs being considerably smaller, efficient andprofessionally oriented agencies usually do not participatein such projects. Over and above, such implementationprocess mostly get adversely affected on account of mis-match between procurement and supply of Owner SupplyMaterials and the erection activities at site.In this context, the Report has attached emphasis to theconcept of High Voltage Distribution System (HVDS) assuch system contain high potential of minimizing technicaland commercial losses along with improving reliability andquality of supply. There being no LT conductor available,theft by unauthorized connection through hooking areavoided and loss on distribution system can be reducedto almost 12-15%. The pay back period in higher revenueearning areas is as low as 18-20 months. HVDS can alsobe adopted for highly congested areas. It was therefore,felt that as far as possible utilities should go in for HVDS.Recommendation covers the complete specifications andconstruction method for HVDS.It has been observed that variation in the standard ofconstruction practices followed by State utilities have alsocontributed heavily towards enhancing the technicallosses. The Committee has, therefore, recommended astandard layout for 33kV station and systems includinginstallation of pole mounting transformers etc. Committeehas also recommended guidelines to adopt standardspecifications for the main equipment to be used underAPDRP augmentation scheme.Recommendations of the Committee also includeguidelines relating to standard contractual terms andconditions to avoid contractual problems being faced bythe State utilities that have ventured into Turnkey processof project implementation. Adoption of the standardcontractual terms and conditions will help in fasterimplementation of the APDRP schemes.Keeping in view the crucial role that such projects have toplay towards economic development of the country, theMinistry of Power, Govt. of India may consider giving thisprogramme the status of a technology mission for theentire exercise.

Executive Summary